FDC37C93XAPM [SMSC]

Plug and Play Compatible Ultra I/O⑩ Controller with Soft Power Management; 即插即用兼容超I / O⑩控制器,软电源管理
FDC37C93XAPM
型号: FDC37C93XAPM
厂家: SMSC CORPORATION    SMSC CORPORATION
描述:

Plug and Play Compatible Ultra I/O⑩ Controller with Soft Power Management
即插即用兼容超I / O⑩控制器,软电源管理

多功能外围设备 微控制器和处理器
文件: 总280页 (文件大小:1196K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
FDC37C93xAPM  
ADVANCE INFORMATION  
Plug and Play Compatible Ultra I/O™ Controller  
with Soft Power Management  
FEATURES  
-
-
Four DMA Options  
Licensed CMOS 765B Floppy Disk  
Controller  
·
·
5 Volt Operation  
ISA Plug-and-Play Standard (Version 1.0a)  
Compatible Register Set  
Soft Power Management, SMI Support  
ACPI/Legacy Support  
-
-
Advanced Digital Data Separator  
Software and Register Compatible with  
SMSC's Proprietary 82077AA  
Compatible Core  
Sophisticated Power Control Circuitry  
(PCC) Including Multiple Powerdown  
Modes for Reduced Power Consumption  
Game Port Select Logic  
·
·
-
-
-
-
SCI/SMI Support  
Power Management Timer  
Power Button Override Event  
Either Edge Triggered Interrupts  
ACCESS.bus Support  
8042 Keyboard Controller  
2K Program ROM  
-
·
·
-
-
-
-
Supports Two Floppy Drives Directly  
24mA AT Bus Drivers  
Low Power CMOS Design  
-
-
-
256 Bytes Data RAM  
Asynchronous Access to Two Data  
Registers and One Status Register  
Supports Interrupt and Polling Access  
8 Bit Timer/Counter  
Port 92 Support  
Fast Gate A20 and Hardware Keyboard  
Reset  
·
Licensed CMOS 765B Floppy Disk  
Controller Core  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Supports Vertical Recording Format  
16 Byte Data FIFO  
100% IBM® Compatibility  
Detects All Overrun and Underrun  
Conditions  
48mA Drivers and Schmitt Trigger Inputs  
DMA Enable Logic  
·
Real Time Clock  
-
-
-
-
-
MC146818 and DS1287 Compatible  
256 Bytes of Battery Backed CMOS in  
Two Banks of 128 Bytes  
128 Bytes of CMOS RAM Lockable in  
4x32 Byte Blocks  
Data Rate and Drive Control Registers  
Enhanced Digital Data Separator  
Low Cost Implementation  
·
·
-
-
-
-
No Filter Components Required  
2 Mbps, 1 Mbps, 500 Kbps, 300 Kbps,  
250 Kbps Data Rates  
-
-
-
12 and 24 Hour Time Format  
Binary and BCD Format  
1 mA Standby Current (typ)  
Intelligent Auto Power Management  
2.88MB Super I/O Floppy Disk Controller  
Relocatable to 480 Different Addresses  
13 IRQ Options  
-
-
Programmable Precompensation Modes  
·
·
Serial Ports  
Relocatable to 480 Different Addresses  
-
-
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
FEATURES ........................................................................................................................................1  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................................4  
PIN CONFIGURATION.......................................................................................................................5  
DESCRIPTION OF PIN FUNCTIONS...........................................................................................6  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................15  
SUPER I/O REGISTERS ...........................................................................................................15  
HOST PROCESSOR INTERFACE.............................................................................................15  
FLOPPY DISK CONTROLLER...................................................................................................16  
FDC INTERNAL REGISTERS....................................................................................................16  
INSTRUCTION SET .........................................................................................................................44  
SERIAL PORT (UART).....................................................................................................................70  
INFRARED INTERFACE...................................................................................................................85  
PARALLEL PORT.............................................................................................................................86  
IBM XT/AT COMPATIBLE, BI-DIRECTIONAL AND EPP MODES..............................................88  
EXTENDED CAPABILITIES PARALLEL PORT ..........................................................................95  
AUTO POWER MANAGEMENT .....................................................................................................111  
INTEGRATED DRIVE ELECTRONICS INTERFACE .......................................................................116  
HOST FILE REGISTERS.........................................................................................................116  
TASK FILE REGISTERS..........................................................................................................116  
IDE OUTPUT ENABLES..........................................................................................................117  
BIOS BUFFER.........................................................................................................................118  
GENERAL PURPOSE I/O FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ...............................................................121  
EITHER EDGE TRIGGERED INTERRUPTS............................................................................135  
8042 KEYBOARD CONTROLLER AND REAL TIME CLOCK FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION...........136  
SOFT POWER MANAGEMENT......................................................................................................161  
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT INTERRUPT (SMI).................................................................................165  
ACCESS.BUS ................................................................................................................................166  
ACPI FEATURES ...........................................................................................................................172  
CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................................188  
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................238  
POWER SUPPLY OPERATIONAL MODES.............................................................................242  
TIMING DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................243  
ECP PARALLEL PORT TIMING......................................................................................................270  
80 Arkay Drive  
Hauppauge, NY. 11788  
(516) 435-6000  
FAX (516) 273-3123  
2
-
-
13 IRQ Options  
-
-
Four DMA Options  
Standard Mode  
Two High Speed NS16C550 Compatible  
UARTs with Send/Receive 16 Byte  
FIFOs  
-
IBM PC/XT, PC/AT, and PS/2Ô  
Compatible Bidirectional ParallelPort  
-
-
Programmable Baud Rate Generator  
Modem Control Circuitry Including 230K  
and 460K Baud  
-
-
Enhanced Mode  
-
Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP)  
Compatible - EPP 1.7 and EPP 1.9  
(IEEE 1284 Compliant)  
-
IrDA, HP-SIR, ASK-IR Support  
·
IDE Interface  
High Speed Mode  
-
-
Relocatable to 480 Different Addresses  
13 IRQ Options (IRQ Steering through  
Chip)  
-
Microsoft and Hewlett Packard  
Extended Capabilities Port (ECP)  
Compatible (IEEE 1284 Compliant)  
-
-
Two Channel/Four Drive Support  
On-Chip Decode and Select Logic  
Compatible with IBM PC/XT® and  
PC/AT® Embedded Hard Disk Drives  
Serial EEPROM Interface  
Multi-ModeÔ Parallel Port with ChiProtectÔ  
Relocatable to 480 Different Addresses  
13 IRQ Options  
-
-
Incorporates ChiProtectÔ Circuitry for  
Protection Against Damage Due to  
Printer Power-On  
12 mA Output Drivers  
·
·
·
·
·
ISA Host Interface  
16 Bit Address Qualification  
-
-
160 Pin QFP Package  
*Note:  
The “X” in the Ultra I/O part number is a designator that changes  
depending upon the particular BIOS used inside the specific chip.  
“2” denotes AMI Keyboard BIOS/”5” denotes Phoenix Keyboard  
BIOS.  
3
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
The FDC37C93xAPM incorporates a keyboard  
These features include support of both legacy  
and ACPI power management models through  
the selection of SMI or SCI. It implements a 24-  
bit power management timer, power button  
override event (4 second button hold to turn off  
the system) and either edge triggered interrupts.  
interface, real-time clock, SMSC's true CMOS  
765B floppy disk controller, advanced digital  
data separator, 16 byte data FIFO, two 16C550  
compatible UARTs, one Multi-Mode parallel port  
which includes ChiProtect circuitry plus EPP  
and ECP support, IDE interface, on-chip 24 mA  
AT bus drivers, game port chip select and two  
floppy direct drive support, as well as  
ACCESS.bus, soft power management and SMI  
support. The true CMOS 765B core provides  
100% compatibility with IBM PC/XT and PC/AT  
architectures in addition to providing data  
overflow and underflow protection. The SMSC  
advanced digital data separator incorporates  
SMSC's patented data separator technology,  
allowing for ease of testing and use. Both on-  
chip UARTs are compatible with the NS16C550.  
The parallel port, the IDE interface, and the  
game port select logic are compatible with IBM  
PC/AT architecture, as well as EPP and ECP.  
The FDC37C93xAPM incorporates sophisticated  
The FDC37C93xAPM provides support for the  
ISA Plug-and-Play Standard (Version 1.0a) and  
provides for the recommended functionality to  
support Windows '95.  
configuration registers,  
Through internal  
each of the  
FDC37C93xAPM's logical device's I/O address,  
DMA channel and IRQ channel may be  
programmed.  
There are 480 I/O address  
location options, 13 IRQ options, and three DMA  
channel options for each logical device.  
The FDC37C93xAPM does not require any  
external filter components and is, therefore,  
easy to use and offers lower system cost and  
reduced board area. The FDC37C93xAPM is  
software and register compatible with SMSC's  
proprietary 82077AA core.  
power control circuitry (PCC).  
The PCC  
supports multiple low power down modes.  
IBM, PC/XT and PC/AT are registered trademarks and PS/2 is a trademark  
of International Business Machines Corporation  
SMSC is a registered trademark and Ultra I/O, ChiProtect, and Multi-Mode  
are trademarks of Standard Microsystems Corporation  
The FDC37C93xAPM provides features for  
compliance with the “Advanced Configuration  
and Power Interface Specification” (ACPI).  
4
PIN CONFIGURATION  
GND  
DRVDEN0  
DRVDEN1  
nMTR0  
nDS1  
nDS0  
nMTR1  
GND  
nDIR  
nSTEP  
nWDATA  
nWGATE  
nHDSEL  
nINDEX  
nTRK0  
nWRTPRT  
nRDATA  
nDSKCHG  
MEDIA_ID1  
mEDIA_ID0  
VCC  
CLOCKI  
nIDE1_OE  
nHDCS0  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
nROMDIR  
nROMCS  
RD7  
RD6  
RD5  
RD4  
RD3  
RD2  
RD1  
120  
119  
118  
117  
116  
115  
114  
113  
112  
111  
110  
109  
108  
107  
106  
105  
104  
103  
102  
101  
100  
99  
98  
97  
96  
95  
94  
93  
92  
91  
90  
89  
88  
87  
86  
85  
84  
83  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
RD0  
GP25  
GP24  
GP23  
GP22  
GP21  
GP20  
GP17  
GP16  
GP15  
VCC  
GP14  
GP13  
GP12  
GP11  
GP10  
GND  
MCLK  
MDAT  
KCLK  
KDAT  
IOCHRDY  
TC  
DRQ3  
nDACK3  
DRQ2  
nDACK2  
DRQ1  
nDACK1  
DRQ0  
nDACK0  
FDC37C93xAPM  
160 Pin QFP  
nHDCS1  
IDE1_IRQ  
nHDCS2/SA13  
nHDCS3/SA14  
IDE2_IRQ/SA15  
nIOROP  
nIOWOP  
VTR  
nPOWER ON  
BUTTON_IN  
HCLK  
16CLK  
CLK01  
CLK02  
CLK03  
82  
81  
GND  
5
DESCRIPTION OF PIN FUNCTIONS  
BUFFER  
TYPE  
PIN NO.  
NAME  
SYMBOL  
PROCESSOR/HOST INTERFACE  
72:79  
41:52  
53  
System Data Bus  
SD[0:7]  
I/O24  
System Address Bus  
SA[0:11]  
nCS  
I
Chip Select/SA12 (Active Low)(Note 1, 4)  
Address Enable (DMA master has bus control)  
I/O Channel Ready  
I
I
70  
AEN  
90  
IOCHRDY  
RESET_DRV  
OD24  
IS  
80  
Reset Drive  
67:61,  
59:54  
Interrupt Requests [1,3:12,14,15]  
(Polarity control for IRQ8)  
IRQ[1,3:12,  
14,15]  
024/OD24  
(Note 0)  
82,84,  
86,88  
DMA Requests  
DRQ[0:3]  
O24  
81,83,  
85,87  
DMA Acknowledge  
nDACK[0:3]  
I
89  
68  
69  
35  
36  
22  
37  
38  
39  
Terminal Count  
TC  
I
I/O Read  
nIOR  
I
I/O Write  
nIOW  
HCLK  
16CLK  
CLOCKI  
CLKO1  
CLKO2  
CLKO3  
I
High Speed Clock Out 24/48 MHz  
16 MHz Out  
O20  
O8SR  
ICLK  
O16SR  
O8SR  
O8SR  
14.318 MHz Clock Input  
14.318 MHz Clock Output 1  
14.318 MHz Clock Output 2  
14.318 MHz Clock Output 3  
POWER PINS  
21, 60,  
101, 125,  
139  
+5V Supply Voltage  
VCC  
32  
Trickle Voltage Input  
VTR  
1, 8, 40, Ground  
71, 95,  
GND  
123, 130  
FDD INTERFACE  
17  
Read Disk Data  
nRDATA  
IS  
6
DESCRIPTION OF PIN FUNCTIONS  
NAME  
BUFFER  
TYPE  
PIN NO.  
12  
SYMBOL  
Write Gate  
nWGATE  
nWDATA  
nHDSEL  
nDIR  
OD48  
OD48  
OD48  
OD48  
OD48  
IS  
11  
Write Disk Data  
Head Select (1 = side 0)  
Step Direction (1 = out)  
Step Pulse  
13  
9
10  
nSTEP  
18  
Disk Change  
nDSKCHG  
nDS[1:0]  
nMTR[1:0]  
nWPROT  
nTR0  
5,6  
7,4  
16  
Drive Select Lines  
Motor On Lines  
Write Protected  
Track 0  
OD48  
OD48  
IS  
15  
IS  
14  
Index Pulse Input  
Drive Density Select [1:0]  
nINDEX  
IS  
3,2  
DRVDEN  
[1:0]  
OD48  
19,20  
Media ID inputs. In floppy enhanced mode 2 these MID[1:0]  
inputs are the media ID [1:0] inputs. (Note 4)  
IS  
SERIAL PORT 1 INTERFACE  
145  
146  
148  
149  
150  
147  
152  
151  
Receive Serial Data 1  
Transmit Serial Data 1  
Request to Send 1  
Clear to Send 1  
RXD1  
TXD1  
I
O4  
nRTS1  
nCTS1  
nDTR1  
nDSR1  
nDCD1  
nRI1  
O4  
I
Data Terminal Ready 1  
Data Set Ready 1  
O4  
I
I
I
Data Carrier Detect 1  
Ring Indicator 1  
SERIAL PORT 2 INTERFACE  
155  
156  
158  
159  
160  
157  
Receive Serial Data 2 (Note 4)  
Transmit Serial Data 2 (Note 4)  
Request to Send 2 (Note 4)  
Clear to Send 2 (Note 4)  
RXD2  
I
TXD2  
O4  
O4  
I
nRTS2  
nCTS2  
nDTR2  
nDSR2  
Data Terminal Ready 2 (Note 4)  
Data Set Ready 2 (Note 4)  
O4  
I
7
DESCRIPTION OF PIN FUNCTIONS  
NAME  
BUFFER  
TYPE  
PIN NO.  
154  
SYMBOL  
nDCD2  
Data Carrier Detect 2 (Note 4)  
I
I
153  
Ring Indicator 2 (Note 4)  
nRI2  
IDE1 INTERFACE  
23  
24  
25  
30  
31  
26  
IDE1 Enable (Note 4)  
nIDE1_OE  
nHDCS0  
nHDCS1  
nIOROP  
nIOWOP  
IDE1_IRQ  
O4  
O24  
O24  
O24  
O24  
I
IDE1 Chip Select 0 (Note 4)  
IDE1 Chip Select 1 (Note 4)  
IOR Output (Note 4)  
IOW Output (Note 4)  
IDE1 Interrupt Request (Note 4)  
IDE2 INTERFACE  
27  
28  
29  
IDE2 Chip Select 2/SA13 (Note 3, 4)  
IDE2 Chip Select 3/SA14 (Note 3, 4)  
IDE2 Interrupt Request/SA15 (Note 4)  
nHDCS2  
nHDCS3  
IDE2_IRQ  
I/O24  
I/O24  
I
PARALLEL PORT INTERFACE  
138:131 Parallel Port Data Bus  
PD[0:7]  
nSLCTIN  
nINIT  
I/O24  
140  
141  
143  
144  
128  
129  
127  
126  
142  
Printer Select  
OD24/O24  
Initiate Output  
Auto Line Feed  
Strobe Signal  
OD24/O24  
nALF  
OD24/O24  
nSTB  
OD24/O24  
Busy Signal  
BUSY  
nACK  
PE  
I
I
I
I
I
Acknowledge Handshake  
Paper End  
Printer Selected  
Error at Printer  
SLCT  
nERROR  
REAL-TIME CLOCK  
KEYBOARD/MOUSE  
122  
124  
121  
32 Khz Crystal Input  
32 Khz Crystal Output  
Battery Voltage  
XTAL1  
XTAL2  
Vbat  
ICLK2  
OCLK2  
91  
Keyboard Data  
KDAT  
I/OD16P  
8
DESCRIPTION OF PIN FUNCTIONS  
NAME  
BUFFER  
TYPE  
PIN NO.  
92  
SYMBOL  
KCLK  
Keyboard Clock  
Mouse Data  
I/OD16P  
I/OD16P  
I/OD16P  
93  
MDAT  
MCLK  
94  
Mouse Clock  
SOFT POWER MANAGEMENT INTERFACE  
33  
34  
Power On (Note 4)  
nPowerOn  
Button_In  
I/O24  
I/O24  
Button Input (Note 4)  
GPI/O; IRQ In (Note 4)  
GENERAL PURPOSE I/O  
96  
97  
GP10  
GP11  
GP12  
GP13  
GP14  
GP15  
GP16  
GP17  
GP20  
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O24  
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O8  
I/O8  
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O4  
GPI/O; IRQ In/IRQ 13 (Note 4)  
98  
GPI/O; WD Timer Output/IRRX (Note 4)  
GPI/O; Power Led Output/IRTX (Note 4)  
GPI/O; GP Address Decode (Note 4)  
GPI/O; GP Write Strobe (Note 4)  
99  
100  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
GPI/O; Joy Read Strobe/JOYCS (Note 4)  
GPI/O; Joy Write Strobe (Note 4)  
GPI/O; IDE2 Output Enable/8042 P20 (Note 4)  
GPI/O; Serial EEPROM Data In/AB_DATA (Note 4) GP21  
GPI/O; Serial EEPROM Data Out/AB_CLK (Note 4) GP22  
GPI/O; Serial EEPROM Clock (Note 4)  
GPI/O; Serial EEPROM Enable (Note 4)  
GPI/O; 8042 P21 (Note 4)  
GP23  
GP24  
GP25  
BIOS BUFFERS  
111:118 ROM Bus (I/O to the SD Bus) (Note 4)  
RD[0:7]  
I/O4  
119  
120  
ROM Chip Select (only used for ROM) (Note 4)  
nROMCS  
I
I
ROM Output Enable (DIR) (only used for ROM) (Note 4) nROMDIR  
Note 0:  
The interrupt request is output on one of the IRQx signals as 024 buffer type. If EPP or  
ECP Mode is enabled, this output is pulsed low, then released to allow sharing of interrupts.  
In this case, the buffer type is OD24. Refer to the configuration section for more  
information.  
Note 1:  
nCS -This pin is the active low chip select; it must be low for all chip accesses. For 12 bit  
addressing, SA0:SA11, this input should be tied to GND. For 16 bit address qualification,  
9
address bits SA12:SA15 can be "ORed" together and applied to this pin. If IDE2 is not  
used, SA12 can be connected to nCS, pin 27 to SA13, pin 28 to SA14 and pin 29 to SA15.  
nYY - The "n" as the first letter of a signal name indicates an "Active Low" signal  
nHDCS2 and nHDCS3 require a pull-up to ensure a logic high at power-up when used for  
IDE2 until the Active Bit is set to 1.  
Note 2:  
Note 3:  
Note 4:  
See Table on the following page for Multifunction Pins with GPI/O and Other Alternate  
Functions.  
10  
Description of Multifunction Pins with GPI/O and Other Alternate Functions  
Pin  
No.  
19  
Original  
Function  
MEDIA_ID1  
Alternate  
Alternate  
Alternate  
Buffer  
Type  
I/O8  
Index  
Register GPI/O  
Function 1 Function 2 Function 3  
Default  
float  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
-
-
GP4  
GP4  
GP4  
GP4  
GP4  
GP4  
GP4  
GP40  
GP41  
GP42  
GP43  
GP44  
GP45  
GP46  
20  
23  
24  
25  
26  
30  
MEDIA_ID0  
nIDE1_OE  
nHDCS0  
-
-
I/O8  
I/O4  
float  
high  
high  
high  
float  
float  
-
-
-
-
-
-
I/O24  
I/O24  
I/O8  
nHDCS1  
-
-
IDE1_IRQ  
nIOROP  
Power LED  
Output  
WDT  
I/O24  
31  
33  
nIOWOP  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
nSMI  
-
-
I/O24  
I/O24  
float  
GP4  
GP5  
GP47  
GP51  
nPowerOn  
-
active low  
open  
collector  
output  
input  
34  
Button_In  
RD0  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
-
-
-
I/O24  
I/O4  
GP5  
GP6  
GP50  
GP60  
1,4  
111  
Power LED  
Output  
RD0  
1,4  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
153  
RD1  
RD2  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
WDT  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O8  
I/O8  
I/O8  
RD0  
GP6  
GP6  
GP6  
GP6  
GP6  
GP6  
GP6  
GP5  
GP5  
GP7  
GP61  
GP62  
GP63  
GP64  
GP65  
GP66  
GP67  
GP53  
GP54  
GP70  
1,4  
8042 - P12  
8042 - P13  
8042 - P14  
8042 - P15  
8042 - P16  
8042 - P17  
-
RD0  
1,4  
RD3  
RD0  
1,4  
RD4  
RD0  
1,4  
RD5  
RD0  
1,4  
RD6  
RD0  
1,4  
RD7  
RD0  
nROMCS  
nROMOE  
nRI2  
nROMCS 1  
nROMCS 1  
input 2  
-
-
input 2  
input 2  
154  
155  
nDCD2  
RXD2  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
-
-
-
-
I/O8  
I/O8  
GP7  
GP7  
GP71  
GP72  
2,4  
156  
157  
TXD2  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
-
-
-
-
I/O8  
I/O8  
input  
GP7  
GP7  
GP73  
GP74  
input, 2  
nDSR2  
2,4  
158  
159  
160  
nRTS2  
nCTS2  
nDTR2  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
-
-
-
-
-
-
I/O8  
I/O8  
I/O8  
input  
GP7  
GP7  
GP7  
GP75  
GP76  
GP77  
(2)  
input  
2,4  
input  
11  
Pin  
No.  
27  
Original  
Function  
nHDCS2  
Alternate  
Alternate  
Alternate  
Buffer  
Type  
I/O24  
Index  
Register GPI/O  
Function 1 Function 2 Function 3  
Default  
float  
SA13  
SA14  
SA15  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
28  
29  
53  
96  
97  
98  
nHDCS3  
IDE2_IRQ  
nCS/SA 12  
GPI/O  
-
I/O24  
I
float  
float  
-
-
-
-
-
-
I
input  
input  
input  
input  
-
-
IRQ in  
IRQ in  
-
IRQ13  
-
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O4  
GP1  
GP1  
GP1  
GP10  
GP11  
GP12  
GPI/O  
WDT  
Timer  
GPI/O  
Output/  
IRRX  
Power LED  
Output/  
IRTX  
99  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
-
-
-
-
I/O24  
I/O4  
input  
input  
GP1  
GP1  
GP13  
GP14  
GP  
100  
Address  
Decode  
GP Write  
Strobe  
Joy Read  
Strobe  
Joy Write  
Strobe  
IDE2  
102  
103  
104  
105  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
-
-
-
-
-
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O4  
I/O4  
input  
input  
input  
input  
GP1  
GP1  
GP1  
GP2  
GP15  
GP16  
GP17  
GP20  
JOYCS  
-
8042 P20  
Output  
Enable  
Serial  
EEPROM  
Data In  
106  
107  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
AB_DATA  
AB_CLK  
-
-
I/O8  
/OD8  
(EN1)  
I/O8  
/OD8  
(EN1)  
I/O4  
input  
input  
GP2  
GP2  
GP21  
GP22  
Serial  
EEPROM  
Data Out  
Serial  
EEPROM  
Clock  
Serial  
EEPROM  
Enable  
108  
109  
110  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
-
-
-
-
-
-
input  
input  
input  
GP2  
GP2  
GP2  
GP23  
GP24  
GP25  
I/O4  
I/O4  
8042 P21  
Note 1: At power-up, RD0-RD7, nROMCS and nROMOE function as the XD Bus. To use  
RD0-RD7 for functions other than the XD Bus, nROMCS must stay high until  
those pins are finished being reprogrammed.  
Note 2: These pins are input (high-z) until programmed for second serial port.  
Note 3: This is the trickle voltage input pin for the FDC37C93xAPM.  
Note 4: These pins cannot be programmed as open drain pins in their original function.  
Note:  
No pins in their original function can be programmed as inverted input or inverted output.  
12  
BUFFER TYPE DESCRIPTIONS  
BUFFER TYPE  
I
DESCRIPTION  
Input, TTL compatible.  
IS  
Input with Schmitt trigger.  
I/OD16P  
I/O24  
I/O4  
Input/Output, 16mA sink, 90uA pull-up.  
Input/Output, 24mA sink, 12mA source.  
Input/Output, 4mA sink, 2mA source.  
Output, 4mA sink, 2mA source.  
Output, 8mA sink, 4mA source with Slew Rate Limiting.  
Output, 16mA sink, 8mA source with Slew Rate Limiting.  
Output, 20mA sink, 10mA source.  
Output, 24mA sink, 12mA source.  
Output, Open Drain, 24mA sink.  
Output, Open Drain, 48mA sink.  
Clock Input  
O4  
O8SR  
O16SR  
O20  
O24  
OD24  
OD48  
ICLK  
ICLK2  
OCLK2  
Clock Input  
Clock Output  
13  
nGPA  
nGPCS*  
nSMI* IRQ13*  
nROMDIR  
nROMCS  
RD[0:7]  
nGPWR*  
BIOS  
BUFFER  
nPowerOn  
Button_In  
SOFT  
POWER  
POWER  
MANAGEMENT  
SMI  
ACPI/SCI  
DECODER  
MANAGEMENT  
PD0-7  
VTR  
MULTI-MODE  
PARALLEL  
PORT/FDC  
MUX  
BUSY, SLCT, PE,  
nERROR, nACK  
DATA BUS  
AB_DATA*  
AB_CLK*  
nSTB, nSLCTIN,  
nINIT, nALF  
ACCESS.bus  
GP1[0:7]*  
GP2[0:5]*  
GENERAL  
PURPOSE  
I/O  
ADDRESS BUS  
DATAIN*  
SERIAL  
EEPROM  
DATAOUT*  
GP[4[0:7]*, GP5[0:1,3:4]*,  
GP6[0:7]*, GP7[0:7]*  
CLK*, ENABLE*  
TXD1, nCTS1, nRTS1  
CONFIGURATION  
REGISTERS  
16C550  
COMPATIBLE  
SERIAL  
RXD1  
nIOR  
nIOW  
PORT 1  
nDSR1, nDCD1, nRI1, nDTR1  
CONTROL BUS  
AEN  
SA[0:12] (nCS)  
SA[13-15]  
IRRX*, IRTX*  
WDATA  
16C550  
COMPATIBLE  
SERIAL  
PORT 2 WITH  
INFRARED  
TXD2(IRTX), nCTS2, nRTS2  
RXD2(IRRX)  
WCLOCK  
HOST  
CPU  
SMSC  
PROPRIETARY  
82077  
nDSR2, nDCD2, nRI2, nDTR2  
SD[O:7]  
DIGITAL  
DATA  
SEPARATOR  
WITH WRITE  
PRECOM-  
INTERFACE  
nHDCS2,3  
IDE2_IRQ  
COMPATIBLE  
DRQ[0:3]  
IDE2  
OPTIONAL  
VERTICAL  
FLOPPYDISK  
CONTROLLER  
CORE  
nDACK[0:3]  
PENSATION  
IDE1_IRQ  
nIDE1_OE  
nIOWOP  
nIOROP  
IDE  
RCLOCK  
RDATA  
TC  
IRQ[1,3-12,14,15]  
RESET_DRV  
INTERFACE  
nHDCS0, nHDCS1  
CLOCK  
GEN  
KCLK  
KDATA  
8042  
RTC  
IOCHRDY  
MCLK  
MDATA  
DENSEL  
nINDEX  
nTRK0  
nDS0,1  
nDIR  
nMTR0,1  
P20*, P21*  
P12*, P13*, P14*,P15*, P16*, P17*  
nWDATA nRDATA  
nDSKCHG  
nWRPRT  
nWGATE  
nSTEP DRVDEN0  
XTAL1,2  
VBAT  
DRVDEN1  
nHDSEL  
ICLOCK  
(14.318)  
MID0, MID1  
HCLK  
CLKO[1:3]  
(14.318)  
Vcc  
Vss  
16CLK  
*Multi-Function I/O Pin - Optional  
FDC37C93xAPM BLOCK DIAGRAM  
14  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
HOST PROCESSOR INTERFACE  
SUPER I/O REGISTERS  
The host processor communicates with the  
FDC37C93xAPM through a series of read/write  
registers. The port addresses for these registers  
are shown in Table 1. Register access is  
accomplished through programmed I/O or DMA  
transfers. All registers are 8 bits wide except  
the IDE data register at port 1F0H which is 16  
bits wide. All host interface output buffers are  
capable of sinking a minimum of 12 mA.  
The address map, shown below in Table 1,  
shows the addresses of the different blocks of  
the Super I/O immediately after power up. The  
base addresses of the FDC, IDE, serial and  
parallel ports, Bank 2 of the RTC registers,  
auxiliary I/O and ACCESS.bus can be moved  
via the configuration registers. Some addresses  
are used to access more than one register.  
Table 1 - Super I/O Block Addresses  
LOGICAL  
DEVICE  
ADDRESS  
Base+(0-5) and +(7)  
Base+(0-7)  
BLOCK NAME  
NOTES  
Floppy Disk  
0
4
5
3
Serial Port Com 1  
Serial Port Com 2  
Base+(0-7)  
IR Support  
Parallel Port  
SPP  
Base+(0-3)  
Base+(0-7)  
EPP  
Base+(0-3), +(400-402)  
Base+(0-7), +(400-402)  
ECP  
ECP+EPP+SPP  
Base1+(0-7), Base2+(0)  
Base1+(0-7), Base2+(0)  
IDE 1  
IDE 2  
RTC  
1
2
6
70, 71  
Base2+(0,1)  
60, 64  
KYBD  
7
8
Base1+(0)  
Base2+(0)  
Aux. I/O  
GPR  
GPW  
Base+(0-3)  
ACCESS.bus  
ACPI  
9
Base1+(0-11)  
Base2+(0-7)  
A
Note: Refer to the configuration register descriptions for setting the base address  
15  
FLOPPY DISK CONTROLLER  
FDC INTERNAL REGISTERS  
The Floppy Disk Controller (FDC) provides the  
interface between a host microprocessor and  
the floppy disk drives. The FDC integrates the  
functions of the Formatter/Controller, Digital  
Data Separator, Write Precompensation and  
Data Rate Selection logic for an IBM XT/AT  
compatible FDC. The true CMOS 765B core  
guarantees 100% IBM PC XT/AT compatibility  
in addition to providing data overflow and  
underflow protection.  
The Floppy Disk Controller contains eight  
internal registers which facilitate the interfacing  
between the host microprocessor and the disk  
drive. Table 2 shows the addresses required to  
access these registers. Registers other than the  
ones shown are not supported. The rest of the  
description assumes that the primary addresses  
have been selected.  
The FDC is compatible to the 82077AA using  
SMSC's proprietary floppy disk controller core.  
Table 2 - Status, Data and Control Registers  
(Shown with base addresses of 3F0 and 370)  
SECONDARY  
PRIMARY  
ADDRESS  
ADDRESS  
R/W  
REGISTER  
3F0  
3F1  
3F2  
3F3  
3F4  
3F4  
3F5  
3F6  
3F7  
3F7  
370  
371  
372  
373  
374  
374  
375  
376  
377  
377  
R
R
R/W  
R/W  
R
Status Register A (SRA)  
Status Register B (SRB)  
Digital Output Register (DOR)  
Tape Drive Register (TSR)  
Main Status Register (MSR)  
Data Rate Select Register (DSR)  
Data (FIFO)  
Reserved  
Digital Input Register (DIR)  
Configuration Control Register (CCR)  
W
R/W  
R
W
16  
interface pins in PS/2 and Model 30 modes. The  
SRA can be accessed at any time when in PS/2  
mode. In the PC/AT mode the data bus pins  
D0-D7 are held in a high impedance state for a  
read of address 3F0.  
STATUS REGISTER A (SRA)  
Address 3F0 READ ONLY  
This register is read-only and monitors the state  
of the FINTR  
pin  
and  
several  
disk  
PS/2 Mode  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
INT  
nDRV2 STEP nTRK0 HDSEL nINDX nWP  
DIR  
PENDING  
RESET  
COND.  
0
N/A N/A N/A N/A  
0
0
0
BIT 0 DIRECTION  
BIT 4 nTRACK 0  
Active high status indicating the direction of  
head movement. A logic "1" indicates inward  
direction; a logic "0" indicates outward direction.  
Active low status of the TRK0 disk interface  
input.  
BIT 5 STEP  
BIT 1 nWRITE PROTECT  
Active high status of the STEP output disk  
interface output pin.  
Active low status of the WRITE PROTECT disk  
interface input. A logic "0" indicates that the disk  
is write protected.  
BIT 6 nDRV2  
Active low status of the DRV2 disk interface  
input pin, indicating that a second drive has  
been installed.  
BIT 2 nINDEX  
Active low status of the INDEX disk interface  
input.  
BIT 7 INTERRUPT PENDING  
Active high bit indicating the state of the Floppy  
Disk Interrupt output.  
BIT 3 HEAD SELECT  
Active high status of the HDSEL disk interface  
input. A logic "1" selects side 1 and a logic "0"  
selects side 0.  
17  
PS/2 Model 30 Mode  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
INT  
PENDING  
DRQ STEP TRK0 nHDSEL INDX  
F/F  
WP  
nDIR  
RESET  
COND.  
0
0
0
N/A  
1
N/A  
N/A  
1
BIT 0 nDIRECTION  
BIT 4 TRACK 0  
Active low status indicating the direction of head  
movement. logic "0" indicates inward  
Active high status of the TRK0 disk interface  
input.  
A
direction; a logic "1" indicates outward direction.  
BIT 5 STEP  
BIT 1 WRITE PROTECT  
Active high status of the latched STEP disk  
interface output pin. This bit is latched with the  
STEP output going active, and is cleared with a  
read from the DIR register, or with a hardware  
or software reset.  
Active high status of the WRITE PROTECT disk  
interface input. A logic "1" indicates that the disk  
is write protected.  
BIT 2 INDEX  
Active high status of the INDEX disk interface  
input.  
BIT 6 DMA REQUEST  
Active high status of the DRQ output pin.  
BIT 3 nHEAD SELECT  
BIT 7 INTERRUPT PENDING  
Active high bit indicating the state of the Floppy  
Disk Interrupt output.  
Active low status of the HDSEL disk interface  
input. A logic "0" selects side 1 and a logic "1"  
selects side 0.  
18  
Model 30 modes. The SRB can be accessed at  
any time when in PS/2 mode. In the PC/AT  
mode the data bus pins D0 - D7 are held in a  
high impedance state for a read of address 3F1.  
STATUS REGISTER B (SRB)  
Address 3F1 READ ONLY  
This register is read-only and monitors the state  
of several disk interface pins in PS/2 and  
PS/2 Mode  
7
1
6
1
5
4
3
2
1
0
DRIVE WDATA RDATA WGATE MOT  
SEL0 TOGGLE TOGGLE  
MOT  
EN0  
EN1  
RESET  
COND.  
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
BIT 0 MOTOR ENABLE 0  
BIT 4 WRITE DATA TOGGLE  
Active high status of the MTR0 disk interface  
output pin. This bit is low after a hardware reset  
and unaffected by a software reset.  
Every inactive edge of the WDATA input causes  
this bit to change state.  
BIT 5 DRIVE SELECT 0  
BIT 1 MOTOR ENABLE 1  
Reflects the status of the Drive Select 0 bit of  
the DOR (address 3F2 bit 0). This bit is cleared  
after a hardware reset and it is unaffected by a  
software reset.  
Active high status of the MTR1 disk interface  
output pin. This bit is low after a hardware reset  
and unaffected by a software reset.  
BIT 2 WRITE GATE  
BIT 6 RESERVED  
Active high status of the WGATE disk interface  
output.  
Always read as a logic "1".  
BIT 7 RESERVED  
BIT 3 READ DATA TOGGLE  
Always read as a logic "1".  
Every inactive edge of the RDATA input causes  
this bit to change state.  
19  
PS/2 Model 30 Mode  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
nDRV2 nDS1 nDS0 WDATA RDATA WGATE nDS3 nDS2  
F/F  
F/F  
F/F  
RESET  
COND.  
N/A  
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
BIT 0 nDRIVE SELECT 2  
BIT 4 WRITE DATA  
Active low status of the DS2 disk interface  
output.  
Active high status of the latched WDATA output  
signal. This bit is latched by the inactive going  
edge of WDATA and is cleared by the read of  
the DIR register. This bit is not gated with  
WGATE.  
BIT 1 nDRIVE SELECT 3  
Active low status of the DS3 disk interface  
output.  
BIT 5 nDRIVE SELECT 0  
Active low status of the DS0 disk interface  
output.  
BIT 2 WRITE GATE  
Active high status of the latched WGATE output  
signal. This bit is latched by the active going  
edge of WGATE and is cleared by the read of  
the DIR register.  
BIT 6 nDRIVE SELECT 1  
Active low status of the DS1 disk interface  
output.  
BIT 3 READ DATA  
Active high status of the latched RDATA output  
signal. This bit is latched by the inactive going  
edge of RDATA and is cleared by the read of the  
DIR register.  
BIT 7 nDRV2  
Active low status of the DRV2 disk interface  
input.  
20  
DIGITAL OUTPUT REGISTER (DOR)  
also contains the enable for the DMA logic and a  
software reset bit. The contents of the DOR are  
unaffected by a software reset. The DOR can  
be written to at any time.  
Address 3F2 READ/WRITE  
The DOR controls the drive select and motor  
enables of the disk interface outputs. It  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MOT  
EN3  
MOT  
EN2  
MOT  
EN1  
MOT DMAEN nRESE DRIVE DRIVE  
EN0  
T
SEL1  
SEL0  
RESET  
COND.  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BIT 0 and 1 DRIVE SELECT  
BIT 4 MOTOR ENABLE 0  
These two bits are binary encoded for the four drive  
selects DS0 -DS3, thereby allowing only one drive to  
be selected at one time.  
This bit controls the MTR0 disk interface output. A  
logic "1" in this bit will cause the output pin to go  
active.  
BIT 2 nRESET  
BIT 5 MOTOR ENABLE 1  
A logic "0" written to this bit resets the floppy disk  
controller. This reset will remain active until a logic  
"1" is written to this bit. This software reset does not  
affect the DSR and CCR registers, nor does it affect  
the other bits of the DOR register. The minimum  
reset duration required is 100ns, therefore toggling  
this bit by consecutive writes to this register is a valid  
method of issuing a software reset.  
This bit controls the MTR1 disk interface output. A  
logic "1" in this bit will cause the output pin to go  
active.  
BIT 6 MOTOR ENABLE 2  
This bit controls the MTR2 disk interface output. A  
logic "1" in this bit will cause the output pin to go  
active.  
BIT 3 DMAEN  
BIT 7 MOTOR ENABLE 3  
PC/AT and Model 30 Mode:  
This bit controls the MTR3 disk interface output. A  
logic "1" in this bit causes the output to go active.  
Writing this bit to logic "1" will enable the DRQ,  
nDACK, TC and FINTR outputs. When this bit is a a  
logic "0" it disables the nDACK and TC inputs and  
Table 3 - Drive Activation Values  
holds the DRQ and FINTR outputs in  
a high  
impedance state. This bit is a logic "0" after a reset  
and in these modes.  
DRIVE  
DOR VALUE  
0
1
2
3
1CH  
2DH  
4EH  
8FH  
PS/2 Mode: In this mode the DRQ, nDACK, TC and  
FINTR pins are always enabled. During a reset, the  
DRQ, nDACK, TC, and FINTR pins will remain  
enabled, but this bit will be cleared to a logic "0".  
21  
TAPE DRIVE REGISTER (TDR)  
Address 3F3 READ/WRITE  
Table 4 - Tape Select Bits  
This register is included for 82077 software  
compatability. The robust digital data separator  
used in the FDC does not require its  
characteristics modified for tape support. The  
contents of this register are not used internal to  
DRIVE  
SELECTED  
TAPE SEL1  
TAPE SEL2  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
None  
1
2
3
the device.  
The TDR is unaffected by a  
Bits 2-7 are tri-stated when  
software reset.  
read in this mode.  
Table 5 - Internal 2 Drive Decode - Normal  
DRIVE SELECT  
MOTOR ON OUTPUTS  
(ACTIVE LOW)  
DIGITAL OUTPUT REGISTER  
OUTPUTS (ACTIVE LOW)  
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit1 Bit 0  
nDS1  
nDS0  
nMTR1  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
nMTR0  
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
X
X
X
1
X
X
1
X
1
1
X
X
X
0
0
0
1
1
X
0
1
0
1
X
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
X
X
0
X
0
0
Table 6 - Internal 2 Drive Decode - Drives 0 and 1 Swapped  
DRIVE SELECT OUTPUTS MOTOR ON OUTPUTS  
(ACTIVE LOW) (ACTIVE LOW)  
nDS1 nDS0  
DIGITAL OUTPUT REGISTER  
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit1 Bit 0  
nMTR1  
nMTR0  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
nBIT 5  
X
X
X
1
X
X
1
X
1
1
X
X
X
0
0
0
1
1
X
0
1
0
1
X
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
nBIT 4  
X
X
0
X
0
0
22  
Normal Floppy Mode  
Normal mode. Register 3F3 contains only bits 0 and 1. When this register is read, bits 2 - 7 are a  
high impedance.  
DB7  
DB6  
DB5  
DB4  
DB3  
DB2  
DB1  
DB0  
REG 3F3 Tri-state Tri-state Tri-state Tri-state Tri-state Tri-state tape sel1 tape sel0  
Enhanced Floppy Mode 2 (OS2)  
Register 3F3 for Enhanced Floppy Mode 2 operation.  
DB7  
DB6  
DB5  
DB4  
DB3  
DB2  
DB1  
DB0  
REG 3F3  
Media  
ID1  
Media  
ID0  
Drive Type ID  
Floppy Boot Drive  
tape sel1 tape sel0  
For this mode, MEDIA_ID[1:0] pins are gated  
into bits 6 and 7 of the 3F3 register. These two  
bits are not affected by a hard or soft reset.  
Note: L0-CRF1-B5  
=
Logical Device 0,  
Configuration Register F1, Bit 5  
BIT 7 MEDIA ID 1 READ ONLY (Pin 19) (See  
Table 7)  
BIT 3 and 2 FLOPPY BOOT DRIVE - These  
bits reflect the value of L0-CRF1. Bit 3 = L0-  
CRF1-B7. Bit 2 = L0-CRF1-B6.  
BIT 6 MEDIA ID 0 READ ONLY (Pin 20) (See  
Table 8)  
BIT  
1 AND 0 - TAPE DRIVE SELECT  
(READ/WRITE). Same as in Normal and  
Enhanced Floppy Mode. 1.  
BIT 5 and 4 DRIVE TYPE ID - These bits  
reflect two of the bits of L0-CRF1. Which  
two bits these are depends on the last drive  
selected in the Digital Output Register (3F2).  
(See Table 9)  
Table 7 - Media ID1  
MEDIA ID1  
Table 8 - Media ID0  
MEDIA ID0  
INPUT  
BIT 7  
INPUT  
Pin 20  
BIT 6  
Pin 19  
L0-CRF1-B5 L0-CRF1-B5  
CRF1-B4  
= 0  
CRF1-B4  
= 1  
= 0  
= 1  
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
23  
Table 9 - Drive Type ID  
DIGITAL OUTPUT REGISTER REGISTER 3F3 - DRIVE TYPE ID  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
L0-CRF2 - B1  
L0-CRF2 - B3  
L0-CRF2 - B5  
L0-CRF2 - B7  
L0-CRF2 - B0  
L0-CRF2 - B2  
L0-CRF2 - B4  
L0-CRF2 - B6  
Note: L0-CRF2-Bx = Logical Device 0, Configuration Register F2, Bit x.  
24  
30 and Microchannel applications.  
Other  
DATA RATE SELECT REGISTER (DSR)  
applications can set the data rate in the DSR.  
The data rate of the floppy controller is the most  
recent write of either the DSR or CCR. The DSR  
is unaffected by a software reset. A hardware  
reset will set the DSR to 02H, which  
corresponds to the default precompensation  
setting and 250 Kbps.  
Address 3F4 WRITE ONLY  
This register is write only. It is used to program  
the data rate, amount of write precompensation,  
power down status, and software reset. The  
data  
rate  
is  
programmed  
using  
the  
Configuration Control Register (CCR) not the  
DSR,  
for  
PC/AT and PS/2 Model  
7
6
5
0
4
3
2
1
0
S/W POWER  
RESET DOWN  
PRE-  
PRE-  
PRE- DRATE DRATE  
COMP2 COMP1 COMP0 SEL1  
SEL0  
RESET  
COND.  
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
separator circuits will be turned off.  
The  
BIT 0 and 1 DATA RATE SELECT  
These bits control the data rate of the floppy  
controller. See Table 11 for the settings  
corresponding to the individual data rates. The  
data rate select bits are unaffected by a  
software reset, and are set to 250 Kbps after a  
hardware reset.  
controller will come out of manual low power  
mode after a software reset or access to the  
Data Register or Main Status Register.  
BIT 7 SOFTWARE RESET  
This active high bit has the same function as the  
DOR RESET (DOR bit 2) except that this bit is  
self clearing.  
BIT 2 - 4 PRECOMPENSATION SELECT  
These three bits select the value of write  
precompensation that will be applied to the  
WDATA output signal. Table 10 shows the  
precompensation values for the combination of  
these bits settings. Track 0 is the default  
starting track number to start precompensation.  
this starting track number can be changed by  
the configure command.  
Table 10 - Precompensation Delays  
PRECOMP  
432  
PRECOMPENSATION  
DELAY (nsec)  
<2Mbps  
2Mbps*  
111  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
110  
000  
0.00  
41.67  
83.34  
125.00  
166.67  
208.33  
250.00  
Default  
0
20.8  
41.7  
62.5  
83.3  
104.2  
125  
BIT 5 UNDEFINED  
Should be written as a logic "0".  
BIT 6 LOW POWER  
A logic "1" written to this bit will put the floppy  
controller into manual low power mode. The  
Default  
Default: See Table 12  
floppy  
controller  
clock  
and data  
*2Mbps data rate is only available if VCC = 5V.  
25  
Table 11 - Data Rates  
DATA RATE DATA RATE  
DRIVE RATE  
DRATE(1)  
DENSEL  
DRT1  
DRT0  
SEL1 SEL0  
MFM  
FM  
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1Meg  
500  
---  
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
250  
150  
125  
300  
250  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1Meg  
500  
---  
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
250  
250  
125  
500  
250  
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1Meg  
500  
---  
250  
---  
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
2Meg  
250  
125  
Drive Rate Table (Recommended) 00 = 360K, 1.2M, 720K, 1.44M and 2.88M Vertical Format  
01 = 3-Mode Drive  
10 = 2 Meg Tape  
Note 1:  
The DRATE and DENSEL values are mapped onto the DRVDEN pins.  
Table 12 - DRVDEN Mapping  
DT1  
DT0  
DRVDEN1 (1)  
DRVDEN0 (1)  
DRIVE TYPE  
0
0
DRATE0  
DENSEL  
4/2/1 MB 3.5"  
2/1 MB 5.25" FDDS  
2/1.6/1 MB 3.5" (3-MODE)  
1
0
1
0
1
1
DRATE0  
DRATE0  
DRATE1  
DRATE1  
nDENSEL  
DRATE0  
PS/2  
26  
Table 13 - Default Precompensation Delays  
PRECOMPENSATION  
DATA RATE  
DELAYS  
2 Mbps*  
1 Mbps  
500 Kbps  
300 Kbps  
250 Kbps  
20.8 ns  
41.67 ns  
125 ns  
125 ns  
125 ns  
*The 2Mbps data rate is only available if VCC = 5V.  
27  
read at any time. The MSR indicates when the  
disk controller is ready to receive data via the  
Data Register. It should be read before each  
byte transferring to or from the data register  
except in DMA mode. No delay is required  
when reading the MSR after a data transfer.  
MAIN STATUS REGISTER  
Address 3F4 READ ONLY  
The Main Status Register is a read-only register  
and indicates the status of the disk controller.  
The  
Main  
Status  
Register  
can be  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RQM  
DIO  
NON  
DMA  
CMD  
BUSY  
DRV3  
BUSY  
DRV2  
BUSY  
DRV1  
BUSY  
DRV0  
BUSY  
BIT 0-3 DRVx BUSY  
BIT 5 NON-DMA  
These bits are set to “1”s when a drive is in the  
seek portion of a command, including implied  
and overlapped seeks and recalibrates.  
This mode is selected in the SPECIFY  
command and will be set to a “1” during the  
execution phase of a command. This is for  
polled data transfers and helps differentiate  
between the data transfer phase and the reading  
of result bytes.  
BIT 4 COMMAND BUSY  
This bit is set to a “1” when a command is in  
progress. This bit will go active after the  
command byte has been accepted and goes  
inactive at the end of the results phase. If there  
is no result phase (Seek, Recalibrate  
commands), this bit is returned to a “0” after the  
last command byte.  
BIT 6 DIO  
Indicates the direction of a data transfer once a  
RQM is set. A “1” indicates a read and a “0”  
indicates a write is required.  
BIT 7 RQM  
Indicates that the host can transfer data if set to  
a “1”. No access is permitted if set to a “0”.  
28  
DATA REGISTER (FIFO)  
FIFO. The data is based upon the following  
formula:  
Address 3F5 READ/WRITE  
All command parameter information, disk data  
and result status are transferred between the  
host processor and the floppy disk controller  
through the Data Register.  
Threshold # x  
1
x 8 - 1.5 ms = DELAY  
DATA RATE  
At the start of a command, the FIFO action is  
always disabled and command parameters  
must be sent based upon the RQM and DIO bit  
settings. As the command execution phase is  
entered, the FIFO is cleared of any data to  
ensure that invalid data is not transferred.  
Data transfers are governed by the RQM and  
DIO bits in the Main Status Register.  
The Data Register defaults to FIFO disabled  
mode after any form of reset. This maintains  
PC/AT hardware compatibility.  
The default  
An overrun or underrun will terminate the  
current command and the transfer of data. Disk  
writes will complete the current sector by  
generating a 00 pattern and valid CRC. Reads  
require the host to remove the remaining data  
so that the result phase may be entered.  
values can be changed through the Configure  
command (enable full FIFO operation with  
threshold control). The advantage of the FIFO  
is that it allows the system a larger DMA  
latency without causing a disk error. Table 14  
gives several examples of the delays with a  
Table 14 - FIFO Service Delay  
FIFO THRESHOLD  
EXAMPLES  
MAXIMUM DELAY TO SERVICING  
AT 2 Mbps* DATA RATE  
1 byte  
2 bytes  
8 bytes  
15 bytes  
1 x 4 ms - 1.5 ms = 2.5 ms  
2 x 4 ms - 1.5 ms = 6.5 ms  
8 x 4 ms - 1.5 ms = 30.5 ms  
15 x 4 ms - 1.5 ms = 58.5 ms  
FIFO THRESHOLD  
EXAMPLES  
MAXIMUM DELAY TO SERVICING  
AT 1 Mbps DATA RATE  
1 byte  
2 bytes  
8 bytes  
15 bytes  
1 x 8 ms - 1.5 ms = 6.5 ms  
2 x 8 ms - 1.5 ms = 14.5 ms  
8 x 8 ms - 1.5 ms = 62.5 ms  
15 x 8 ms - 1.5 ms = 118.5 ms  
FIFO THRESHOLD  
EXAMPLES  
MAXIMUM DELAY TO SERVICING  
AT 500 Kbps DATA RATE  
1 byte  
2 bytes  
8 bytes  
15 bytes  
1 x 16 ms - 1.5 ms = 14.5 ms  
2 x 16 ms - 1.5 ms = 30.5 ms  
8 x 16 ms - 1.5 ms = 126.5 ms  
15 x 16 ms - 1.5 ms = 238.5 ms  
*The 2 Mbps data rate is only available if VCC = 5V.  
29  
DIGITAL INPUT REGISTER (DIR)  
Address 3F7 READ ONLY  
This register is read-only in all modes.  
PC/AT Mode  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DSK  
CHG  
RESET  
COND.  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
BIT 0 - 6 UNDEFINED  
BIT 7 DSKCHG  
The data bus outputs D0-6 will remain in a high  
impedance state during a read of this register.  
This bit monitors the pin of the same name and  
reflects the opposite value seen on the disk  
cable.  
PS/2 Mode  
7
6
1
5
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
0
DSK  
CHG  
DRATE DRATE nHIGH  
SEL1  
SEL0 nDENS  
RESET  
COND.  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
1
software reset and are set to 250 Kbps after a  
hardware reset.  
BIT 0 nHIGH DENS  
This bit is low whenever the 500 Kbps or 1 Mbps  
data rates are selected, and high when 250  
Kbps and 300 Kbps are selected.  
BIT 3 - 6 UNDEFINED  
Always read as a logic "1"  
BIT 1 and 2 DATA RATE SELECT  
These bits control the data rate of the floppy  
BIT 7 DSKCHG  
controller.  
corresponding to the individual data rates. The  
data rate select bits are unaffected by  
See Table 11 for the settings  
This bit monitors the pin of the same name and  
reflects the opposite value seen on the disk  
cable.  
a
30  
Model 30 Mode  
7
DSK  
CHG  
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
2
1
0
DMAEN NOPREC DRATE DRATE  
SEL1  
SEL0  
RESET  
COND.  
N/A  
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
BIT 0 and 1 DATA RATE SELECT  
These bits control the data rate of the floppy  
controller. See Table 11 for the settings  
BIT 3 DMAEN  
This bit reflects the value of DMAEN bit set in  
the DOR register bit 3.  
corresponding to the individual data rates. The  
data rate select bits are unaffected by a  
software reset, and are set to 250 Kbps after a  
hardware reset.  
BIT 4 - 6 UNDEFINED  
Always read as a logic "0"  
BIT 7 DSKCHG  
This bit monitors the pin of the same name and  
reflects the opposite value seen on the pin.  
BIT 2 NOPREC  
This bit reflects the value of NOPREC bit set in  
the CCR register.  
31  
CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTER (CCR)  
Address 3F7 WRITE ONLY  
PC/AT and PS/2 Modes  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DRATE DRATE  
SEL1  
SEL0  
RESET  
COND.  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
1
0
BIT 0 and 1 DATA RATE SELECT 0 and 1  
These bits determine the data rate of the floppy  
controller. See Table 11 for the appropriate  
values.  
BIT 2 - 7 RESERVED  
Should be set to a logical "0"  
PS/2 Model 30 Mode  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NOPREC DRATE DRATE  
SEL1  
SEL0  
RESET  
COND.  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
1
0
BIT 0 and 1 DATA RATE SELECT 0 and 1  
These bits determine the data rate of the floppy  
controller. See Table 11 for the appropriate  
values.  
BIT 3 - 7 RESERVED  
Should be set to a logical "0"  
Table 12 shows the state of the DENSEL pin.  
The DENSEL pin is set high after a hardware  
reset and is unaffected by the DOR and the  
DSR resets.  
BIT 2 NO PRECOMPENSATION  
This bit can be set by software, but it has no  
functionality. It can be read by bit 2 of the DSR  
when in Model 30 register mode. Unaffected by  
software reset.  
32  
STATUS REGISTER ENCODING  
During the Result Phase of certain commands, the Data Register contains data bytes that give the  
status of the command just executed.  
Table 15 - Status Register 0  
BIT NO.  
SYMBOL  
IC  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
7,6  
Interrupt  
Code  
00 - Normal termination of command. The specified  
command was properly executed and completed  
without error.  
01 - Abnormal termination of command. Command  
execution was started, but was not successfully  
completed.  
10 - Invalid command. The requested command  
could not be executed.  
11 - Abnormal termination caused by Polling.  
5
4
SE  
EC  
Seek End  
The FDC completed a Seek, Relative Seek or  
Recalibrate command (used during a Sense Interrupt  
Command).  
Equipment  
Check  
The TRK0 pin failed to become a "1" after:  
1. 80 step pulses in the Recalibrate command.  
2. The Relative Seek command caused the FDC to  
step outward beyond Track 0.  
3
2
Unused. This bit is always "0".  
The current head address.  
H
Head  
Address  
1,0  
DS1,0  
Drive Select  
The current selected drive.  
33  
Table 16 - Status Register 1  
NAME  
End of  
BIT NO.  
SYMBOL  
EN  
DESCRIPTION  
7
The FDC tried to access a sector beyond the final  
sector of the track (255D). Will be set if TC is not  
issued after Read or Write Data command.  
Cylinder  
6
5
Unused. This bit is always "0".  
DE  
OR  
Data Error  
The FDC detected a CRC error in either the ID field or  
the data field of a sector.  
4
Overrun/  
Underrun  
Becomes set if the FDC does not receive CPU or DMA  
service within the required time interval, resulting in  
data overrun or underrun.  
3
2
Unused. This bit is always "0".  
ND  
No Data  
Any one of the following:  
1. Read Data, Read Deleted Data command - the  
FDC did not find the specified sector.  
2. Read ID command - the FDC cannot read the ID  
field without an error.  
3. Read A Track command - the FDC cannot find  
the proper sector sequence.  
1
0
NW  
MA  
Not Writable WP pin became a "1" while the FDC is executing a  
Write Data, Write Deleted Data, or Format A Track  
command.  
Missing  
Any one of the following:  
Address Mark 1. The FDC did not detect an ID address mark at the  
specified track after encountering the index pulse  
from the IDX pin twice.  
2. The FDC cannot detect a data address mark or a  
deleted data address mark on the specified track.  
34  
Table 17 - Status Register 2  
NAME  
BIT NO.  
SYMBOL  
DESCRIPTION  
Unused. This bit is always "0".  
Control Mark Any one of the following:  
1. Read Data command - the FDC encountered a  
7
6
CM  
deleted data address mark.  
2. Read Deleted Data command  
encountered a data address mark.  
-
the FDC  
5
4
DD  
Data Error in The FDC detected a CRC error in the data field.  
Data Field  
WC  
Wrong  
The track address from the sector ID field is different  
from the track address maintained inside the FDC.  
Cylinder  
3
2
1
Unused. This bit is always "0".  
Unused. This bit is always "0".  
BC  
Bad Cylinder The track address from the sector ID field is different  
from the track address maintained inside the FDC and  
is equal to FF hex, which indicates a bad track with a  
hard error according to the IBM soft-sectored format.  
0
MD  
Missing Data The FDC cannot detect a data address mark or a  
Address Mark deleted data address mark.  
35  
Table 18- Status Register 3  
NAME  
BIT NO.  
SYMBOL  
DESCRIPTION  
Unused. This bit is always "0".  
7
6
WP  
Write  
Indicates the status of the WP pin.  
Protected  
5
4
3
2
Unused. This bit is always "1".  
T0  
Track 0  
Indicates the status of the TRK0 pin.  
Unused. This bit is always "1".  
HD  
Head  
Indicates the status of the HDSEL pin.  
Address  
1,0  
DS1,0  
Drive Select  
Indicates the status of the DS1, DS0 pins.  
RESET  
DOR Reset vs. DSR Reset (Software Reset)  
There are three sources of system reset on the  
FDC: the RESET pin of the FDC, a reset  
generated via a bit in the DOR, and a reset  
generated via a bit in the DSR. At power on, a  
Power On Reset initializes the FDC. All resets  
take the FDC out of the powerdown state.  
These two resets are functionally the same.  
Both will reset the FDC core, which affects drive  
status information and the FIFO circuits. The  
DSR reset clears itself automatically while the  
DOR reset requires the host to manually clear it.  
DOR reset has precedence over the DSR reset.  
The DOR reset is set automatically upon a pin  
reset. The user must manually clear this reset  
bit in the DOR to exit the reset state.  
All operations are terminated upon a RESET,  
and the FDC enters an idle state. A reset while  
a disk write is in progress will corrupt the data  
and CRC.  
MODES OF OPERATION  
On exiting the reset state, various internal  
registers are cleared, including the Configure  
command information, and the FDC waits for a  
new command. Drive polling will start unless  
disabled by a new Configure command.  
The FDC has three modes of operation, PC/AT  
mode, PS/2 mode and Model 30 mode. These  
are determined by the state of the IDENT and  
MFM bits 6 and 5 respectively of CRxx.  
PC/AT mode - (IDENT high, MFM a "don't  
care")  
RESET Pin (Hardware Reset)  
The PC/AT register set is enabled, the DMA  
enable bit of the DOR becomes valid (FINTR  
and DRQ can be hi Z), and TC and DENSEL  
The RESET pin is a global reset and clears all  
registers except those programmed by the  
Specify command.  
The DOR reset bit is  
become active high signals.  
enabled and must be cleared by the host to exit  
the reset state.  
36  
Burst mode is enabled via Bit[1] of CRF0 in  
Logical Device 0. Setting Bit[1]=0 enables burst  
mode; the default is Bit[1]=1, for non-burst  
mode.  
PS/2 mode - (IDENT low, MFM high)  
This mode supports the PS/2 models 50/60/80  
configuration and register set. The DMA bit of  
the DOR becomes a "don't care" (FINTR and  
DRQ are always valid), TC and DENSEL  
become active low.  
CONTROLLER PHASES  
For simplicity, command handling in the FDC  
can be divided into three phases: Command,  
Execution, and Result. Each phase is described  
in the following sections.  
Model 30 mode - (IDENT low, MFM low)  
This mode supports PS/2 Model 30  
configuration and register set. The DMA enable  
bit of ther DOR becomes valid (FINTR and DRQ  
can be hi Z), TC is active high and DENSEL is  
active low.  
Command Phase  
After a reset, the FDC enters the command  
phase and is ready to accept a command from  
the host. For each of the commands, a defined  
set of command code bytes and parameter  
bytes has to be written to the FDC before the  
command phase is complete. (Please refer to  
Table 19 for the command set descriptions.)  
These bytes of data must be transferred in the  
order prescribed.  
DMA TRANSFERS  
DMA transfers are enabled with the Specify  
command and are initiated by the FDC by  
activating the FDRQ pin during a data transfer  
command. The FIFO is enabled directly by  
asserting nDACK and addresses need not be  
valid.  
Note that if the DMA controller (i.e. 8237A) is  
programmed to function in verify mode, a  
pseudo read is performed by the FDC based  
only on nDACK. This mode is only available  
when the FDC has been configured into byte  
mode (FIFO disabled) and is programmed to do  
a read. With the FIFO enabled, the FDC can  
perform the above operation by using the new  
Verify command; no DMA operation is needed.  
Before writing to the FDC, the host must  
examine the RQM and DIO bits of the Main  
Status Register. RQM and DIO must be equal  
to "1" and "0" respectively before command  
bytes may be written. RQM is set false by the  
FDC after each write cycle until the received  
byte is processed. The FDC asserts RQM again  
to request each parameter byte of the command  
unless an illegal command condition is  
detected.  
After the last parameter byte is  
The FDC37C93xAPM supports two DMA  
transfer modes for the FDC: Single Transfer and  
received, RQM remains "0" and the FDC  
automatically enters the next phase as defined  
by the command definition.  
Burst Transfer.  
In the case of the single  
transfer, the DMA Req goes active at the start of  
the DMA cycle, and the DMA Req is deasserted  
after the nDACK. In the case of the burst  
transfer, the Req is held active until the last  
transfer (independent of nDACK). See timing  
diagrams for more information.  
The FIFO is disabled during the command  
phase to provide for the proper handling of the  
"Invalid Command" condition.  
37  
full sector have been placed in the FIFO. The  
FINT pin can be used for interrupt-driven  
systems, and RQM can be used for polled  
systems. The host must respond to the request  
by reading data from the FIFO. This process is  
repeated until the last byte is transferred out of  
the FIFO. The FDC will deactivate the FINT pin  
and RQM bit when the FIFO becomes empty.  
Execution Phase  
All data transfers to or from the FDC occur  
during the execution phase, which can proceed  
in DMA or non-DMA mode as indicated in the  
Specify command.  
After a reset, the FIFO is disabled. Each data  
byte is transferred by an FINT or FDRQ  
depending on the DMA mode. The Configure  
command can enable the FIFO and set the  
FIFO threshold value.  
Non-DMA Mode - Transfers from the Host to the  
FIFO  
The FINT pin and RQM bit in the Main Status  
Register are activated upon entering the  
execution phase of data transfer commands.  
The host must respond to the request by writing  
data into the FIFO. The FINT pin and RQM bit  
remain true until the FIFO becomes full. They  
are set true again when the FIFO has  
<threshold> bytes remaining in the FIFO. The  
FINT pin will also be deactivated if TC and  
nDACK both go inactive. The FDC enters the  
result phase after the last byte is taken by the  
FDC from the FIFO (i.e. FIFO empty condition).  
The following paragraphs detail the operation of  
the FIFO flow control. In these descriptions,  
<threshold> is defined as the number of bytes  
available to the FDC when service is requested  
from the host and ranges from 1 to 16. The  
parameter FIFOTHR, which the user programs,  
is one less and ranges from 0 to 15.  
A low threshold value (i.e. 2) results in longer  
periods of time between service requests, but  
requires faster servicing of the request for both  
read and write cases. The host reads (writes)  
from (to) the FIFO until empty (full), then the  
transfer request goes inactive. The host must  
be very responsive to the service request. This  
is the desired case for use with a "fast" system.  
DMA Mode - Transfers from the FIFO to the  
Host  
The FDC activates the DDRQ pin when the  
FIFO contains (16 - <threshold>) bytes, or the  
last byte of a full sector transfer has been  
placed in the FIFO. The DMA controller must  
respond to the request by reading data from the  
FIFO. The FDC will deactivate the DDRQ pin  
when the FIFO becomes empty. FDRQ goes  
inactive after nDACK goes active for the last  
byte of a data transfer (or on the active edge of  
nIOR, on the last byte, if no edge is present on  
nDACK). A data underrun may occur if FDRQ  
is not removed in time to prevent an unwanted  
cycle.  
A high value of threshold (i.e. 12) is used with a  
"sluggish" system by affording a long latency  
period after a service request, but results in  
more frequent service requests.  
Non-DMA Mode - Transfers from the FIFO to  
the Host  
The FINT pin and RQM bits in the Main Status  
Register are activated when the FIFO contains  
(16-<threshold>) bytes or the last bytes of a  
38  
DMA Mode - Transfers from the Host to the  
FIFO  
complete the sector as if a hardware TC was  
received. The only difference between these  
implicit functions and TC is that they return  
The FDC activates the FDRQ pin when entering  
the execution phase of the data transfer  
commands. The DMA controller must respond  
by activating the nDACK and nIOW pins and  
placing data in the FIFO. FDRQ remains active  
until the FIFO becomes full. FDRQ is again set  
true when the FIFO has <threshold> bytes  
remaining in the FIFO. The FDC will also  
deactivate the FDRQ pin when TC becomes true  
(qualified by nDACK), indicating that no more  
data is required. FDRQ goes inactive after  
nDACK goes active for the last byte of a data  
transfer (or on the active edge of nIOW of the  
last byte, if no edge is present on nDACK). A  
data overrun may occur if FDRQ is not removed  
in time to prevent an unwanted cycle.  
"abnormal termination" result status.  
status indications can be ignored if they were  
expected.  
Such  
Note that when the host is sending data to the  
FIFO of the FDC, the internal sector count will  
be complete when the FDC reads the last byte  
from its side of the FIFO. There may be a delay  
in the removal of the transfer request signal of  
up to the time taken for the FDC to read the last  
16 bytes from the FIFO. The host must tolerate  
this delay.  
Result Phase  
The generation of FINT determines the  
beginning of the result phase. For each of the  
commands, a defined set of result bytes has to  
be read from the FDC before the result phase is  
complete. These bytes of data must be read out  
for another command to start.  
Data Transfer Termination  
The FDC supports terminal count explicitly  
through the TC pin and implicitly through the  
underrun/overrun and end-of-track (EOT)  
functions. For full sector transfers, the EOT  
parameter can define the last sector to be  
transferred in a single or multi-sector transfer.  
RQM and DIO must both equal "1" before the  
result bytes may be read. After all the result  
bytes have been read, the RQM and DIO bits  
switch to "1" and "0" respectively and the CB bit  
is cleared, indicating that the FDC is ready to  
accept the next command.  
If the last sector to be transferred is a partial  
sector, the host can stop transferring the data in  
mid-sector, and the FDC will continue to  
39  
COMMAND SET/DESCRIPTIONS  
interrupt is issued. The user sends a Sense  
Interrupt Status command which returns an  
invalid command error. Refer to Table 19 for  
explanations of the various symbols used. Table  
20 lists the required parameters and the results  
associated with each command that the FDC is  
capable of performing.  
Commands can be written whenever the FDC is  
in the command phase. Each command has a  
unique set of needed parameters and status  
results. The FDC checks to see that the first  
byte is a valid command and, if valid, proceeds  
with the command. If it is invalid, an  
Table 19 - Description of Command Symbols  
NAME DESCRIPTION  
Cylinder Address The currently selected address; 0 to 255.  
Data Pattern The pattern to be written in each sector data field during  
SYMBOL  
C
D
formatting.  
D0, D1, D2, Drive Select 0-3  
D3  
Designates which drives are perpendicular drives on the  
Perpendicular Mode Command. A "1" indicates a perpendicular  
drive.  
DIR  
Direction Control If this bit is 0, then the head will step out from the spindle during a  
relative seek. If set to a 1, the head will step in toward the spindle.  
DS1  
DS0  
DRIVE  
DS0, DS1  
Disk Drive Select  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
drive 0  
drive 1  
drive 2  
drive 3  
DTL  
Special Sector  
Size  
By setting N to zero (00), DTL may be used to control the number  
of bytes transferred in disk read/write commands. The sector size  
(N = 0) is set to 128. If the actual sector (on the diskette) is larger  
than DTL, the remainder of the actual sector is read but is not  
passed to the host during read commands; during write  
commands, the remainder of the actual sector is written with all  
zero bytes. The CRC check code is calculated with the actual  
sector. When N is not zero, DTL has no meaning and should be  
set to FF HEX.  
EC  
Enable Count  
Enable FIFO  
When this bit is "1" the "DTL" parameter of the Verify command  
becomes SC (number of sectors per track).  
EFIFO  
EIS  
This active low bit when a 0, enables the FIFO. A "1" disables the  
FIFO (default).  
Enable Implied  
Seek  
When set, a seek operation will be performed before executing any  
read or write command that requires the C parameter in the  
command phase. A "0" disables the implied seek.  
40  
Table 19 - Description of Command Symbols  
NAME DESCRIPTION  
SYMBOL  
EOT  
End of Track  
The final sector number of the current track.  
GAP  
GPL  
Alters Gap 2 length when using Perpendicular Mode.  
Gap Length  
The Gap 3 size. (Gap 3 is the space between sectors excluding  
the VCO synchronization field).  
H/HDS  
HLT  
Head Address  
Selected head: 0 or 1 (disk side 0 or 1) as encoded in the sector  
ID field.  
Head Load Time The time interval that FDC waits after loading the head and before  
initializing a read or write operation. Refer to the Specify  
command for actual delays.  
HUT  
Head Unload  
Time  
The time interval from the end of the execution phase (of a read or  
write command) until the head is unloaded. Refer to the Specify  
command for actual delays.  
LOCK  
Lock defines whether EFIFO, FIFOTHR and PRETRK parameters  
of the CONFIGURE COMMAND can be reset to their default  
values by a "Software Reset" (reset caused by writing to the  
appropriate bits of either tha DSR or DOR).  
MFM  
MT  
MFM/FM Mode  
Selector  
A “1” selects the double density (MFM) mode. A “0” selects single  
density (FM) mode.  
Multi-Track  
Selector  
When set, this flag selects the multi-track operating mode. In this  
mode, the FDC treats a complete cylinder under head 0 and 1 as  
a single track. The FDC operates as this expanded track started  
at the first sector under head 0 and ended at the last sector under  
head 1. With this flag set, a multitrack read or write operation will  
automatically continue to the first sector under head 1 when the  
FDC finishes operating on the last sector under head 0.  
41  
Table 19 - Description of Command Symbols  
NAME DESCRIPTION  
SYMBOL  
N
Sector Size Code This specifies the number of bytes in a sector. If this parameter is  
"00", then the sector size is 128 bytes. The number of bytes  
transferred is determined by the DTL parameter. Otherwise the  
sector size is (2 raised to the "N'th" power) times 128. All values  
up to "07" hex are allowable. "07"h would equal a sector size of  
16k. It is the user's responsibility to not select combinations that  
are not possible with the drive.  
N
SECTOR SIZE  
128 bytes  
00  
01  
02  
03  
256 bytes  
512 bytes  
1024 bytes  
NCN  
ND  
New Cylinder  
Number  
The desired cylinder number.  
Non-DMA Mode  
Flag  
When set to “1”, indicates that the FDC is to operate in the non-  
DMA mode. In this mode, the host is interrupted for each data  
transfer. When set to “0”, the FDC operates in DMA mode,  
interfacing to a DMA controller by means of the DRQ and nDACK  
signals.  
OW  
Overwrite  
The bits D0-D3 of the Perpendicular Mode Command can only be  
modified if OW is set to “1”. OW is defined in the Lock command.  
PCN  
Present Cylinder The current position of the head at the completion of Sense  
Number  
Interrupt Status command.  
POLL  
PRETRK  
Polling Disable  
When set, the internal polling routine is disabled. When clear,  
polling is enabled.  
Precompensation Programmable from track 00 to FFH.  
Start Track  
Number  
R
Sector Address  
The sector number to be read or written. In multi-sector transfers,  
this parameter specifies the sector number of the first sector to be  
read or written.  
RCN  
Relative Cylinder Relative cylinder offset from present cylinder as used by the  
Number Relative Seek command.  
42  
Table 19 - Description of Command Symbols  
DESCRIPTION  
SYMBOL  
SC  
NAME  
Number of  
The number of sectors per track to be initialized by the Format  
Sectors Per Track command. The number of sectors per track to be verified during a  
Verify command when EC is set.  
SK  
Skip Flag  
When set to “1”, sectors containing a deleted data address mark  
will automatically be skipped during the execution of Read Data. If  
Read Deleted is executed, only sectors with a deleted address  
mark will be accessed. When set to "0", the sector is read or  
written the same as the read and write commands.  
SRT  
Step Rate Interval The time interval between step pulses issued by the FDC  
Programmable from 0.5 to 8 milliseconds in increments of 0.5 ms  
at the 1 Mbps data rate. Refer to the SPECIFY command for  
actual delays.  
ST0  
Status 0  
Status 1  
Status 2  
Status 3  
Write Gate  
Registers within the FDC which store status information after a  
command has been executed. This status information is available  
to the host during the result phase after command execution.  
ST1  
ST2  
ST3  
WGATE  
Alters timing of WE to allow for pre-erase loads in perpendicular  
drives.  
43  
INSTRUCTION SET  
Table 20 - Instruction Set  
READ DATA  
DATA BUS  
REMARKS  
PHASE  
R/W D7  
D6  
D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
W
W
W
MT MFM SK  
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
Command Codes  
0
0
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
--------C --------  
Sector ID information prior to  
Command execution.  
W
W
W
W
W
W
--------H --------  
--------R --------  
--------N --------  
-------EOT -------  
-------GPL -------  
-------DTL -------  
Execution  
Result  
Data transfer between the  
FDD and system.  
R
-------ST0 -------  
Status information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
-------ST1 -------  
-------ST2 -------  
--------C --------  
Sector ID information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
--------H --------  
--------R --------  
--------N --------  
44  
READ DELETED DATA  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
D6  
D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
W
W
W
MT MFM SK  
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
Command Codes  
0
0
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
--------C --------  
Sector ID information prior to  
Command execution.  
W
W
W
W
W
W
--------H --------  
--------R --------  
--------N --------  
-------EOT -------  
-------GPL -------  
-------DTL -------  
Execution  
Result  
Data transfer between the  
FDD and system.  
R
-------ST0 -------  
Status information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
-------ST1 -------  
-------ST2 -------  
--------C --------  
Sector ID information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
--------H --------  
--------R --------  
--------N --------  
45  
WRITE DATA  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
D6  
D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
W
W
W
MT MFM  
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Command Codes  
0
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
--------C --------  
Sector ID information prior to  
Command execution.  
W
W
W
W
W
W
--------H --------  
--------R --------  
--------N --------  
-------EOT -------  
-------GPL -------  
-------DTL -------  
Execution  
Result  
Data transfer between the  
FDD and system.  
R
-------ST0 -------  
Status information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
-------ST1 -------  
-------ST2 -------  
--------C --------  
Sector ID information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
--------H --------  
--------R --------  
--------N --------  
46  
WRITE DELETED DATA  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
D6  
D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
W
MT MFM  
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
Command Codes  
0
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
--------C --------  
Sector ID information  
prior to Command  
execution.  
W
W
W
W
W
W
--------H --------  
--------R --------  
--------N --------  
-------EOT -------  
-------GPL -------  
-------DTL -------  
Execution  
Result  
Data transfer between  
the FDD and system.  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
-------ST0 -------  
-------ST1 -------  
-------ST2 -------  
--------C --------  
--------H --------  
--------R --------  
--------N --------  
Status information after  
Command execution.  
Sector ID information  
after Command  
execution.  
47  
READ A TRACK  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
0
D6  
MFM  
0
D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Command Codes  
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
--------C --------  
Sector ID information  
prior to Command  
execution.  
W
W
W
W
W
W
--------H --------  
--------R --------  
--------N --------  
-------EOT -------  
-------GPL -------  
-------DTL -------  
Execution  
Result  
Data transfer between  
the FDD and system.  
FDC reads all of  
cylinders' contents from  
index hole to EOT.  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
-------ST0 -------  
-------ST1 -------  
-------ST2 -------  
--------C --------  
--------H --------  
--------R --------  
--------N --------  
Status information after  
Command execution.  
Sector ID information  
after Command  
execution.  
48  
VERIFY  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
D7  
D6  
D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
REMARKS  
Command  
W
W
W
MT MFM SK  
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
Command Codes  
EC  
0
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
--------C --------  
Sector ID information  
prior to Command  
execution.  
W
W
W
W
W
W
--------H --------  
--------R --------  
--------N --------  
-------EOT -------  
-------GPL -------  
------DTL/SC ------  
Execution  
Result  
No data transfer takes  
place.  
R
-------ST0 -------  
-------ST1 -------  
-------ST2 -------  
--------C --------  
--------H --------  
--------R --------  
Status information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
Sector ID information  
after Command  
execution.  
R
R
R
--------N --------  
VERSION  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
0
D6  
0
D5 D4 D3  
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
Command  
Result  
W
R
0
0
1
1
0
0
Command Code  
1
0
0
0
0
Enhanced Controller  
49  
FORMAT A TRACK  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
0
D6  
MFM  
0
D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
W
W
W
W
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Command Codes  
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
--------N --------  
--------SC --------  
-------GPL -------  
--------D --------  
Bytes/Sector  
Sectors/Cylinder  
Gap 3  
Filler Byte  
Execution for  
Each Sector  
Repeat:  
W
--------C --------  
Input Sector  
Parameters  
W
W
W
--------H --------  
--------R --------  
--------N --------  
FDC formats an entire  
cylinder  
Result  
R
-------ST0 -------  
Status information after  
Command execution  
R
R
R
R
R
R
-------ST1 -------  
-------ST2 -------  
------Undefined ------  
------Undefined ------  
------Undefined ------  
------Undefined ------  
50  
RECALIBRATE  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
Command Codes  
DS1 DS0  
Execution  
Head retracted to Track 0  
Interrupt.  
SENSE INTERRUPT STATUS  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
Result  
W
R
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Command Codes  
-------ST0 -------  
Status information at the end  
of each seek operation.  
R
-------PCN -------  
SPECIFY  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
W
W
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Command Codes  
---SRT ---  
---HUT ---  
------HLT ------  
ND  
51  
SENSE DRIVE STATUS  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Command Codes  
HDS DS1 DS0  
Result  
-------ST3 -------  
Status information about  
FDD  
SEEK  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
Command Codes  
HDS DS1 DS0  
-------NCN -------  
Execution  
Head positioned over  
proper cylinder on  
diskette.  
CONFIGURE  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
Configure  
Information  
D7 D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
W
W
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
EIS EFIFO POLL  
---FIFOTHR ---  
Execution  
---------PRETRK ---------  
52  
RELATIVE SEEK  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
W
1
0
DIR  
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
HDS DS1 DS0  
-------RCN -------  
DUMPREG  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3 D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
*Note:  
Registers  
placed in  
FIFO  
Execution  
Result  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
------PCN-Drive 0 -------  
------PCN-Drive 1 -------  
------PCN-Drive 2 -------  
------PCN-Drive 3 -------  
----SRT ----  
-------HLT -------  
-------SC/EOT -------  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
EIS EFIFO POLL  
---HUT ---  
ND  
LOCK  
0
0
GAP WGATE  
--FIFOTHR --  
--------PRETRK --------  
53  
READ ID  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
Commands  
D7  
0
D6  
MFM  
0
D5 D4 D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
W
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
HDS DS1 DS0  
Execution  
Result  
The first correct ID  
information on the  
Cylinder is stored in  
Data Register  
--------ST0 --------  
--------ST1 --------  
Status information after  
Command execution.  
R
R
R
R
R
R
--------ST2 --------  
--------C --------  
--------H --------  
--------R --------  
--------N --------  
Disk status after the  
Command has  
completed  
54  
PERPENDICULAR MODE  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
0
D6 D5 D4 D3 D2  
D1  
D0  
Command  
W
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
Command Codes  
OW  
D3 D2 D1 D0  
GAP WGATE  
INVALID CODES  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
W
-----Invalid Codes -----  
Invalid Command Codes  
(NoOp - FDC goes into  
Standby State)  
Result  
R
-------ST0 -------  
ST0 = 80H  
LOCK  
DATA BUS  
PHASE  
R/W  
REMARKS  
D7  
LOCK  
0
D6 D5  
D4  
1
D3 D2 D1 D0  
Command  
Result  
W
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Command Codes  
LOCK  
SC is returned if the last command that was issued was the Format command. EOT is returned if the  
last command was a Read or Write.  
NOTE: These bits are used internally only. They are not reflected in the Drive Select pins. It is the  
user's responsibility to maintain correspondence between these bits and the Drive Select pins (DOR).  
55  
CRC bytes, and at the end of the sector,  
terminate the Read Data Command.  
DATA TRANSFER COMMANDS  
All of the Read Data, Write Data and Verify type  
commands use the same parameter bytes and  
return the same results information, the only  
difference being the coding of bits 0-4 in the first  
byte.  
N determines the number of bytes per sector  
(see Table 21 below). If N is set to zero, the  
sector size is set to 128. The DTL value  
determines the number of bytes to be  
transferred. If DTL is less than 128, the FDC  
transfers the specified number of bytes to the  
host. For reads, it continues to read the entire  
128-byte sector and checks for CRC errors. For  
writes, it completes the 128-byte sector by filling  
in zeros. If N is not set to 00 Hex, DTL should  
be set to FF Hex and has no impact on the  
number of bytes transferred.  
An implied seek will be executed if the feature  
was enabled by the Configure command. This  
seek is completely transparent to the user. The  
Drive Busy bit for the drive will go active in the  
Main Status Register during the seek portion of  
the command. If the seek portion fails, it is  
reflected in the results status normally returned  
for  
a
Read/Write Data command. Status  
Register 0 (ST0) would contain the error code  
and C would contain the cylinder on which the  
seek failed.  
Table 21 - Sector Sizes  
N
SECTOR SIZE  
00  
01  
02  
03  
..  
128 bytes  
256 bytes  
512 bytes  
1024 bytes  
...  
Read Data  
A set of nine (9) bytes is required to place the  
FDC in the Read Data Mode. After the Read  
Data command has been issued, the FDC loads  
the head (if it is in the unloaded state), waits the  
specified head settling time (defined in the  
Specify command), and begins reading ID  
Address Marks and ID fields. When the sector  
address read off the diskette matches with the  
sector address specified in the command, the  
FDC reads the sector's data field and transfers  
the data to the FIFO.  
07  
16 Kbytes  
The amount of data which can be handled with  
a single command to the FDC depends upon  
MT (multi-track) and N (number of bytes/sector).  
The Multi-Track function (MT) allows the FDC to  
read data from both sides of the diskette. For a  
particular cylinder, data will be transferred  
starting at Sector 1, Side 0 and completing the  
last sector of the same track at Side 1.  
After completion of the read operation from the  
current sector, the sector address is  
incremented by one and the data from the next  
logical sector is read and output via the FIFO.  
This continuous read function is called "Multi-  
Sector Read Operation". Upon receipt of TC, or  
an implied TC (FIFO overrun/underrun), the  
FDC stops sending data but will continue to  
read data from the current sector, check the  
If the host terminates a read or write operation  
in the FDC, the ID information in the result  
phase is dependent upon the state of the MT bit  
and EOT byte. Refer to Table 22.  
56  
At the completion of the Read Data command,  
the head is not unloaded until after the Head  
Unload Time Interval (specified in the Specify  
command) has elapsed. If the host issues  
another command before the head unloads,  
then the head settling time may be saved  
between subsequent reads.  
the Read Data Command.  
After reading the ID and Data Fields in each  
sector, the FDC checks the CRC bytes. If a  
CRC error occurs in the ID or data field, the  
FDC sets the IC code in Status Register 0 to  
"01" indicating abnormal termination, sets the  
DE bit flag in Status Register 1 to "1", sets the  
DD bit in Status Register 2 to "1" if CRC is  
incorrect in the ID field, and terminates the Read  
Data Command. Table 23 describes the effect  
of the SK bit on the Read Data command  
execution and results. Except where noted in  
Table 23, the C or R value of the sector address  
is automatically incremented (see Table 25).  
If the FDC detects a pulse on the nINDEX pin  
twice without finding the specified sector  
(meaning that the diskette's index hole passes  
through index detect logic in the drive twice), the  
FDC sets the IC code in Status Register 0 to  
"01" indicating abnormal termination, sets the  
ND bit in Status Register 1 to "1" indicating a  
sector  
not  
found,  
and  
terminates  
Table 22 - Effects of MT and N Bits  
FINAL SECTOR READ  
FROM DISK  
26 at side 0 or 1  
26 at side 1  
15 at side 0 or 1  
15 at side 1  
MAXIMUM TRANSFER  
CAPACITY  
MT  
N
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
256 x 26 = 6,656  
256 x 52 = 13,312  
512 x 15 = 7,680  
512 x 30 = 15,360  
1024 x 8 = 8,192  
1024 x 16 = 16,384  
8 at side 0 or 1  
16 at side 1  
Table 23 - Skip Bit vs Read Data Command  
DATA ADDRESS  
MARK TYPE  
ENCOUNTERED  
SK BIT  
VALUE  
RESULTS  
SECTOR CM BIT OF DESCRIPTION OF  
READ?  
ST2 SET?  
RESULTS  
0
0
Normal Data  
Deleted Data  
Yes  
No  
Normal termination.  
Yes  
Yes  
Address not incremented.  
Next sector not searched for.  
Normal termination.  
1
1
Normal Data  
Deleted Data  
Yes  
No  
No  
Normal termination. Sector  
not read ("skipped").  
Yes  
57  
Table 24 describes the effect of the SK bit on  
the Read Deleted Data command execution  
and results.  
Read Deleted Data  
This command is the same as the Read Data  
command, only it operates on sectors that  
contain a Deleted Data Address Mark at the  
beginning of a Data Field.  
Except where noted in Table 24, the C or R  
value of the sector address is automatically  
incremented (see Table 25).  
Table 24 - Skip Bit vs. Read Deleted Data Command  
DATA ADDRESS  
MARK TYPE  
ENCOUNTERED  
SK BIT  
VALUE  
RESULTS  
SECTOR CM BIT OF  
DESCRIPTION  
OF RESULTS  
READ?  
ST2 SET?  
0
Normal Data  
Yes  
Yes  
Address not  
incremented.  
Next sector not  
searched for.  
Normal  
0
1
Deleted Data  
Normal Data  
Yes  
No  
No  
termination.  
Normal  
Yes  
termination.  
Sector not read  
("skipped").  
Normal  
1
Deleted Data  
Yes  
No  
termination.  
command and sets the ND flag of Status  
Register 1 to a "1" if there is no comparison.  
Multi-track or skip operations are not allowed  
with this command. The MT and SK bits (bits  
D7 and D5 of the first command byte  
respectively) should always be set to "0".  
Read A Track  
This command is similar to the Read Data  
command except that the entire data field is  
read continuously from each of the sectors of  
a track. Immediately after encountering a  
pulse on the nINDEX pin, the FDC starts to  
read all data fields on the track as continuous  
blocks of data without regard to logical sector  
numbers. If the FDC finds an error in the ID or  
DATA CRC check bytes, it continues to read  
data from the track and sets the appropriate  
error bits at the end of the command. The  
FDC compares the ID information read from  
each sector with the specified value in the  
This command terminates when the EOT  
specified number of sectors has not been  
read. If the FDC does not find an ID Address  
Mark on the diskette after the second  
occurrence of a pulse on the IDX pin, then it  
sets the IC code in Status Register 0 to "01"  
(abnormal termination), sets the MA bit in  
Status Register 1 to "1", and terminates the  
command.  
58  
Table 25 - Result Phase Table  
FINAL SECTOR  
ID INFORMATION AT RESULT PHASE  
MT  
HEAD  
TRANSFERRED TO  
HOST  
C
H
R
N
0
0
Less than EOT  
Equal to EOT  
Less than EOT  
Equal to EOT  
Less than EOT  
Equal to EOT  
Less than EOT  
Equal to EOT  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
LSB  
NC  
LSB  
R + 1  
01  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
NC  
C + 1  
NC  
1
0
1
R + 1  
01  
C + 1  
NC  
1
R + 1  
01  
NC  
NC  
R + 1  
01  
C + 1  
NC: No Change, the same value as the one at the beginning of command execution.  
LSB: Least Significant Bit, the LSB of H is complemented.  
sector and checks the CRC bytes. If it detects  
a CRC error in one of the ID fields, it sets the  
IC code in Status Register 0 to "01" (abnormal  
termination), sets the DE bit of Status Register 1  
to "1", and terminates the Write Data command.  
Write Data  
After the Write Data command has been issued,  
the FDC loads the head (if it is in the unloaded  
state), waits the specified head load time if  
unloaded (defined in the Specify command),  
and begins reading ID fields. When the sector  
address read from the diskette matches the  
sector address specified in the command, the  
FDC reads the data from the host via the FIFO  
and writes it to the sector's data field.  
The Write Data command operates in much the  
same manner as the Read Data command. The  
following items are the same. Please refer to the  
Read Data Command for details:  
·
·
·
·
·
Transfer Capacity  
EN (End of Cylinder) bit  
ND (No Data) bit  
Head Load, Unload Time Interval  
ID information when the host terminates the  
command  
After writing data into the current sector, the  
FDC computes the CRC value and writes it into  
the CRC field at the end of the sector transfer.  
The Sector Number stored in "R" is incremented  
by one, and the FDC continues writing to the  
next data field. The FDC continues this "Multi-  
Sector Write Operation". Upon receipt of a  
terminal count signal or if a FIFO over/under run  
occurs while a data field is being written, then  
the remainder of the data field is filled with  
·
Definition of DTL when N = 0 and when N  
does not = 0  
Write Deleted Data  
This command is almost the same as the Write  
Data command except that a Deleted Data  
Address Mark is written at the beginning of the  
Data Field instead of the normal Data Address  
Mark. This command is typically used to mark  
zeros.  
The FDC reads the ID field of each  
59  
a bad sector containing an error on the floppy  
disk.  
decremented to 0 (an SC value of 0 will verify  
256 sectors). This command can also be  
terminated by setting the EC bit to "0" and the  
EOT value equal to the final sector to be  
checked. If EC is set to "0", DTL/SC should be  
programmed to 0FFH. Refer to Table 25 and  
Table 26 for information concerning the values  
of MT and EC versus SC and EOT value.  
Verify  
The Verify command is used to verify the data  
stored on a disk. This command acts exactly  
like a Read Data command except that no data  
is transferred to the host. Data is read from the  
disk and CRC is computed and checked against  
the previously-stored value.  
Definitions:  
# Sectors Per Side = Number of formatted  
sectors per each side of the disk.  
Because data is not transferred to the host, TC  
(pin 89) cannot be used to terminate this  
command. By setting the EC bit to "1", an  
implicit TC will be issued to the FDC. This  
implicit TC will occur when the SC value has  
# Sectors Remaining = Number of formatted  
sectors left which can be read, including side 1  
of the disk if MT is set to "1".  
Table 26 - Verify Command Result Phase Table  
MT  
EC  
SC/EOT VALUE  
TERMINATION RESULT  
0
0
SC = DTL  
EOT £ # Sectors Per Side  
Success Termination  
Result Phase Valid  
0
0
0
1
SC = DTL  
EOT > # Sectors Per Side  
Unsuccessful Termination  
Result Phase Invalid  
Successful Termination  
Result Phase Valid  
SC £ # Sectors Remaining AND  
EOT £ # Sectors Per Side  
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
SC > # Sectors Remaining OR  
EOT > # Sectors Per Side  
Unsuccessful Termination  
Result Phase Invalid  
SC = DTL  
EOT £ # Sectors Per Side  
Successful Termination  
Result Phase Valid  
SC = DTL  
EOT > # Sectors Per Side  
Unsuccessful Termination  
Result Phase Invalid  
Successful Termination  
Result Phase Valid  
SC £ # Sectors Remaining AND  
EOT £ # Sectors Per Side  
1
1
SC > # Sectors Remaining OR  
EOT > # Sectors Per Side  
Unsuccessful Termination  
Result Phase Invalid  
Note: If MT is set to "1" and the SC value is greater than the number of remaining formatted sectors  
on Side 0, verifying will continue on Side 1 of the disk.  
60  
After formatting each sector, the host must send  
new values for C, H, R and N to the FDC for the  
next sector on the track. The R value (sector  
number) is the only value that must be changed  
by the host after each sector is formatted. This  
allows the disk to be formatted with  
nonsequential sector addresses (interleaving).  
This incrementing and formatting continues for  
the whole track until the FDC encounters a pulse  
on the IDX pin again and it terminates the  
command.  
Format A Track  
The Format command allows an entire track to  
be formatted. After a pulse from the IDX pin is  
detected, the FDC starts writing data on the disk  
including gaps, address marks, ID fields, and  
data fields per the IBM System 34 or 3740  
format (MFM or FM respectively). The particular  
values that will be written to the gap and data  
field are controlled by the values programmed  
into N, SC, GPL, and D which are specified by  
the host during the command phase. The data  
field of the sector is filled with the data byte  
specified by D. The ID field for each sector is  
supplied by the host; that is, four data bytes per  
sector are needed by the FDC for C, H, R, and  
N (cylinder, head, sector number and sector size  
respectively).  
Table 27 contains typical values for gap fields  
which are dependent upon the size of the sector  
and the number of sectors on each track.  
Actual values can vary due to drive electronics.  
FORMAT FIELDS  
SYSTEM 34 (DOUBLE DENSITY) FORMAT  
DATA  
GAP4a SYNC  
IAM  
GAP1 SYNC IDAM  
C
Y
L
H
D
S
E
C
N
O
C
R
C
GAP2 SYNC  
AM  
C
R
C
80x  
4E  
12x  
00  
50x  
4E  
12x  
00  
22x  
4E  
12x  
00  
DATA  
DATA  
DATA  
GAP3 GAP 4b  
GAP3 GAP 4b  
GAP3 GAP 4b  
3x FC  
C2  
3x FE  
A1  
3x FB  
A1 F8  
SYSTEM 3740 (SINGLE DENSITY) FORMAT  
DATA  
AM  
GAP4a SYNC  
IAM  
FC  
GAP1 SYNC IDAM  
C
Y
L
H
D
S
E
C
N
O
C
R
C
GAP2 SYNC  
C
R
C
40x  
FF  
6x  
00  
26x  
FF  
6x  
00  
11x  
FF  
6x  
00  
FE  
FB or  
F8  
PERPENDICULAR FORMAT  
DATA  
AM  
GAP4a SYNC  
IAM  
GAP1 SYNC IDAM  
C
Y
L
H
D
S
E
C
N
O
C
R
C
GAP2 SYNC  
C
R
C
80x  
4E  
12x  
00  
50x  
4E  
12x  
00  
41x  
4E  
12x  
00  
3x FC  
C2  
3x FE  
A1  
3x FB  
A1 F8  
61  
Table 27 - Typical Values for Formatting  
FORMAT SECTOR SIZE  
N
SC  
GPL1  
GPL2  
128  
128  
512  
1024  
2048  
4096  
...  
00  
00  
02  
03  
04  
05  
...  
12  
10  
08  
04  
02  
01  
07  
10  
18  
46  
C8  
C8  
09  
19  
30  
87  
FF  
FF  
FM  
5.25"  
Drives  
256  
256  
01  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
...  
12  
10  
09  
04  
02  
01  
0A  
20  
2A  
80  
C8  
C8  
0C  
32  
50  
F0  
FF  
FF  
512*  
1024  
2048  
4096  
...  
MFM  
128  
256  
512  
0
1
2
0F  
09  
05  
07  
0F  
1B  
1B  
2A  
3A  
FM  
3.5"  
Drives  
256  
512**  
1024  
1
2
3
0F  
09  
05  
0E  
1B  
35  
36  
54  
74  
MFM  
GPL1 = suggested GPL values in Read and Write commands to avoid splice point  
between data field and ID field of contiguous sections.  
GPL2 = suggested GPL value in Format A Track command.  
*PC/AT values (typical)  
**PS/2 values (typical). Applies with 1.0 MB and 2.0 MB drives.  
NOTE: All values except sector size are in hex.  
62  
Disks capable of handling more than 80 tracks  
per side may require more than one Recalibrate  
command to return the head back to physical  
Track 0.  
CONTROL COMMANDS  
Control commands differ from the other  
commands in that no data transfer takes place.  
Three commands generate an interrupt when  
complete: Read ID, Recalibrate, and Seek. The  
other control commands do not generate an  
interrupt.  
The Recalibrate command does not have a  
result phase.  
The Sense Interrupt Status  
command must be issued after the Recalibrate  
command to effectively terminate it and to  
provide verification of the head position (PCN).  
During the command phase of the recalibrate  
operation, the FDC is in the BUSY state, but  
during the execution phase it is in a NON-BUSY  
Read ID  
The Read ID command is used to find the  
present position of the recording heads. The  
FDC stores the values from the first ID field it is  
able to read into its registers. If the FDC does  
not find an ID address mark on the diskette after  
the second occurrence of a pulse on the  
nINDEX pin, it then sets the IC code in Status  
Register 0 to "01" (abnormal termination), sets  
the MA bit in Status Register 1 to "1", and  
terminates the command.  
state.  
At this time, another Recalibrate  
command may be issued, and in this manner  
parallel Recalibrate operations may be done on  
up to four drives at once.  
Upon power up, the software must issue a  
Recalibrate command to properly initialize all  
drives and the controller.  
Seek  
The following commands will generate an  
interrupt upon completion. They do not return  
any result bytes. It is highly recommended that  
control commands be followed by the Sense  
Interrupt Status command. Otherwise, valuable  
interrupt status information will be lost.  
The read/write head within the drive is moved  
from track to track under the control of the Seek  
command. The FDC compares the PCN, which  
is the current head position, with the NCN and  
performs the following operation if there is a  
difference:  
Recalibrate  
PCN < NCN: Direction signal to drive set  
to "1" (step in) and issues  
step pulses.  
PCN > NCN: Direction signal to drive set  
to "0" (step out) and issues  
step pulses.  
This command causes the read/write head  
within the FDC to retract to the track 0 position.  
The FDC clears the contents of the PCN counter  
and checks the status of the nTR0 pin from the  
FDD. As long as the nTR0 pin is low, the DIR  
pin remains 0 and step pulses are issued.  
When the nTR0 pin goes high, the SE bit in  
Status Register 0 is set to "1" and the command  
is terminated. If the nTR0 pin is still low after 79  
step pulses have been issued, the FDC sets the  
SE and the EC bits of Status Register 0 to "1"  
and terminates the command.  
The rate at which step pulses are issued is  
controlled by SRT (Stepping Rate Time) in the  
Specify command. After each step pulse is  
issued, NCN is compared against PCN, and  
when NCN = PCN the SE bit in Status Register  
0 is set to "1" and the command is terminated.  
63  
During the command phase of the seek or  
recalibrate operation, the FDC is in the BUSY  
state, but during the execution phase it is in the  
NON-BUSY state. At this time, another Seek or  
Recalibrate command may be issued, and in  
this manner, parallel seek operations may be  
done on up to four drives at once.  
b. Read A Track command  
c. Read ID command  
d. Read Deleted Data command  
e. Write Data command  
f. Format A Track command  
g. Write Deleted Data command  
h. Verify command  
Note that if implied seek is not enabled, the read  
and write commands should be preceded by:  
2. End of Seek, Relative Seek, or Recalibrate  
command  
1) Seek command - Step to the proper track  
2) Sense Interrupt Status command  
Terminate the Seek command  
3. FDC requires a data transfer during the  
execution phase in the non-DMA mode  
-
3) Read ID - Verify head is on proper track  
4) Issue Read/Write command.  
The Sense Interrupt Status command resets the  
interrupt signal and, via the IC code and SE bit  
of Status Register 0, identifies the cause of the  
interrupt.  
The Seek command does not have a result  
phase. Therefore, it is highly recommended that  
the Sense Interrupt Status command be issued  
after the Seek command to terminate it and to  
provide verification of the head position (PCN).  
The H bit (Head Address) in ST0 will always  
return to a "0". When exiting POWERDOWN  
mode, the FDC clears the PCN value and the  
status information to zero. Prior to issuing the  
POWERDOWN command, it is highly  
recommended that the user service all pending  
interrupts through the Sense Interrupt Status  
command.  
Table 28 - Interrupt Identification  
SE  
IC  
INTERRUPT DUE TO  
0
1
11  
00  
Polling  
Normal termination of Seek  
or Recalibrate command  
Abnormal termination of  
Seek or Recalibrate  
command  
1
01  
The Seek, Relative Seek, and Recalibrate  
commands have no result phase. The Sense  
Interrupt Status command must be issued  
immediately after these commands to terminate  
them and to provide verification of the head  
position (PCN). The H (Head Address) bit in  
ST0 will always return a "0". If a Sense Interrupt  
Status is not issued, the drive will continue to be  
BUSY and may affect the operation of the next  
command.  
Sense Interrupt Status  
An interrupt signal on FINT pin is generated by  
the FDC for one of the following reasons:  
1. Upon entering the Result Phase of:  
a. Read Data command  
64  
from the end of the execution phase of one of  
the read/write commands to the head unload  
state. The SRT (Step Rate Time) defines the  
time interval between adjacent step pulses. Note  
that the spacing between the first and second  
step pulses may be shorter than the remaining  
Sense Drive Status  
Sense Drive Status obtains drive status  
information. It has no execution phase and  
goes directly to the result phase from the  
command phase. Status Register 3 contains  
the drive status information.  
step pulses.  
The HLT (Head Load Time)  
defines the time between when the Head Load  
signal goes high and the read/write operation  
starts. The values change with the data rate  
speedselection and are documented in Table 29.  
The values are the same for MFM and FM.  
Specify  
The Specify command sets the initial values for  
each of the three internal times. The HUT  
(Head Unload Time) defines the time  
Table 29 - Drive Control Delays (ms)  
HUT  
SRT  
2M  
1M  
500K 300K 250K  
2M  
1M  
500K 300K 250K  
0
1
..  
E
F
64  
4
..  
56  
60  
128  
8
..  
112  
120  
256  
16  
..  
224  
240  
426  
26.7  
..  
373  
400  
512  
32  
..  
448  
480  
4
3.75  
..  
0.5  
0.25  
8
7.5  
..  
1
0.5  
16  
15  
..  
2
1
26.7  
25  
..  
3.33  
1.67  
32  
30  
..  
4
2
HLT  
500K  
2M  
1M  
300K  
250K  
00  
01  
02  
..  
64  
0.5  
1
128  
1
2
256  
2
4
426  
3.3  
6.7  
..  
512  
4
8
..  
..  
..  
.
7F  
7F  
63  
63.5  
126  
127  
252  
254  
420  
423  
504  
508  
The choice of DMA or non-DMA operations is  
made by the ND bit. When this bit is "1", the  
non-DMA mode is selected, and when ND is "0",  
the DMA mode is selected. In DMA mode, data  
transfers are signalled by the FDRQ pin. Non-  
DMA mode uses the RQM bit and the FINT pin  
to signal data transfers.  
Configure  
The Configure command is issued to select the  
special features of the FDC. A Configure  
command need not be issued if the default  
values of the FDC meet the system  
requirements.  
65  
Configure Default Values:  
Relative Seek  
EIS - No Implied Seeks  
EFIFO - FIFO Disabled  
POLL - Polling Enabled  
The command is coded the same as for Seek,  
except for the MSB of the first byte and the DIR  
bit.  
FIFOTHR - FIFO Threshold Set to 1 Byte  
PRETRK - Pre-Compensation Set to Track 0  
DIR  
Head Step Direction Control  
EIS - Enable Implied Seek. When set to "1", the  
FDC will perform a Seek operation before  
executing a read or write command. Defaults to  
no implied seek.  
DIR  
ACTION  
0
1
Step Head Out  
Step Head In  
EFIFO - A "1" disables the FIFO (default). This  
means data transfers are asked for on a byte-  
by-byte basis. Defaults to "1", FIFO disabled.  
The threshold defaults to "1".  
RCN Relative  
Cylinder  
Number  
that  
determines how many tracks to step the  
head in or out from the current track  
number.  
POLL - Disable polling of the drives. Defaults to  
"0", polling enabled. When enabled, a single  
interrupt is generated after a reset. No polling is  
performed while the drive head is loaded and  
the head unload delay has not expired.  
The Relative Seek command differs from the  
Seek command in that it steps the head the  
absolute number of tracks specified in the  
command instead of making a comparison  
against an internal register.  
The Seek  
FIFOTHR - The FIFO threshold in the execution  
phase of read or write commands. This is  
programmable from 1 to 16 bytes. Defaults to  
one byte. A "00" selects one byte; "0F" selects  
16 bytes.  
command is good for drives that support a  
maximum of 256 tracks. Relative Seeks cannot  
be overlapped with other Relative Seeks. Only  
one Relative Seek can be active at a time.  
Relative Seeks may be overlapped with Seeks  
and Recalibrates. Bit 4 of Status Register 0  
(EC) will be set if Relative Seek attempts to step  
outward beyond Track 0.  
PRETRK  
-
Pre-Compensation Start Track  
Number. Programmable from track 0 to 255.  
Defaults to track 0. A "00" selects track 0; "FF"  
selects track 255.  
As an example, assume that a floppy drive has  
300 useable tracks. The host needs to read  
track 300 and the head is on any track (0-255).  
If a Seek command is issued, the head will stop  
at track 255. If a Relative Seek command is  
issued, the FDC will move the head the  
specified number of tracks, regardless of the  
internal cylinder position register (but will  
increment the register). If the head was on track  
40 (d), the maximum track that the FDC could  
position the head on using Relative Seek will be  
295 (D), the initial track + 255 (D). The  
maximum count that the head can be moved  
Version  
The Version command checks to see if the  
controller is an enhanced type or the older type  
(765A). A value of 90 H is returned as the result  
byte.  
66  
with a single Relative Seek command is 255  
(D).  
to keep track of with software without the Read  
ID command.  
The internal register, PCN, will overflow as the  
cylinder number crosses track 255 and will  
contain 39 (D). The resulting PCN value is thus  
(RCN + PCN) mod 256. Functionally, the FDC  
starts counting from 0 again as the track  
number goes above 255 (D). It is the user's  
responsibility to compensate FDC functions  
Perpendicular Mode  
The Perpendicular Mode command should be  
issued prior to executing Read/Write/Format  
commands that access  
a disk drive with  
perpendicular recording capability. With this  
command, the length of the Gap2 field and VCO  
enable timing can be altered to accommodate  
the unique requirements of these drives. Table  
30 describes the effects of the WGATE and  
GAP bits for the Perpendicular Mode command.  
Upon a reset, the FDC will default to the  
conventional mode (WGATE = 0, GAP = 0).  
(precompensation  
track  
number)  
when  
accessing tracks greater than 255. The FDC  
does not keep track that it is working in an  
"extended track area" (greater than 255). Any  
command issued will use the current PCN value  
except for the Recalibrate command, which only  
looks for the TRACK0 signal. Recalibrate will  
return an error if the head is farther than 79 due  
to its limitation of issuing a maximum of 80 step  
pulses. The user simply needs to issue a  
Selection of the 500 Kbps and  
1 Mbps  
perpendicular modes is independent of the  
actual data rate selected in the Data Rate Select  
Register. The user must ensure that these two  
data rates remain consistent.  
second Recalibrate command.  
The Seek  
command and implied seeks will function  
correctly within the 44 (D) track (299-255) area  
of the "extended track area". It is the user's  
responsibility not to issue a new track position  
that will exceed the maximum track that is  
present in the extended area.  
The Gap2 and VCO timing requirements for  
perpendicular recording type drives are dictated  
by the design of the read/write head. In the  
design of this head, a pre-erase head precedes  
the normal read/write head by a distance of 200  
micrometers. This works out to about 38 bytes  
at a 1 Mbps recording density. Whenever the  
write head is enabled by the Write Gate signal,  
the pre-erase head is also activated at the same  
time. Thus, when the write head is initially  
turned on, flux transitions recorded on the media  
for the first 38 bytes will not be preconditioned  
with the pre-erase head since it has not yet been  
activated. To accommodate this head activation  
and deactivation time, the Gap2 field is  
expanded to a length of 41 bytes. The format  
field shown on Page 61 illustrates the change in  
the Gap2 field size for the perpendicular format.  
To return to the standard floppy range (0-255) of  
tracks, a Relative Seek should be issued to  
cross the track 255 boundary.  
A Relative Seek can be used instead of the  
normal Seek, but the host is required to  
calculate the difference between the current  
head location and the new (target) head  
location. This may require the host to issue a  
Read ID command to ensure that the head is  
physically on the track that software assumes it  
to be. Different FDC commands will return  
different cylinder results which may be difficult  
67  
On the read back by the FDC, the controller  
must begin synchronization at the beginning of  
the sync field. For the conventional mode, the  
internal PLL VCO is enabled (VCOEN)  
approximately 24 bytes from the start of the  
Gap2 field. But, when the controller operates in  
the 1 Mbps perpendicular mode (WGATE = 1,  
GAP = 1), VCOEN goes active after 43 bytes to  
accommodate the increased Gap2 field size.  
For both cases, and approximate two-byte  
cushion is maintained from the beginning of the  
sync field for the purposes of avoiding write  
splices in the presence of motor speed variation.  
enhancement allows data transfers between  
Conventional and Perpendicular drives without  
having to issue Perpendicular mode commands  
between the accesses of the different drive  
types, nor having to change write pre-  
compensation values.  
When both GAP and WGATE bits of the  
PERPENDICULAR MODE COMMAND are both  
programmed to "0" (Conventional mode), then  
D0, D1, D2, D3, and D4 can be programmed  
independently to "1" for that drive to be set  
automatically to Perpendicular mode. In this  
mode the following set of conditions also apply:  
For the Write Data case, the FDC activates  
Write Gate at the beginning of the sync field  
under the conventional mode. The controller  
then writes a new sync field, data address mark,  
data field, and CRC as shown on page 62. With  
the pre-erase head of the perpendicular drive,  
the write head must be activated in the Gap2  
field to insure a proper write of the new sync  
field. For the 1 Mbps perpendicular mode  
(WGATE = 1, GAP = 1), 38 bytes will be written  
in the Gap2 space. Since the bit density is  
proportional to the data rate, 19 bytes will be  
written in the Gap2 field for the 500 Kbps  
perpendicular mode (WGATE = 1, GAP =0).  
1. The GAP2 written to a perpendicular drive  
during a write operation will depend upon the  
programmed data rate.  
2. The write pre-compensation given to a  
perpendicular mode drive will be 0ns.  
3. For D0-D3 programmed to "0" for  
conventional mode drives any data written  
will be at the currently programmed write  
pre-compensation.  
Note: Bits D0-D3 can only be overwritten when  
OW is programmed as a "1".If either  
GAP or WGATE is a "1" then D0-D3 are  
ignored.  
It should be noted that none of the alterations in  
Gap2 size, VCO timing, or Write Gate timing  
affect normal program flow. The information  
provided here is just for background purposes  
and is not needed for normal operation. Once  
the Perpendicular Mode command is invoked,  
FDC software behavior from the user standpoint  
is unchanged.  
Software and hardware resets have the  
following effect on the PERPENDICULAR  
MODE COMMAND:  
1. "Software" resets (via the DOR or DSR  
registers) will only clear GAP and WGATE  
bits to "0". D0-D3 are unaffected and retain  
their previous value.  
The perpendicular mode command is enhanced  
to allow specific drives to be designated  
2. "Hardware" resets will clear all bits (GAP,  
WGATE and D0-D3) to "0", i.e all  
conventional mode.  
Perpendicular  
recording  
drives. This  
68  
Table 30 - Effects of WGATE and GAP Bits  
PORTION OF  
GAP 2  
LENGTH OF  
WRITTEN BY  
GAP2 FORMAT WRITE DATA  
WGATE GAP  
MODE  
FIELD  
OPERATION  
0
0
0
1
Conventional  
Perpendicular  
(500 Kbps)  
Reserved  
(Conventional)  
Perpendicular  
(1 Mbps)  
22 Bytes  
22 Bytes  
0 Bytes  
19 Bytes  
1
1
0
1
22 Bytes  
41 Bytes  
0 Bytes  
38 Bytes  
LOCK  
ENHANCED DUMPREG  
In order to protect systems with long DMA  
latencies against older application software that  
can disable the FIFO, the LOCK Command has  
been added. This command should only be  
used by the FDC routines, and application  
software should refrain from using it. If an  
application calls for the FIFO to be disabled  
then the CONFIGURE command should be  
used.  
The DUMPREG command is designed to  
support system run-time diagnostics and  
application software development and debug.  
To accommodate the LOCK command and the  
enhanced PERPENDICULAR MODE command  
the eighth byte of the DUMPREG command has  
been modified to contain the additional data  
from these two commands.  
COMPATIBILITY  
The LOCK command defines whether the  
EFIFO, FIFOTHR, and PRETRK parameters of  
the CONFIGURE command can be RESET by  
the DOR and DSR registers. When the LOCK  
bit is set to logic "1" all subsequent "software  
RESETS by the DOR and DSR registers will not  
change the previously set parameters to their  
default values. All "hardware" RESET from the  
RESET pin will set the LOCK bit to logic "0" and  
return the EFIFO, FIFOTHR, and PRETRK to  
their default values. A status byte is returned  
immediately after issuing a a LOCK command.  
This byte reflects the value of the LOCK bit set  
by the command byte.  
The FDC37C93xAPM was designed with  
software compatibility in mind. It is a fully  
backwards-compatible solution with the older  
generation 765A/B disk controllers. The FDC  
also implements on-board registers for  
compatibility with the PS/2, as well as PC/AT  
and PC/XT, floppy disk controller subsystems.  
After a hardware reset of the FDC, all registers,  
functions and enhancements default to a PC/AT,  
PS/2 or PS/2 Model 30 compatible operating  
mode, depending on how the IDENT and MFM  
bits are configured by the system BIOS.  
69  
SERIAL PORT (UART)  
The FDC37C93xAPM incorporates two full  
function UARTs. They are compatible with the  
NS16450, the 16450 ACE registers and the  
by programming OUT2 of that UART to a logic  
"1". OUT2 being a logic "0" disables that  
UART's interrupt.  
The second UART also  
NS16550A.  
parallel conversion on received characters and  
parallel-to-serial conversion on transmit  
The UARTS perform serial-to-  
supports IrDA, HP-SIR and ASK-IR infrared  
modes of operation.  
characters. The data rates are independently  
programmable from 460.8K baud down to 50  
baud. The character options are programmable  
for 1 start; 1, 1.5 or 2 stop bits; even, odd, sticky  
or no parity; and prioritized interrupts. The  
UARTs each contain a programmable baud rate  
generator that is capable of dividing the input  
clock or crystal by a number from 1 to 65535.  
The UARTs are also capable of supporting the  
MIDI data rate. Refer to the Configuration  
Registers for information on disabling, power  
down and changing the base address of the  
UARTs. The interrupt from a UART is enabled  
Note: The UARTs may be configured to share  
an interrupt. Refer to the Configuration section  
for more information.  
REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
Addressing of the accessible registers of the  
Serial Port is shown below.  
The base  
addresses of the serial ports are defined by the  
configuration registers (see Configuration  
section). The Serial Port registers are located at  
sequentially increasing addresses above these  
base addresses. The FDC37C93xAPM contains  
two serial ports, each of which contain a register  
set as described below.  
Table 31 - Addressing the Serial Port  
DLAB*  
A2  
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
A1  
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
A0  
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
REGISTER NAME  
Receive Buffer (read)  
0
0
Transmit Buffer (write)  
0
Interrupt Enable (read/write)  
Interrupt Identification (read)  
FIFO Control (write)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
Line Control (read/write)  
Modem Control (read/write)  
Line Status (read/write)  
Modem Status (read/write)  
Scratchpad (read/write)  
Divisor LSB (read/write)  
Divisor MSB (read/write)  
1
*Note: DLAB is Bit 7 of the Line Control Register  
70  
The following section describes the operation of  
the registers.  
BIT 0  
This bit enables the Received Data Available  
Interrupt (and timeout interrupts in the FIFO  
mode) when set to logic "1".  
RECEIVE BUFFER REGISTER (RB)  
Address Offset = 0H, DLAB = 0, READ ONLY  
BIT 1  
This register holds the received incoming data  
byte. Bit 0 is the least significant bit, which is  
transmitted and received first. Received data is  
double buffered; this uses an additional shift  
register to receive the serial data stream and  
convert it to a parallel 8 bit word which is  
transferred to the Receive Buffer register. The  
shift register is not accessible.  
This bit enables the Transmitter Holding  
Register Empty Interrupt when set to logic "1".  
BIT 2  
This bit enables the Received Line Status  
Interrupt when set to logic "1". The error  
sources causing the interrupt are Overrun,  
Parity, Framing and Break. The Line Status  
Register must be read to determine the source.  
TRANSMIT BUFFER REGISTER (TB)  
Address Offset = 0H, DLAB = 0, WRITE ONLY  
BIT 3  
This bit enables the MODEM Status Interrupt  
when set to logic "1". This is caused when one  
of the Modem Status Register bits changes  
state.  
This register contains the data byte to be  
transmitted.  
The transmit buffer is double  
buffered, utilizing an additional shift register (not  
accessible) to convert the 8 bit data word to a  
serial format. This shift register is loaded from  
the Transmit Buffer when the transmission of  
the previous byte is complete.  
BIT 4 - 7  
These bits are always logic "0".  
FIFO CONTROL REGISTER (FCR)  
Address Offset = 2H, DLAB = X, WRITE  
INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER (IER)  
Address Offset = 1H, DLAB = 0, READ/WRITE  
This is a write only register at the same location  
as the IIR. This register is used to enable and  
clear the FIFOs, set the RCVR FIFO trigger  
level. Note: DMA is not supported.  
The lower four bits of this register control the  
enables of the five interrupt sources of the Serial  
Port interrupt. It is possible to totally disable the  
interrupt system by resetting bits 0 through 3 of  
this register. Similarly, setting the appropriate  
bits of this register to a high, selected interrupts  
can be enabled. Disabling the interrupt system  
inhibits the Interrupt Identification Register and  
disables any Serial Port interrupt out of the  
FDC37C93xAPM. All other system functions  
operate in their normal manner, including the  
Line Status and MODEM Status Registers. The  
contents of the Interrupt Enable Register are  
described below.  
BIT 0  
Setting this bit to a logic "1" enables both the  
XMIT and RCVR FIFOs. Clearing this bit to a  
logic "0" disables both the XMIT and RCVR  
FIFOs and clears all bytes from both FIFOs.  
When changing from FIFO Mode to non-FIFO  
(16450) mode, data is automatically cleared  
from the FIFOs. This bit must be a 1 when  
other bits in this register are written to or they  
will not be properly programmed.  
71  
1. Receiver Line Status (highest priority)  
2. Received Data Ready  
3. Transmitter Holding Register Empty  
4. MODEM Status (lowest priority)  
BIT 1  
Setting this bit to a logic "1" clears all bytes in  
the RCVR FIFO and resets its counter logic to 0.  
The shift register is not cleared. This bit is self-  
clearing.  
Information indicating that a prioritized interrupt  
is pending and the source of that interrupt is  
stored in the Interrupt Identification Register  
(refer to Interrupt Control Table). When the CPU  
accesses the IIR, the Serial Port freezes all  
interrupts and indicates the highest priority  
pending interrupt to the CPU. During this CPU  
access, even if the Serial Port records new  
interrupts, the current indication does not  
change until access is completed. The contents  
of the IIR are described below.  
BIT 2  
Setting this bit to a logic "1" clears all bytes in  
the XMIT FIFO and resets its counter logic to 0.  
The shift register is not cleared. This bit is self-  
clearing.  
BIT 3  
Writting to this bit has no effect on the operation  
of the UART. The RXRDY and TXRDY pins are  
not available on this chip.  
BIT 0  
BIT 4 and 5  
This bit can be used in either a hardwired  
prioritized or polled environment to indicate  
whether an interrupt is pending. When bit 0 is a  
logic "0", an interrupt is pending and the  
contents of the IIR may be used as a pointer to  
the appropriate internal service routine. When  
bit 0 is a logic "1", no interrupt is pending.  
Reserved  
BIT 6 and 7  
These bits are used to set the trigger level for  
the RCVR FIFO interrupt.  
INTERRUPT IDENTIFICATION REGISTER  
(IIR)  
Address Offset = 2H, DLAB = X, READ  
BIT 1 and 2  
These two bits of the IIR are used to identify the  
highest priority interrupt pending as indicated by  
the Interrupt Control Table.  
RCVR FIFO  
Bit 6 TRIGGER LEVEL (BYTES)  
Bit 7  
0
BIT 3  
0
1
0
1
1
In non-FIFO mode, this bit is a logic "0". In  
FIFO mode this bit is set along with bit 2 when a  
timeout interrupt is pending.  
0
1
1
4
8
14  
BIT 4 and 5  
These bits of the IIR are always logic "0".  
By accessing this register, the host CPU can  
determine the highest priority interrupt and its  
source. Four levels of priority interrupt exist.  
They are in descending order of priority:  
BIT 6 and 7  
These two bits are set when the FIFO  
CONTROL Register bit 0 equals 1.  
72  
Table 32 - Interrupt Control Table  
FIFO  
INTERRUPT  
MODE IDENTIFICATION  
ONLY  
REGISTER  
INTERRUPT SET AND RESET FUNCTIONS  
BIT  
3
BIT  
BIT  
1
BIT PRIORITY  
INTERRUPT  
TYPE  
INTERRUPT  
SOURCE  
INTERRUPT  
RESET CONTROL  
2
0
1
0
1
0
LEVEL  
0
0
0
1
-
None  
None  
-
Highest  
Receiver Line  
Status  
Overrun Error,  
Parity Error,  
Reading the Line  
Status Register  
Framing Error or  
Break Interrupt  
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Second  
Second  
Received Data  
Available  
Receiver Data  
Available  
Read Receiver  
Buffer or the FIFO  
drops below the  
trigger level.  
Character  
Timeout  
Indication  
No Characters  
Have Been  
Removed From  
or Input to the  
RCVR FIFO  
Reading the  
Receiver Buffer  
Register  
during the last 4  
Char times and  
there is at least 1  
char in it during  
this time  
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Third  
Transmitter  
Transmitter  
Reading the IIR  
Holding Register Holding Register Register (if Source  
Empty  
Empty  
of Interrupt) or  
Writing the  
Transmitter Holding  
Register  
Fourth  
MODEM Status  
Clear to Send or Reading the  
Data Set Ready MODEM Status  
or Ring Indicator Register  
or Data Carrier  
Detect  
73  
LINE CONTROL REGISTER (LCR)  
BIT 3  
Parity Enable bit. When bit 3 is a logic "1", a  
parity bit is generated (transmit data) or  
checked (receive data) between the last data  
word bit and the first stop bit of the serial data.  
(The parity bit is used to generate an even or  
odd number of 1s when the data word bits and  
the parity bit are summed).  
Address Offset = 3H, DLAB = 0, READ/WRITE  
This register contains the format information of  
the serial line. The bit definitions are:  
BIT 0 and 1  
These two bits specify the number of bits in  
each transmitted or received serial character.  
The encoding of bits 0 and 1 is as follows:  
BIT 4  
Even Parity Select bit. When bit 3 is a logic "1"  
and bit 4 is a logic "0", an odd number of logic  
"1"'s is transmitted or checked in the data word  
bits and the parity bit. When bit 3 is a logic "1"  
and bit 4 is a logic "1" an even number of bits is  
transmitted and checked.  
BIT 1 BIT 0 WORD LENGTH  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
5 Bits  
6 Bits  
7 Bits  
8 Bits  
BIT 5  
Stick Parity bit. When bit 3 is a logic "1" and bit  
5 is a logic "1", the parity bit is transmitted and  
then detected by the receiver in the opposite  
state indicated by bit 4.  
The Start, Stop and Parity bits are not included  
in the word length.  
BIT 6  
BIT 2  
Set Break Control bit. When bit 6 is a logic "1",  
the transmit data output (TXD) is forced to the  
Spacing or logic "0" state and remains there  
(until reset by a low level bit 6) regardless of  
other transmitter activity. This feature enables  
This bit specifies the number of stop bits in each  
transmitted or received serial character. The  
following table summarizes the information.  
NUMBER OF  
the Serial Port to alert  
communications system.  
a terminal in a  
BIT 2 WORD LENGTH  
STOP BITS  
0
1
1
1
1
--  
1
1.5  
2
BIT 7  
5 bits  
6 bits  
7 bits  
8 bits  
Divisor Latch Access bit (DLAB). It must be set  
high (logic "1") to access the Divisor Latches of  
the Baud Rate Generator during read or write  
operations. It must be set low (logic "0") to  
access the Receiver Buffer Register, the  
Transmitter Holding Register, or the Interrupt  
Enable Register.  
2
2
Note: The receiver will ignore all stop bits  
beyond the first, regardless of the number used  
in transmitting.  
MODEM CONTROL REGISTER (MCR)  
Address Offset  
READ/WRITE  
=
4H, DLAB  
=
X,  
74  
This 8 bit register controls the interface with the  
MODEM or data set (or device emulating a  
MODEM). The contents of the MODEM control  
register are described below.  
5. The four MODEM Control outputs (nDTR,  
nRTS, OUT1 and OUT2) are internally  
connected to the four MODEM Control  
inputs (nDSR, nCTS, RI, DCD).  
6. The Modem Control output pins are forced  
inactive high.  
BIT 0  
7. Data that is transmitted is immediately  
received.  
This bit controls the Data Terminal Ready  
(nDTR) output. When bit 0 is set to a logic "1",  
the nDTR output is forced to a logic "0". When  
bit 0 is a logic "0", the nDTR output is forced to  
a logic "1".  
This feature allows the processor to verify the  
transmit and receive data paths of the Serial  
Port. In the diagnostic mode, the receiver and  
the transmitter interrupts are fully operational.  
The MODEM Control Interrupts are also  
operational but the interrupts' sources are now  
the lower four bits of the MODEM Control  
Register instead of the MODEM Control inputs.  
The interrupts are still controlled by the Interrupt  
Enable Register.  
BIT 1  
This bit controls the Request To Send (nRTS)  
output. Bit 1 affects the nRTS output in a  
manner identical to that described above for bit  
0.  
BIT 2  
This bit controls the Output 1 (OUT1) bit. This  
bit does not have an output pin and can only be  
read or written by the CPU.  
BIT 5 - 7  
These bits are permanently set to logic “0”.  
LINE STATUS REGISTER (LSR)  
BIT 3  
Address Offset  
READ/WRITE  
=
5H, DLAB  
=
X,  
Output 2 (OUT2). This bit is used to enable an  
UART interrupt. When OUT2 is a logic "0", the  
serial port interrupt output is forced to a high  
impedance state - disabled. When OUT2 is a  
logic "1", the serial port interrupt outputs are  
enabled.  
BIT 0  
Data Ready (DR). It is set to a logic "1"  
whenever a complete incoming character has  
been received and transferred into the Receiver  
Buffer Register or the FIFO. Bit 0 is reset to a  
logic "0" by reading all of the data in the Receive  
Buffer Register or the FIFO.  
BIT 4  
This bit provides the loopback feature for  
diagnostic testing of the Serial Port. When bit 4  
is set to logic "1", the following occur:  
BIT 1  
1. The TXD is set to the Marking State (logic  
"1").  
Overrun Error (OE). Bit 1 indicates that data in  
the Receiver Buffer Register was not read before  
the next character was transferred into the  
register, thereby destroying the previous  
character. In FIFO mode, an overrunn error will  
occur only when the FIFO is full and the next  
character has been completely received in the  
shift register, the character in the shift register is  
overwritten but not transferred to the FIFO. The  
OE indicator is set to a logic "1" immediately  
2. The receiver Serial Input (RXD) is  
disconnected.  
3. The output of the Transmitter Shift  
Register is "looped back" into the Receiver  
Shift Register input.  
4. All MODEM Control inputs (nCTS, nDSR,  
nRI and nDCD) are disconnected.  
75  
upon detection of an overrun condition, and  
reset whenever the Line Status Register is read.  
Restarting after a break is received, requires the  
serial data (RXD) to be logic "1" for at least 1/2  
bit time.  
BIT 2  
Note: Bits 1 through 4 are the error conditions  
that produce a Receiver Line Status Interrupt  
whenever any of the corresponding conditions  
are detected and the interrupt is enabled.  
Parity Error (PE). Bit 2 indicates that the  
received data character does not have the  
correct even or odd parity, as selected by the  
even parity select bit. The PE is set to a logic  
"1" upon detection of a parity error and is  
reset to a logic "0" whenever the Line Status  
Register is read. In the FIFO mode this error is  
associated with the particular character in the  
FIFO it applies to. This error is indicated when  
the associated character is at the top of the  
FIFO.  
BIT 5  
Transmitter Holding Register Empty (THRE). Bit  
5 indicates that the Serial Port is ready to accept  
a new character for transmission. In addition,  
this bit causes the Serial Port to issue an  
interrupt when the Transmitter Holding Register  
interrupt enable is set high. The THRE bit is set  
to a logic "1" when a character is transferred  
from the Transmitter Holding Register into the  
Transmitter Shift Register. The bit is reset to  
logic "0" whenever the CPU loads the  
Transmitter Holding Register. In the FIFO mode  
this bit is set when the XMIT FIFO is empty, it is  
cleared when at least one byte is written to the  
XMIT FIFO. Bit 5 is a read- only bit.  
BIT 3  
Framing Error (FE). Bit 3 indicates that the  
received character did not have a valid stop bit.  
Bit 3 is set to a logic "1" whenever the stop bit  
following the last data bit or parity bit is detected  
as a zero bit (Spacing level). The FE is reset to  
a logic "0" whenever the Line Status Register is  
read. In the FIFO mode this error is associated  
with the particular character in the FIFO it  
applies to. This error is indicated when the  
associated character is at the top of the FIFO.  
The Serial Port will try to resynchronize after a  
framing error. To do this, it assumes that the  
framing error was due to the next start bit, so it  
samples this 'start' bit twice and then takes in  
the 'data'.  
BIT 6  
Transmitter Empty (TEMT). Bit 6 is set to a  
logic "1" whenever the Transmitter Holding  
Register (THR) and Transmitter Shift Register  
(TSR) are both empty. It is reset to logic "0"  
whenever either the THR or TSR contains a data  
character. Bit 6 is a read only bit. In the FIFO  
mode this bit is set whenever the THR and TSR  
are both empty.  
BIT 4  
Break Interrupt (BI). Bit 4 is set to a logic "1"  
whenever the received data input is held in the  
Spacing state (logic "0") for longer than a full  
word transmission time (that is, the total time of  
the start bit + data bits + parity bits + stop bits).  
The BI is reset after the CPU reads the contents  
of the Line Status Register. In the FIFO mode  
this error is associated with the particular  
character in the FIFO it applies to. This error is  
indicated when the associated character is at  
the top of the FIFO. When break occurs only  
one zero character is loaded into the FIFO.  
BIT 7  
This bit is permanently set to logic "0" in the 450  
mode. In the FIFO mode, this bit is set to a  
logic "1" when there is at least one parity error,  
framing error or break indication in the FIFO.  
This bit is cleared when the LSR is read if there  
are no subsequent errors in the FIFO.  
76  
MODEM STATUS REGISTER (MSR)  
BIT 5  
This bit is the complement of the Data Set  
Ready (nDSR) input. If bit 4 of the MCR is set  
to logic "1", this bit is equivalent to DTR in the  
MCR.  
Address Offset  
READ/WRITE  
=
6H, DLAB  
=
X,  
This 8 bit register provides the current state of  
the control lines from the MODEM (or peripheral  
BIT 6  
device).  
In addition to this current state  
This bit is the complement of the Ring Indicator  
(nRI) input. If bit 4 of the MCR is set to logic  
"1", this bit is equivalent to OUT1 in the MCR.  
information, four bits of the MODEM Status  
Register (MSR) provide change information.  
These bits are set to logic "1" whenever a  
control input from the MODEM changes state.  
They are reset to logic "0" whenever the  
MODEM Status Register is read.  
BIT 7  
This bit is the complement of the Data Carrier  
Detect (nDCD) input. If bit 4 of the MCR is set  
to logic "1", this bit is equivalent to OUT2 in the  
MCR.  
BIT 0  
Delta Clear To Send (DCTS). Bit 0 indicates  
that the nCTS input to the chip has changed  
state since the last time the MSR was read.  
SCRATCHPAD REGISTER (SCR)  
Address Offset =7H, DLAB =X, READ/WRITE  
BIT 1  
Delta Data Set Ready (DDSR). Bit 1 indicates  
that the nDSR input has changed state since the  
last time the MSR was read.  
This 8 bit read/write register has no effect on the  
operation of the Serial Port. It is intended as a  
scratchpad register to be used by the  
programmer to hold data temporarily.  
BIT 2  
Trailing Edge of Ring Indicator (TERI). Bit 2  
indicates that the nRI input has changed from  
logic "0" to logic "1".  
PROGRAMMABLE BAUD RATE GENERATOR  
(AND DIVISOR LATCHES DLH, DLL)  
The Serial Port contains a programmable Baud  
Rate Generator that is capable of taking any  
clock input (DC to 3 MHz) and dividing it by any  
divisor from 1 to 65535. This output frequency  
of the Baud Rate Generator is 16x the Baud  
rate. Two 8 bit latches store the divisor in 16 bit  
binary format. These Divisor Latches must be  
loaded during initialization in order to insure  
desired operation of the Baud Rate Generator.  
Upon loading either of the Divisor Latches, a 16  
bit Baud counter is immediately loaded. This  
prevents long counts on initial load. If a 0 is  
loaded into the BRG registers the output divides  
the clock by the number 3. If a 1 is loaded the  
output is the inverse of the input oscillator. If a  
two is loaded the output is a divide by 2 signal  
with a 50% duty cycle. If a 3 or greater is  
loaded the output is low for 2 bits and high for  
BIT 3  
Delta Data Carrier Detect (DDCD).  
indicates that the nDCD input to the chip has  
changed state.  
Bit 3  
NOTE: Whenever bit 0, 1, 2, or 3 is set to a  
logic "1",  
generated.  
a
MODEM Status Interrupt is  
BIT 4  
This bit is the complement of the Clear To Send  
(nCTS) input. If bit 4 of the MCR is set to logic  
"1", this bit is equivalent to nRTS in the MCR.  
77  
the remainder of the count. The input clock to  
the BRG is a 1.8462 MHz clock.  
was longer than four continuous character  
times ago. (If two stop bits are  
programmed, the second one is included in  
this time delay.)  
The most recent CPU read of the FIFO was  
longer than 4 continuous character times  
ago.  
Table 33 shows the baud rates possible with a  
1.8462 MHz crystal.  
-
Effect Of The Reset on Register File  
This will cause a maximum character received  
to interrupt issued delay of 160 msec at  
300BAUD with a 12 bit character.  
The Reset Function Table (Table 34) details the  
effect of the Reset input on each of the registers  
of the Serial Port.  
B. Character times are calculated by using the  
RCLK input for a clock signal (this makes  
the delay proportional to the baud rate).  
FIFO INTERRUPT MODE OPERATION  
When the RCVR FIFO and receiver interrupts  
are enabled (FCR bit 0 = "1", IER bit 0 = "1"),  
RCVR interrupts occur as follows:  
C. When a timeout interrupt has occurred it is  
cleared and the timer reset when the CPU  
reads one character from the RCVR FIFO.  
A. The receive data available interrupt will be  
issued when the FIFO has reached its  
programmed trigger level; it is cleared as  
soon as the FIFO drops below its  
programmed trigger level.  
D. When a timeout interrupt has not occurred  
the timeout timer is reset after a new  
character is received or after the CPU reads  
the RCVR FIFO.  
B. The IIR receive data available indication also  
occurs when the FIFO trigger level is  
reached. It is cleared when the FIFO drops  
below the trigger level.  
When the XMIT FIFO and transmitter interrupts  
are enabled (FCR bit 0 = "1", IER bit 1 = "1"),  
XMIT interrupts occur as follows:  
A. The transmitter holding register interrupt  
(02H) occurs when the XMIT FIFO is empty;  
it is cleared as soon as the transmitter  
holding register is written to (1 of 16  
characters may be written to the XMIT FIFO  
while servicing this interrupt) or the IIR is  
read.  
C. The receiver line status interrupt (IIR=06H),  
has higher priority than the received data  
available (IIR=04H) interrupt.  
D. The data ready bit (LSR bit 0) is set as soon  
as a character is transferred from the shift  
register to the RCVR FIFO. It is reset when  
the FIFO is empty.  
B. The transmitter FIFO empty indications will  
be delayed 1 character time minus the last  
stop bit time whenever the following occurs:  
THRE=1 and there have not been at least  
two bytes at the same time in the transmitter  
FIFO since the last THRE=1. The transmitter  
interrupt after changing FCR0 will be  
immediate, if it is enabled.  
When RCVR FIFO and receiver interrupts are  
enabled, RCVR FIFO timeout interrupts occur  
as follows:  
A. A FIFO timeout interrupt occurs if all the  
following conditions exist:  
-
-
at least one character is in the FIFO  
The most recent serial character received  
78  
Character timeout and RCVR FIFO trigger level  
interrupts have the same priority as the current  
received data available interrupt; XMIT FIFO  
empty has the same priority as the current  
transmitter holding register empty interrupt.  
-
-
Bit 0=1 as long as there is one byte in the  
RCVR FIFO.  
Bits 1 to 4 specify which error(s) have  
occurred. Character error status is handled  
the same way as when in the interrupt  
mode, the IIR is not affected since EIR bit  
2=0.  
FIFO POLLED MODE OPERATION  
-
-
-
Bit 5 indicates when the XMIT FIFO is  
empty.  
Bit 6 indicates that both the XMIT FIFO and  
shift register are empty.  
Bit 7 indicates whether there are any errors  
in the RCVR FIFO.  
With FCR bit 0 = "1" resetting IER bits 0, 1, 2 or  
3 or all to “0” puts the UART in the FIFO Polled  
Mode of operation. Since the RCVR and  
XMITTER are controlled separately, either one  
or both can be in the polled mode of operation.  
There is no trigger level reached or timeout  
condition indicated in the FIFO Polled Mode,  
however, the RCVR and XMIT FIFOs are still  
fully capable of holding characters.  
In this mode, the user's program will check  
RCVR and XMITTER status via the LSR. LSR  
definitions for the FIFO Polled Mode are as  
follows:  
79  
Table 33 - Baud Rates Using 1.8462 MHz Clock for <= 38.4K; Using 1.8432 MHz Clock  
for 115.2k ; Using 3.6864 MHz Clock for 230.4k; Using 7.3728 MHz Clock for 460.8k  
DESIRED  
DIVISOR USED TO  
PERCENT ERROR DIFFERENCE  
CRxx:  
BAUD RATE  
GENERATE 16X CLOCK  
BETWEEN DESIRED AND ACTUAL*  
BIT 7 OR 6  
50  
75  
2304  
1536  
1047  
857  
768  
384  
192  
96  
0.001  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
-
110  
-
134.5  
150  
0.004  
-
300  
-
600  
-
1200  
1800  
2000  
2400  
3600  
4800  
7200  
9600  
19200  
38400  
57600  
115200  
230400  
460800  
-
64  
-
58  
0.005  
48  
-
32  
-
-
24  
16  
-
12  
-
6
-
3
0.030  
0.16  
0.16  
0.16  
0.16  
2
1
32770  
32769  
1
*Note: The percentage error for all baud rates, except where indicated otherwise, is 0.2%.  
80  
Table 34 - Reset Function Table  
RESET CONTROL  
REGISTER/SIGNAL  
Interrupt Enable Register  
Interrupt Identification Reg.  
FIFO Control  
RESET STATE  
RESET  
All bits low  
RESET  
Bit 0 is high; Bits 1 - 7 low  
RESET  
All bits low  
Line Control Reg.  
RESET  
All bits low  
MODEM Control Reg.  
Line Status Reg.  
RESET  
All bits low  
RESET  
All bits low except 5, 6 high  
MODEM Status Reg.  
TXD1, TXD2  
RESET  
Bits 0 - 3 low; Bits 4 - 7 input  
RESET  
High  
INTRPT (RCVR errs)  
RESET/Read LSR  
Low  
INTRPT (RCVR Data Ready) RESET/Read RBR  
Low  
INTRPT (THRE)  
OUT2B  
RESET/ReadIIR/Write THR  
Low  
RESET  
RESET  
RESET  
RESET  
High  
RTSB  
High  
DTRB  
High  
OUT1B  
High  
RCVR FIFO  
RESET/  
All Bits Low  
FCR1*FCR0/_FCR0  
XMIT FIFO  
RESET/  
All Bits Low  
FCR1*FCR0/_FCR0  
81  
Table 35 - Register Summary for an Individual UART Channel  
REGISTER  
REGISTER  
ADDRESS*  
REGISTER NAME  
SYMBOL  
BIT 0  
BIT 1  
ADDR = 0  
DLAB = 0  
Receive Buffer Register (Read Only)  
RBR  
Data Bit 0  
(Note 1)  
Data Bit 1  
ADDR = 0  
DLAB = 0  
Transmitter Holding Register (Write  
Only)  
THR  
IER  
Data Bit 0  
Data Bit 1  
ADDR = 1  
DLAB = 0  
Interrupt Enable Register  
Enable  
Received  
Data  
Available  
Interrupt  
(ERDAI)  
Enable  
Transmitter  
Holding Register  
Empty Interrupt  
(ETHREI)  
ADDR = 2  
Interrupt Ident. Register (Read Only)  
IIR  
"0" if  
Interrupt ID Bit  
Interrupt  
Pending  
ADDR = 2  
ADDR = 3  
FIFO Control Register (Write Only)  
Line Control Register  
FCR  
LCR  
FIFO  
Enable  
RCVR FIFO  
Reset  
Word  
Length  
Select Bit 0  
(WLS0)  
Word Length  
Select Bit 1  
(WLS1)  
ADDR = 4  
MODEM Control Register  
MCR  
Data  
Request to Send  
(RTS)  
Terminal  
Ready  
(DTR)  
Data Ready  
(DR)  
ADDR = 5  
ADDR = 6  
Line Status Register  
LSR  
Overrun Error  
(OE)  
Delta Clear  
to Send  
(DCTS)  
MODEM Status Register  
MSR  
Delta Data Set  
Ready (DDSR)  
ADDR = 7  
Scratch Register (Note 4)  
Divisor Latch (LS)  
SCR  
DDL  
Bit 0  
Bit 0  
Bit 1  
Bit 1  
ADDR = 0  
DLAB = 1  
ADDR = 1  
DLAB = 1  
Divisor Latch (MS)  
DLM  
Bit 8  
Bit 9  
*DLAB is Bit 7 of the Line Control Register (ADDR = 3).  
Note 1: Bit 0 is the least significant bit. It is the first bit serially transmitted or received.  
Note 2: When operating in the XT mode, this bit will be set any time that the transmitter shift  
register is empty.  
82  
Table 35 - Register Summary for an Individual UART Channel (continued)  
BIT 2  
Data Bit 2  
Data Bit 2  
BIT 3  
Data Bit 3  
Data Bit 3  
BIT 4  
Data Bit 4  
Data Bit 4  
0
BIT 5  
Data Bit 5  
Data Bit 5  
0
BIT 6  
Data Bit 6  
Data Bit 6  
0
BIT 7  
Data Bit 7  
Data Bit 7  
0
Enable  
Receiver Line  
Status  
Enable  
MODEM  
Status  
Interrupt  
(ELSI)  
Interrupt  
(EMSI)  
FIFOs  
Enabled  
(Note 5)  
Interrupt ID  
Bit  
Interrupt ID  
Bit (Note 5)  
0
0
FIFOs  
Enabled  
(Note 5)  
XMIT FIFO  
Reset  
DMA Mode  
Select  
(Note 6)  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Stick Parity  
RCVR Trigger RCVR Trigger  
LSB  
MSB  
Divisor Latch  
Access Bit  
(DLAB)  
Number of  
Stop Bits  
(STB)  
Parity Enable Even Parity  
(PEN)  
Set Break  
Select (EPS)  
OUT1  
OUT2  
Loop  
0
0
0
(Note 3)  
(Note 3)  
Parity Error  
(PE)  
Framing Error Break  
(FE)  
Transmitter  
Interrupt (BI) Holding  
Transmitter  
Empty  
(TEMT)  
Error in  
RCVR FIFO  
(Note 5)  
Register  
(THRE)  
(Note 2)  
Trailing Edge Delta Data  
Clear to Send Data Set  
Ring Indicator Data Carrier  
Ring Indicator Carrier Detect (CTS)  
Ready (DSR) (RI)  
Detect (DCD)  
(TERI)  
(DDCD)  
Bit 2  
Bit 3  
Bit 4  
Bit 4  
Bit 12  
Bit 5  
Bit 5  
Bit 13  
Bit 6  
Bit 6  
Bit 14  
Bit 7  
Bit 7  
Bit 15  
Bit 2  
Bit 3  
Bit 10  
Bit 11  
Note 3: This bit no longer has a pin associated with it.  
Note 4: When operating in the XT mode, this register is not available.  
Note 5: These bits are always zero in the non-FIFO mode.  
Note 6: Writing a one to this bit has no effect. DMA modes are not supported in this chip.  
83  
NOTES ON SERIAL PORT OPERATION  
FIFO MODE OPERATION:  
interrupt delay will remain active until at  
least two bytes have the Tx FIFO empties  
after this condition, the Tx been loaded into  
the FIFO, concurrently. When interrupt will  
be activated without a one character delay.  
GENERAL  
The RCVR FIFO will hold up to 16 bytes  
regardless of which trigger level is selected.  
Rx support functions and operation are quite  
different from those described for the  
transmitter. The Rx FIFO receives data until the  
number of bytes in the FIFO equals the selected  
TX AND RX FIFO OPERATION  
interrupt trigger level.  
At that time if Rx  
The Tx portion of the UART transmits data  
through TXD as soon as the CPU loads a byte  
into the Tx FIFO. The UART will prevent  
loads to the Tx FIFO if it currently holds 16  
characters. Loading to the Tx FIFO will again  
be enabled as soon as the next character is  
transferred to the Tx shift register. These  
capabilities account for the largely autonomous  
operation of the Tx.  
interrupts are enabled, the UART will issue an  
interrupt to the CPU. The Rx FIFO will continue  
to store bytes until it holds 16 of them. It will  
not accept any more data when it is full. Any  
more data entering the Rx shift register will set  
the Overrun Error flag. Normally, the FIFO  
depth and the programmable trigger levels will  
give the CPU ample time to empty the Rx FIFO  
before an overrun occurs.  
The UART starts the above operations typically  
with a Tx interrupt. The chip issues a Tx  
interrupt whenever the Tx FIFO is empty and the  
Tx interrupt is enabled, except in the following  
instance. Assume that the Tx FIFO is empty  
and the CPU starts to load it. When the first  
byte enters the FIFO the Tx FIFO empty  
interrupt will transition from active to inactive.  
Depending on the execution speed of the service  
routine software, the UART may be able to  
transfer this byte from the FIFO to the shift  
register before the CPU loads another byte. If  
this happens, the Tx FIFO will be empty again  
and typically the UART's interrupt line would  
transition to the active state. This could cause a  
system with an interrupt control unit to record a  
Tx FIFO empty condition, even though the CPU  
is currently servicing that interrupt. Therefore,  
after the first byte has been loaded into the  
FIFO the UART will wait one serial character  
transmission time before issuing a new Tx  
FIFO empty interrupt. This one character Tx  
One side-effect of having a Rx FIFO is that the  
selected interrupt trigger level may be above the  
data level in the FIFO. This could occur when  
data at the end of the block contains fewer bytes  
than the trigger level. No interrupt would be  
issued to the CPU and the data would remain in  
the UART. To prevent the software from  
having to check for this situation the chip  
incorporates a timeout interrupt.  
The timeout interrupt is activated when there is  
a least one byte in the Rx FIFO, and neither the  
CPU nor the Rx shift register has accessed the  
Rx FIFO within 4 character times of the last  
byte. The timeout interrupt is cleared or reset  
when the CPU reads the Rx FIFO or another  
character enters it.  
These FIFO-related features allow optimization  
of CPU/UART transactions and are especially  
useful given the higer baud rate capability (256  
kbaud).  
84  
INFRARED INTERFACE  
The infrared interface provides  
wireless communications port using infrared as  
transmission medium. Two IR  
implementations have been provided for the  
second UART in this chip (logical device 5),  
IrDA and Amplitude Shift Keyed IR. The IR  
transmission can use the standard UART2 TX  
and RX pins or optional IRTX2 and IRRX2 pins.  
These can be selected through the configuration  
registers.  
a
two-way  
500 kHz waveform for the duration of the serial  
bit time. A “1” is signaled by sending no  
transmission the bit time. Please refer to the  
AC timing for the parameters of the ASK-IR  
waveform.  
a
If the Half Duplex option is chosen, there is a  
time-out when the direction of the transmission  
is changed. This time-out starts at the last bit  
transferred during a transmission and blocks the  
receiver input until the timeout expires. If the  
transmit buffer is loaded with more data before  
the time-out expires, the timer is restarted after  
the new byte is transmitted. If data is loaded  
into the transmit buffer while a character is  
being received, the transmission will not start  
until the time-out expires after the last receive  
bit has been received. If the start bit of another  
character is received during this time-out, the  
timer is restarted after the new character is  
received. The IR half duplex time-out is  
programmable via CRF2 in Logical Device 5.  
This register allows the time-out to be  
programmed to any value between 0 and  
10msec in 100usec increments.  
IrDA allows serial communication at baud rates  
up to 115K Baud. Each word is sent serially  
beginning with a “0” value start bit. A “0” is  
signaled by sending a single IR pulse at the  
beginning of the serial bit time. A “1” is signaled  
by sending no IR pulse during the bit time.  
Please refer to the AC timing for the parameters  
of these pulses and the IrDA waveform.  
The Amplitude Shift Keyed IR allows serial  
communication at baud rates up to 19.2K Baud.  
Each word is sent serially beginning with a “0”  
value start bit. A zero is signaled by sending a  
85  
PARALLEL PORT  
The parallel port also incorporates SMSC's  
The FDC37C93xAPM incorporates an IBM  
XT/AT compatible parallel port. This supports  
the optional PS/2 type bi-directional parallel port  
(SPP), the Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP) and  
the Extended Capabilities Port (ECP) parallel  
ChiProtect circuitry, which prevents possible  
damage to the parallel port due to printer power-  
up.  
The functionality of the parallel port is achieved  
through the use of eight addressable ports,  
with their associated registers and control  
gating. The control and data port are read/write  
by the CPU, the status port is read/write in the  
EPP mode. The address map of the parallel  
port is shown below:  
port modes.  
Refer to the Configuration  
Registers for information on disabling, power  
down, changing the base address of the parallel  
port, and selecting the mode of operation.  
The FDC37C93xAPM also provides a mode for  
support of the floppy disk controller on the  
parallel port.  
DATA PORT  
BASE ADDRESS + 00H  
BASE ADDRESS + 01H  
BASE ADDRESS + 02H  
BASE ADDRESS + 03H  
EPP DATA PORT 0  
EPP DATA PORT 1  
EPP DATA PORT 2  
EPP DATA PORT 3  
BASE ADDRESS + 04H  
BASE ADDRESS + 05H  
BASE ADDRESS + 06H  
BASE ADDRESS + 07H  
STATUS PORT  
CONTROL PORT  
EPP ADDR PORT  
The bit map of these registers is:  
D0  
PD0  
D1  
PD1  
0
D2  
PD2  
0
D3  
D4  
D5  
PD5  
PE  
D6  
D7  
Note  
DATA PORT  
PD3  
PD4  
SLCT  
PD6  
PD7  
1
1
STATUS  
PORT  
TMOUT  
nERR  
nACK nBUSY  
CONTROL  
PORT  
STROBE AUTOFD nINIT  
SLC  
PD3  
PD3  
PD3  
PD3  
PD3  
IRQE  
PD4  
PD4  
PD4  
PD4  
PD4  
PCD  
PD5  
PD5  
PD5  
PD5  
PD5  
0
0
1
EPP ADDR  
PORT  
PD0  
PD0  
PD0  
PD0  
PD0  
PD1  
PD1  
PD1  
PD1  
PD1  
PD2  
PD2  
PD2  
PD2  
PD2  
PD6  
PD6  
PD6  
PD6  
PD6  
AD7  
PD7  
PD7  
PD7  
PD7  
2,3  
2,3  
2,3  
2,3  
2,3  
EPP DATA  
PORT 0  
EPP DATA  
PORT 1  
EPP DATA  
PORT 2  
EPP DATA  
PORT 3  
Note 1: These registers are available in all modes.  
Note 2: These registers are only available in EPP mode.  
Note 3 : For EPP mode, IOCHRDY must be connected to the ISA bus.  
86  
Table 36 - Parallel Port Connector  
HOST  
CONNECTOR  
PIN NUMBER  
STANDARD  
nStrobe  
EPP  
ECP  
1
nWrite  
PData<0:7>  
Intr  
nStrobe  
2-9  
10  
11  
12  
PData<0:7>  
nAck  
PData<0:7>  
nAck  
Busy  
nWait  
Busy, PeriphAck(3)  
PE  
(NU)  
PError,  
nAckReverse(3)  
13  
14  
Select  
(NU)  
Select  
nAutofd  
nDatastb  
nAutoFd,  
HostAck(3)  
15  
16  
17  
nError  
nInit  
(NU)  
nFault(1)  
nPeriphRequest(3)  
(NU)  
nInit(1)  
nReverseRqst(3)  
nSelectin  
nAddrstrb  
nSelectIn(1,3)  
(1) = Compatible Mode  
(3) = High Speed Mode  
Note: For the cable interconnection required for ECP support and the Slave Connector pin numbers,  
refer to the IEEE 1284 Extended Capabilities Port Protocol and ISA Standard, Rev. 1.14,  
July 14, 1993. This document is available from Microsoft.  
87  
BIT 3 nERR - nERROR  
IBM XT/AT COMPATIBLE, BI-  
DIRECTIONAL AND EPP MODES  
The level on the nERROR input is read by the  
CPU as bit 3 of the Printer Status Register. A  
logic “0” means an error has been detected; a  
logic “1” means no error has been detected.  
DATA PORT  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 00H  
BIT 4 SLCT - PRINTER SELECTED STATUS  
The level on the SLCT input is read by the CPU  
as bit 4 of the Printer Status Register. A logic  
“1” means the printer is on line; a logic “0”  
means it is not selected.  
The Data Port is located at an offset of '00H'  
from the base address. The data register is  
cleared at initialization by RESET. During a  
WRITE operation, the Data Register latches the  
contents of the data bus with the rising edge of  
the nIOW input. The contents of this register  
are buffered (non inverting) and output onto the  
PD0-PD7 ports. During a READ operation in  
SPP mode, PD0-PD7 ports are buffered (not  
latched) and output to the host CPU.  
BIT 5 PE - PAPER END  
The level on the PE input is read by the CPU as  
bit 5 of the Printer Status Register. A logic “1”  
indicates a paper end; a logic “0” indicates the  
presence of paper.  
STATUS PORT  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 01H  
BIT 6 nACK - nACKNOWLEDGE  
The level on the nACK input is read by the CPU  
as bit 6 of the Printer Status Register. A logic  
“0” means that the printer has received a  
character and can now accept another. A logic  
“1” means that it is still processing the last  
character or has not received the data.  
The Status Port is located at an offset of '01H'  
from the base address. The contents of this  
register are latched for the duration of an nIOR  
read cycle. The bits of the Status Port are  
defined as follows:  
BIT 7 nBUSY - nBUSY  
BIT 0 TMOUT - TIME OUT  
The complement of the level on the BUSY input  
is read by the CPU as bit 7 of the Printer Status  
Register. A logic “0” in this bit means that the  
printer is busy and cannot accept a new  
character. A logic “1” means that it is ready to  
accept the next character.  
This bit is valid in EPP mode only and indicates  
that a 10 msec time out has occured on the EPP  
bus. A logic “0” means that no time out error  
has occured; a logic “1” means that a time out  
error has been detected. This bit is cleared by a  
RESET. Writing a “1” to this bit clears the time  
out status bit. On a write, this bit is self clearing  
and does not require a write of a “0”. Writing a  
“0” to this bit has no effect.  
CONTROL PORT  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 02H  
The Control Port is located at an offset of '02H'  
from the base address. The Control Register is  
initialized by the RESET input, bits 0 to 5 only  
being affected; bits 6 and 7 are hard wired low.  
BIT 1 and 2 - are not implemented as register  
bits, during a read of the Printer Status Register  
these bits are a low level.  
88  
BIT 0 STROBE - STROBE  
EPP ADDRESS PORT  
This bit is inverted and output onto the  
nSTROBE output.  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 03H  
The EPP Address Port is located at an offset of  
'03H' from the base address. The address  
register is cleared at initialization by RESET.  
During a WRITE operation, the contents of DB0-  
DB7 are buffered (non inverting) and output onto  
the PD0-PD7 ports, the leading edge of nIOW  
causes an EPP ADDRESS WRITE cycle to be  
performed, the trailing edge of IOW latches the  
data for the duration of the EPP write cycle.  
During a READ operation, PD0-PD7 ports are  
read, the leading edge of IOR causes an EPP  
ADDRESS READ cycle to be performed and the  
data output to the host CPU, the deassertion of  
ADDRSTB latches the PData for the duration of  
the IOR cycle. This register is only available in  
EPP mode.  
BIT 1 AUTOFD - AUTOFEED  
This bit is inverted and output onto the  
nAUTOFD output. A logic 1 causes the printer  
to generate a line feed after each line is printed.  
A logic “0” means no autofeed.  
BIT 2 nINIT - nINITIATE OUTPUT  
This bit is output onto the nINIT output without  
inversion.  
BIT 3 SLCTIN - PRINTER SELECT INPUT  
This bit is inverted and output onto the nSLCTIN  
output. A logic 1 on this bit selects the printer; a  
logic 0 means the printer is not selected.  
BIT 4 IRQE - INTERRUPT REQUEST ENABLE  
The interrupt request enable bit when set to a  
high level may be used to enable interrupt  
requests from the Parallel Port to the CPU. An  
interrupt request is generated on the IRQ port by  
a positive going nACK input. When the IRQE  
bit is programmed low the IRQ is disabled.  
EPP DATA PORT 0  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 04H  
The EPP Data Port 0 is located at an offset of  
'04H' from the base address. The data register  
is cleared at initialization by RESET. During a  
WRITE operation, the contents of DB0-DB7 are  
buffered (non-inverting) and output onto the PD0  
- PD7 ports, the leading edge of nIOW causes  
an EPP DATA WRITE cycle to be performed,  
the trailing edge of IOW latches the data for the  
duration of the EPP write cycle. During a READ  
operation, PD0-PD7 ports are read, the leading  
edge of IOR causes an EPP READ cycle to be  
performed and the data output to the host CPU,  
the deassertion of DATASTB latches the PData  
for the duration of the IOR cycle. This register  
is only available in EPP mode.  
BIT  
5
PCD  
-
PARALLEL CONTROL  
DIRECTION  
Parallel Control Direction is not valid in printer  
mode. In printer mode, the direction is always  
out regardless of the state of this bit. In bi-  
directional, EPP or ECP mode, a logic “0”  
means that the printer port is in output mode  
(write); a logic 1 means that the printer port is in  
input mode (read).  
Bits 6 and 7 during a read are a low level, and  
cannot be written.  
89  
deasserted (after command). If a time-out  
occurs, the current EPP cycle is aborted and the  
time-out condition is indicated in Status bit 0.  
EPP DATA PORT 1  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 05H  
The EPP Data Port 1 is located at an offset of  
'05H' from the base address. Refer to EPP  
DATA PORT 0 for a description of operation.  
This register is only available in EPP mode.  
EPP DATA PORT 2  
During an EPP cycle, if STROBE is active, it  
overrides the EPP write signal forcing the PDx  
bus to always be in a write mode and the  
nWRITE signal to always be asserted.  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 06H  
Software Constraints  
The EPP Data Port 2 is located at an offset of  
'06H' from the base address. Refer to EPP  
DATA PORT 0 for a description of operation.  
This register is only available in EPP mode.  
Before an EPP cycle is executed, the software  
must ensure that the control register bit PCD is  
a logic "0" (ie a 04H or 05H should be written to  
the Control port). If the user leaves PCD as a  
logic "1", and attempts to perform an EPP write,  
the chip is unable to perform the write (because  
PCD is a logic "1") and will appear to perform an  
EPP read on the parallel bus; no error is  
indicated.  
EPP DATA PORT 3  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 07H  
The EPP Data Port 3 is located at an offset of  
'07H' from the base address. Refer to EPP  
DATA PORT 0 for a description of operation.  
This register is only available in EPP mode.  
EPP 1.9 Write  
The timing for a write operation (address or  
data) is shown in timing diagram EPP Write  
Data or Address cycle. IOCHRDY is driven  
active low at the start of each EPP write and is  
released when it has been determined that the  
write cycle can complete. The write cycle can  
complete under the following circumstances:  
EPP 1.9 OPERATION  
When the EPP mode is selected in the  
configuration register, the standard and bi-  
directional modes are also available. If no EPP  
Read, Write or Address cycle is currently  
executing, then the PDx bus is in the standard or  
bi-directional mode, and all output signals  
(STROBE, AUTOFD, INIT) are as set by the  
SPP Control Port and direction is controlled by  
PCD of the Control port.  
1. If the EPP bus is not ready (nWAIT is active  
low) when nDATASTB or nADDRSTB goes  
active then the write can complete when  
nWAIT goes inactive high.  
In EPP mode, the system timing is closely  
coupled to the EPP timing. For this reason, a  
watchdog timer is required to prevent system  
lockup. The timer indicates if more than 10  
msec have elapsed from the start of the EPP  
cycle (nIOR or nIOW asserted) to nWAIT being  
2. If the EPP bus is ready (nWAIT is inactive  
high) then the chip must wait for it to go  
active low before changing the state of  
nDATASTB, nWRITE or nADDRSTB. The  
write can complete once nWAIT is  
determined inactive.  
90  
Write Sequence of Operation  
1. If the EPP bus is not ready (nWAIT is active  
low) when nDATASTB goes active then the  
read can complete when nWAIT goes  
inactive high.  
1. The host selects an EPP register, places  
data on the SData bus and drives nIOW  
active.  
2. The chip drives IOCHRDY inactive (low).  
3. If WAIT is not asserted, the chip must wait  
until WAIT is asserted.  
2. If the EPP bus is ready (nWAIT is inactive  
high) then the chip must wait for it to go  
active low before changing the state of  
WRITE or before nDATASTB goes active.  
The read can complete once nWAIT is  
determined inactive.  
4. The chip places address or data on PData  
bus, clears PDIR, and asserts nWRITE.  
5. Chip asserts nDATASTB or nADDRSTRB  
indicating that PData bus contains valid  
information, and the WRITE signal is valid.  
6. Peripheral deasserts nWAIT, indicating that  
any setup requirements have been satisfied  
and the chip may begin the termination  
phase of the cycle.  
7. a) The chip deasserts nDATASTB or  
nADDRSTRB, this marks the beginning  
of the termination phase. If it has not  
already done so, the peripheral should  
latch the information byte now.  
Read Sequence of Operation  
1. The host selects an EPP register and drives  
nIOR active.  
2. The chip drives IOCHRDY inactive (low).  
3. If WAIT is not asserted, the chip must wait  
until WAIT is asserted.  
4. The chip tri-states the PData bus and  
deasserts nWRITE.  
5. Chip asserts nDATASTB or nADDRSTRB  
indicating that PData bus is tri-stated, PDIR  
is set and the nWRITE signal is valid.  
6. Peripheral drives PData bus valid.  
7. Peripheral deasserts nWAIT, indicating that  
PData is valid and the chip may begin the  
termination phase of the cycle.  
8. a) The chip latches the data from the  
PData bus for the SData bus and  
deasserts nDATASTB or nADDRSTRB.  
This marks the beginning of the  
termination phase.  
b) The chip latches the data from the  
SData bus for the PData bus and  
asserts (releases) IOCHRDY allowing  
the host to complete the write cycle.  
8. Peripheral asserts nWAIT, indicating to the  
host that any hold time requirements have  
been satisfied and acknowledging the  
termination of the cycle.  
9. Chip may modify nWRITE and nPDATA in  
preparation for the next cycle.  
b) The chip drives the valid data onto the  
SData bus and asserts (releases)  
IOCHRDY allowing the host to  
complete the read cycle.  
EPP 1.9 Read  
The timing for a read operation (data) is shown  
in timing diagram EPP Read Data cycle.  
IOCHRDY is driven active low at the start of  
each EPP read and is released when it has been  
determined that the read cycle can complete.  
The read cycle can complete under the following  
circumstances:  
9. Peripheral tri-states the PData bus and  
asserts nWAIT, indicating to the host that  
the PData bus is tri-stated.  
10. Chip may modify nWRITE, PDIR and  
nPDATA in preparation for the next cycle.  
91  
Write Sequence of Operation  
EPP 1.7 OPERATION  
1. The host sets PDIR bit in the control  
When the EPP 1.7 mode is selected in the  
configuration register, the standard and bi-  
directional modes are also available. If no EPP  
Read, Write or Address cycle is currently  
executing, then the PDx bus is in the standard or  
bi-directional mode, and all output signals  
(STROBE, AUTOFD, INIT) are as set by the  
SPP Control Port and direction is controlled by  
PCD of the Control port.  
register to a logic "0".  
nWRITE.  
This asserts  
2. The host selects an EPP register, places  
data on the SData bus and drives nIOW  
active.  
3. The chip places address or data on PData  
bus.  
4. Chip asserts nDATASTB or nADDRSTRB  
indicating that PData bus contains valid  
information, and the WRITE signal is valid.  
5. If nWAIT is asserted, IOCHRDY is  
deasserted until the peripheral deasserts  
nWAIT or a time-out occurs.  
6. When the host deasserts nIOW the chip  
deasserts nDATASTB or nADDRSTRB and  
latches the data from the SData bus for the  
PData bus.  
In EPP mode, the system timing is closely  
coupled to the EPP timing. For this reason, a  
watchdog timer is required to prevent system  
lockup. The timer indicates if more than 10  
msec have elapsed from the start of the EPP  
cycle (nIOR or nIOW asserted) to the end of the  
cycle nIOR or nIOW deasserted). If a time-out  
occurs, the current EPP cycle is aborted and the  
time-out condition is indicated in Status bit 0.  
7. Chip may modify nWRITE, PDIR and  
nPDATA in preparation of the next cycle.  
Software Constraints  
EPP 1.7 Read  
Before an EPP cycle is executed, the software  
must ensure that the control register bits D0, D1  
and D3 are set to zero. Also, bit D5 (PCD) is a  
logic "0" for an EPP write or a logic "1" for and  
EPP read.  
The timing for a read operation (data) is shown  
in timing diagram EPP 1.7 Read Data cycle.  
IOCHRDY is driven active low when nWAIT is  
active low during the EPP cycle. This can be  
used to extend the cycle time. The read cycle  
can complete when nWAIT is inactive high.  
EPP 1.7 Write  
Read Sequence of Operation  
The timing for a write operation (address or  
data) is shown in timing diagram EPP 1.7 Write  
Data or Address cycle. IOCHRDY is driven  
active low when nWAIT is active low during the  
EPP cycle. This can be used to extend the cycle  
1. The host sets PDIR bit in the control  
register to a logic "1". This deasserts  
nWRITE and tri-states the PData bus.  
2. The host selects an EPP register and drives  
nIOR active.  
time.  
The write cycle can complete when  
nWAIT is inactive high.  
3. Chip asserts nDATASTB or nADDRSTRB  
indicating that PData bus is tri-stated, PDIR  
is set and the nWRITE signal is valid.  
4. If nWAIT is asserted, IOCHRDY is  
deasserted until the peripheral deasserts  
nWAIT or a time-out occurs.  
5. The Peripheral drives PData bus valid.  
92  
6. The Peripheral deasserts nWAIT, indicating  
that PData is valid and the chip may begin  
the termination phase of the cycle.  
8. Peripheral tri-states the PData bus.  
9. Chip may modify nWRITE, PDIR and  
nPDATA in preparation of the next cycle.  
7. When the host deasserts nIOR the chip  
deasserts nDATASTB or nADDRSTRB.  
93  
Table 37 - EPP Pin Descriptions  
EPP  
SIGNAL  
EPP NAME  
nWrite  
TYPE  
EPP DESCRIPTION  
This signal is active low. It denotes a write operation.  
nWRITE  
PD<0:7>  
INTR  
O
Address/Data  
Interrupt  
I/O  
I
Bi-directional EPP byte wide address and data bus.  
This signal is active high and positive edge triggered. (Pass  
through with no inversion, Same as SPP.)  
WAIT  
nWait  
I
This signal is active low. It is driven inactive as a positive  
acknowledgement from the device that the transfer of data  
is completed. It is driven active as an indication that the  
device is ready for the next transfer.  
DATASTB nData Strobe  
RESET nReset  
O
O
O
This signal is active low. It is used to denote data read or  
write operation.  
This signal is active low.  
When driven active, the EPP  
device is reset to its initial operational mode.  
ADDRSTB nAddress  
Strobe  
This signal is active low. It is used to denote address read  
or write operation.  
PE  
Paper End  
I
I
Same as SPP mode.  
Same as SPP mode.  
SLCT  
Printer  
Selected  
Status  
nERR  
PDIR  
Error  
I
Same as SPP mode.  
Parallel Port  
Direction  
O
This output shows the direction of the data transfer on the  
parallel port bus. A low means an output/write condition and  
a high means an input/read condition. This signal is  
normally a low (output/write) unless PCD of the control  
register is set or if an EPP read cycle is in progress.  
Note 1: SPP and EPP can use one common register.  
Note 2: nWrite is the only EPP output that can be over-ridden by SPP control port during an EPP  
cycle. For correct EPP read cycles, PCD is required to be a low.  
94  
reverse: Peripheral to Host communication  
EXTENDED CAPABILITIES PARALLEL PORT  
Pword:  
A port word; equal in size to  
the  
width of the ISA interface. For this  
implementation, PWord is always 8  
bits.  
A high level.  
A low level.  
ECP provides a number of advantages, some of  
which are listed below. The individual features  
are explained in greater detail in the remainder  
of this section.  
1
0
·
·
·
High performance half-duplex forward and  
reverse channel  
Interlocked handshake, for fast reliable  
transfer  
Optional single byte RLE compression for  
improved throughput (64:1)  
Channel addressing for low-cost peripherals  
Maintains link and data layer separation  
Permits the use of active output drivers  
Permits the use of adaptive signal timing  
Peer-to-peer capability  
These terms may be considered synonymous:  
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
PeriphClk, nAck  
HostAck, nAutoFd  
PeriphAck, Busy  
nPeriphRequest, nFault  
nReverseRequest, nInit  
nAckReverse, PError  
Xflag, Select  
ECPMode, nSelectln  
HostClk, nStrobe  
·
·
·
·
·
Vocabulary  
Reference Document:  
The following terms are used in this document:  
IEEE 1284 Extended Capabilities Port Protocol  
and ISA Interface Standard, Rev 1.14, July 14,  
assert:  
When a signal asserts it transitions  
to a "true" state, when a signal  
deasserts it transitions to a "false"  
state.  
1993.  
This document is available from  
Microsoft.  
The bit map of the Extended Parallel Port  
registers is shown in the table on the following  
page.  
forward: Host to Peripheral communication.  
95  
D7  
PD7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Note  
data  
PD6  
PD5  
PD4  
PD3  
PD2  
PD1  
PD0  
ecpAFifo  
dsr  
Addr/RLE  
nBusy  
0
Address or RLE field  
2
1
1
2
2
2
nAck  
0
PError  
Select  
nFault  
ackIntEn SelectIn  
Parallel Port Data FIFO  
ECP Data FIFO  
0
0
0
dcr  
Direction  
nInit  
autofd  
strobe  
cFifo  
ecpDFifo  
tFifo  
Test FIFO  
cnfgA  
cnfgB  
ecr  
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
compress  
intrValue  
MODE  
Parallel Port IRQ  
nErrIntrEn dmaEn  
Parallel Port DMA  
serviceIntr full  
empty  
Note 1: These registers are available in all modes.  
Note 2: All FIFOs use one common 16 byte FIFO.  
Note 3: The ECP Parallel Port Config Reg B reflects the IRQ and DRQ selected by the Configuration  
Registers.  
It does not do any "protocol" negotiation, rather  
it provides an automatic high burst-bandwidth  
channel that supports DMA for ECP in both the  
forward and reverse directions.  
ISA IMPLEMENTATION STANDARD  
This specification describes the standard ISA  
interface to the Extended Capabilities Port  
(ECP). All ISA devices supporting ECP must  
meet the requirements contained in this section  
or the port will not be supported by Microsoft.  
For a description of the ECP Protocol, please  
refer to the IEEE 1284 Extended Capabilities  
Port Protocol and ISA Interface Standard, Rev.  
1.14, July 14, 1993. This document is available  
from Microsoft.  
Small FIFOs are employed in both forward and  
reverse directions to smooth data flow and  
improve the maximum bandwidth requirement.  
The size of the FIFO is 16 bytes deep. The port  
supports an automatic handshake for the  
standard parallel port to improve compatibility  
mode transfer speed.  
The port also supports run length encoded  
(RLE) decompression (required) in hardware.  
Compression is accomplished by counting  
identical bytes and transmitting an RLE byte  
that indicates how many times the next byte is  
to be repeated. Decompression simply  
intercepts the RLE byte and repeats the  
following byte the specified number of times.  
Hardware support for compression is optional.  
Description  
The port is software and hardware compatible  
with existing parallel ports so that it may be  
used as a standard LPT port if ECP is not  
required. The port is designed to be simple and  
requires a small number of gates to implement.  
96  
Table 38 - ECP Pin Descriptions  
DESCRIPTION  
NAME  
nStrobe  
TYPE  
O
During write operations nStrobe registers data or address into the slave  
on the asserting edge (handshakes with Busy).  
PData 7:0  
nAck  
I/O  
I
Contains address or data or RLE data.  
Indicates valid data driven by the peripheral when asserted. This signal  
handshakes with nAutoFd in reverse.  
PeriphAck (Busy)  
I
I
This signal deasserts to indicate that the peripheral can accept data.  
This signal handshakes with nStrobe in the forward direction. In the  
reverse direction this signal indicates whether the data lines contain  
ECP command information or data. The peripheral uses this signal to  
flow control in the forward direction. It is an "interlocked" handshake  
with nStrobe. PeriphAck also provides command information in the  
reverse direction.  
PError  
Used to acknowledge a change in the direction the transfer (asserted =  
(nAckReverse)  
forward).  
nReverseRequest.  
The peripheral drives this signal low to acknowledge  
It is an "interlocked" handshake with  
nReverseRequest. The host relies upon nAckReverse to determine  
when it is permitted to drive the data bus.  
Select  
I
Indicates printer on line.  
nAutoFd  
O
Requests a byte of data from the peripheral when asserted,  
(HostAck)  
handshaking with nAck in the reverse direction. In the forward direction  
this signal indicates whether the data lines contain ECP address or  
data. The host drives this signal to flow control in the reverse direction.  
It is an "interlocked" handshake with nAck. HostAck also provides  
command information in the forward phase.  
nFault  
(nPeriphRequest)  
I
Generates an error interrupt when asserted. This signal provides a  
mechanism for peer-to-peer communication. This signal is valid only in  
the forward direction. During ECP Mode the peripheral is permitted  
(but not required) to drive this pin low to request a reverse transfer. The  
request is merely a "hint" to the host; the host has ultimate control over  
the transfer direction. This signal would be typically used to generate  
an interrupt to the host CPU.  
nInit  
O
O
Sets the transfer direction (asserted = reverse, deasserted = forward).  
This pin is driven low to place the channel in the reverse direction. The  
peripheral is only allowed to drive the bi-directional data bus while in  
ECP Mode and HostAck is low and nSelectIn is high.  
nSelectIn  
Always deasserted in ECP mode.  
97  
to avoid conflict with standard ISA devices. The  
port is equivalent to a generic parallel port  
interface and may be operated in that mode.  
The port registers vary depending on the mode  
field in the ecr. The table below lists these  
dependencies. Operation of the devices in  
modes other that those specified is undefined.  
Register Definitions  
The register definitions are based on the  
standard IBM addresses for LPT. All of the  
standard printer ports are supported.  
additional registers attach to an upper bit  
decode of the standard LPT port definition  
The  
Table 39 - ECP Register Definitions  
ADDRESS (Note 1) ECP MODES  
NAME  
FUNCTION  
Data Register  
data  
+000h R/W  
+000h R/W  
+001h R/W  
+002h R/W  
+400h R/W  
+400h R/W  
+400h R/W  
+400h R  
000-001  
011  
All  
ecpAFifo  
dsr  
ECP FIFO (Address)  
Status Register  
dcr  
All  
Control Register  
cFifo  
ecpDFifo  
tFifo  
010  
011  
110  
111  
111  
All  
Parallel Port Data FIFO  
ECP FIFO (DATA)  
Test FIFO  
cnfgA  
cnfgB  
ecr  
Configuration Register A  
Configuration Register B  
Extended Control Register  
+401h R/W  
+402h R/W  
Note 1: These addresses are added to the parallel port base address as selected by configuration  
register or jumpers.  
Note 2: All addresses are qualified with AEN. Refer to the AEN pin definition.  
Table 40 - Mode Descriptions  
MODE  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
110  
111  
DESCRIPTION*  
SPP mode  
PS/2 Parallel Port mde  
Parallel Port Data FIFO mode  
ECP Parallel Port mode  
EPP mode (If this option is enabled in the configuration registers)  
(Reserved)  
Test mode  
Configuration mode  
*Refer to ECR Register Description  
98  
DATA and ecpAFifo PORT  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 00H  
BIT 4 Select  
The level on the Select input is read by the CPU  
as bit 4 of the Device Status Register.  
Modes 000 and 001 (Data Port)  
BIT 5 PError  
The Data Port is located at an offset of '00H'  
from the base address. The data register is  
cleared at initialization by RESET. During a  
WRITE operation, the Data Register latches the  
contents of the data bus on the rising edge of  
the nIOW input. The contents of this register  
are buffered (non inverting) and output onto the  
PD0-PD7 ports. During a READ operation,  
PD0-PD7 ports are read and output to the host  
CPU.  
The level on the PError input is read by the CPU  
as bit 5 of the Device Status Register. Printer  
Status Register.  
BIT 6 nAck  
The level on the nAck input is read by the CPU  
as bit 6 of the Device Status Register.  
BIT 7 nBusy  
The complement of the level on the BUSY input  
is read by the CPU as bit 7 of the Device Status  
Register.  
Mode 011 (ECP FIFO - Address/RLE)  
A data byte written to this address is placed in  
the FIFO and tagged as an ECP Address/RLE.  
The hardware at the ECP port transmits this  
byte to the peripheral automatically. The  
operation of this register is ony defined for the  
forward direction (direction is 0). Refer to the  
ECP Parallel Port Forward Timing Diagram,  
located in the Timing Diagrams section of this  
data sheet.  
DEVICE CONTROL REGISTER (dcr)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 02H  
The Control Register is located at an offset of  
'02H' from the base address. The Control  
Register is initialized to zero by the RESET  
input, bits 0 to 5 only being affected; bits 6 and  
7 are hard wired low.  
BIT 0 STROBE - STROBE  
This bit is inverted and output onto the  
nSTROBE output.  
DEVICE STATUS REGISTER (dsr)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 01H  
The Status Port is located at an offset of '01H'  
BIT 1 AUTOFD - AUTOFEED  
from the base address.  
Bits 0-2 are not  
This bit is inverted and output onto the  
nAUTOFD output. A logic 1 causes the printer  
to generate a line feed after each line is printed.  
A logic 0 means no autofeed.  
implemented as register bits, during a read of  
the Printer Status Register these bits are a low  
level. The bits of the Status Port are defined as  
follows:  
BIT 2 nINIT - nINITIATE OUTPUT  
This bit is output onto the nINIT output without  
inversion.  
BIT 3 nFault  
The level on the nFault input is read by the CPU  
as bit 3 of the Device Status Register.  
BIT 3 SELECTIN  
This bit is inverted and output onto the nSLCTIN  
output. A logic 1 on this bit selects the printer; a  
logic 0 means the printer is not selected.  
99  
Data bytes from the peripheral are read under  
automatic hardware handshake from ECP into  
this FIFO when the direction bit is 1. Reads or  
DMAs from the FIFO will return bytes of ECP  
data to the system.  
BIT 4 ackIntEn - INTERRUPT REQUEST  
ENABLE  
The interrupt request enable bit when set to a  
high level may be used to enable interrupt  
requests from the Parallel Port to the CPU due  
to a low to high transition on the nACK input.  
Refer to the description of the interrupt under  
Operation, Interrupts.  
tFifo (Test FIFO Mode)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 400H  
Mode = 110  
BIT 5 DIRECTION  
Data bytes may be read, written or DMAed to or  
from the system to this FIFO in any direction.  
If mode=000 or mode=010, this bit has no effect  
and the direction is always out regardless of the  
state of this bit. In all other modes, Direction is  
valid and a logic 0 means that the printer port is  
in output mode (write); a logic 1 means that the  
printer port is in input mode (read).  
Data in the tFIFO will not be transmitted to the  
parallel port lines using a hardware protocol  
handshake. However, data in the tFIFO may be  
displayed on the parallel port data lines.  
The tFIFO will not stall when overwritten or  
underrun. If an attempt is made to write data to  
a full tFIFO, the new data is not accepted into  
the tFIFO. If an attempt is made to read data  
from an empty tFIFO, the last data byte is re-  
read again. The full and empty bits must  
always keep track of the correct FIFO state. The  
tFIFO will transfer data at the maximum ISA  
rate so that software may generate performance  
metrics.  
BITS 6 and 7 during a read are a low level, and  
cannot be written.  
cFifo (Parallel Port Data FIFO)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 400h  
Mode = 010  
Bytes written or DMAed from the system to this  
FIFO are transmitted by a hardware handshake  
to the peripheral using the standard parallel port  
protocol.  
Transfers to the FIFO are byte  
The FIFO size and interrupt threshold can be  
determined by writing bytes to the FIFO and  
checking the full and serviceIntr bits.  
aligned. This mode is only defined for the  
forward direction.  
ecpDFifo (ECP Data FIFO)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 400H  
Mode = 011  
The writeIntrThreshold can be determined by  
starting with a full tFIFO, setting the direction bit  
to 0 and emptying it a byte at a time until  
serviceIntr is set. This may generate a spurious  
interrupt, but will indicate that the threshold has  
been reached.  
Bytes written or DMAed from the system to this  
FIFO, when the direction bit is 0, are transmitted  
by a hardware handshake to the peripheral  
using the ECP parallel port protocol. Transfers  
to the FIFO are byte aligned.  
The readIntrThreshold can be determined by  
setting the direction bit to 1 and filling the empty  
tFIFO a byte at a time until serviceIntr is set.  
This may generate a spurious interrupt, but will  
indicate that the threshold has been reached.  
100  
Data bytes are always read from the head of  
tFIFO regardless of the value of the direction bit.  
For example if 44h, 33h, 22h are written to the  
FIFO, then reading the tFIFO will return 44h,  
33h, 22h in the same order as was written.  
BITS 7 - 5  
These bits are Read/Write and select the Mode.  
BIT 4 nErrIntrEn  
Read/Write (Valid only in ECP Mode)  
1: Disables the interrupt generated on the  
asserting edge of nFault.  
0: Enables an interrupt pulse on the high to  
low edge of nFault. Note that an interrupt  
will be generated if nFault is asserted  
(interrupting) and this bit is written from a  
“1” to a “0”. This prevents interrupts from  
being lost in the time between the read of  
the ecr and the write of the ecr.  
cnfgA (Configuration Register A)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 400H  
Mode = 111  
This register is a read-only register. When read,  
10H is returned. This indicates to the system  
that this is an 8-bit implementation. (PWord = 1  
byte)  
BIT 3 dmaEn  
Read/Write  
1: Enables DMA (DMA starts when serviceIntr  
is 0).  
cnfgB (Configuration Register B)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 401H  
Mode = 111  
0: Disables DMA unconditionally.  
BIT 7 compress  
This bit is read only. During a read it is a low  
level. This means that this chip does not  
support hardware RLE compression. It does  
support hardware de-compression!  
BIT 2 serviceIntr  
Read/Write  
1: Disables DMA and all of the service  
interrupts.  
0: Enables one of the following three cases of  
interrupts. Once one of the three service  
interrupts has occurred serviceIntr bit shall  
be set to a “1” by hardware. It must be reset  
to “0” to re-enable the interrupts. Writing  
this bit to a “1” will not cause an interrupt.  
case dmaEn=1:  
BIT 6 intrValue  
Returns the value on the ISA IRQ line to  
determine possible conflicts.  
BITS 3 - 0 Parallel Port IRQ  
Refer to Table 41B.  
During DMA (this bit is set to a “1” when  
terminal count is reached).  
case dmaEn=0 direction=0:  
BITS 2 - 0 Parallel Port DMA  
Refer to Table 41C.  
This bit shall be set to 1 whenever there are  
writeIntrThreshold or more bytes free in the  
FIFO.  
ecr (Extended Control Register)  
ADDRESS OFFSET = 402H  
Mode = all  
case dmaEn=0 direction=1:  
This bit shall be set to 1 whenever there are  
readIntrThreshold or more valid bytes to be  
read from the FIFO.  
This register controls the extended ECP parallel  
port functions.  
101  
BIT 1 full  
BIT 0 empty  
Read only  
Read only  
1: The FIFO cannot accept another byte or the  
FIFO is completely full.  
1: The FIFO is completely empty.  
0: The FIFO contains at least one byte of data.  
0: The FIFO has at least one free byte.  
102  
Table 41A - Extended Control Register  
MODE  
R/W  
000: Standard Parallel Port Mode. In this mode the FIFO is reset and common collector drivers  
are used on the control lines (nStrobe, nAutoFd, nInit and nSelectIn). Setting the direction  
bit will not tri-state the output drivers in this mode.  
001: PS/2 Parallel Port Mode. Same as above except that direction may be used to tri-state the  
data lines and reading the data register returns the value on the data lines and not the  
value in the data register. All drivers have active pull-ups (push-pull).  
010: Parallel Port FIFO Mode. This is the same as 000 except that bytes are written or DMAed to  
the FIFO. FIFO data is automatically transmitted using the standard parallel port protocol.  
Note that this mode is only useful when direction is 0. All drivers have active pull-ups  
(push-pull).  
011: ECP Parallel Port Mode. In the forward direction (direction is 0) bytes placed into the  
ecpDFifo and bytes written to the ecpAFifo are placed in a single FIFO and transmitted  
automatically to the peripheral using ECP Protocol. In the reverse direction (direction is 1)  
bytes are moved from the ECP parallel port and packed into bytes in the ecpDFifo. All  
drivers have active pull-ups (push-pull).  
100: Selects EPP Mode: In this mode, EPP is selected if the EPP supported option is selected in  
configuration register L3-CRF0. All drivers have active pull-ups (push-pull).  
101: Reserved  
110: Test Mode. In this mode the FIFO may be written and read, but the data will not be  
transmitted on the parallel port. All drivers have active pull-ups (push-pull).  
111: Configuration Mode. In this mode the confgA, confgB registers are accessible at 0x400 and  
0x401. All drivers have active pull-ups (push-pull).  
Table 41B  
CONFIG REG B  
Table 41C  
CONFIG REG B  
IRQ SELECTED  
BITS 5:3  
BITS 2:0  
DMA SELECTED  
15  
110  
101  
100  
011  
010  
001  
111  
000  
3
011  
010  
001  
000  
14  
2
1
11  
10  
All Others  
9
7
5
All Others  
103  
After negotiation, it is necessary to initialize  
some of the port bits. The following are required:  
OPERATION  
Mode Switching/Software Control  
·
·
Set Direction = 0, enabling the drivers.  
Set strobe = 0, causing the nStrobe signal  
to default to the deasserted state.  
Set autoFd = 0, causing the nAutoFd  
signal to default to the deasserted state.  
Set mode = 011 (ECP Mode)  
Software will execute P1284 negotiation and all  
operation prior to a data transfer phase under  
programmed I/O control (mode 000 or 001).  
Hardware provides an automatic control line  
handshake, moving data between the FIFO and  
the ECP port only in the data transfer phase  
(modes 011 or 010).  
·
·
ECP address/RLE bytes or data bytes may be  
sent automatically by writing the ecpAFifo or  
ecpDFifo respectively.  
Setting the mode to 011 or 010 will cause the  
hardware to initiate data transfer.  
Note that all FIFO data transfers are byte wide  
and byte aligned. Address/RLE transfers are  
byte-wide and only allowed in the forward  
direction.  
If the port is in mode 000 or 001 it may switch to  
any other mode. If the port is not in mode 000  
or 001 it can only be switched into mode 000 or  
001. The direction can only be changed in  
mode 001.  
The host may switch directions by first switching  
to mode = 001, negotiating for the forward or  
Once in an extended forward mode the software  
should wait for the FIFO to be empty before  
switching back to mode 000 or 001. In this case  
all control signals will be deasserted before the  
mode switch. In an ecp reverse mode the  
software waits for all the data to be read from  
the FIFO before changing back to mode 000 or  
001. Since the automatic hardware ecp reverse  
handshake only cares about the state of the  
FIFO it may have acquired extra data which will  
be discarded. It may in fact be in the middle of a  
transfer when the mode is changed back to 000  
or 001. In this case the port will deassert  
nAutoFd independent of the state of the transfer.  
The design shall not cause glitches on the  
handshake signals if the software meets the  
constraints above.  
reverse channel, setting  
direction to 1 or 0,  
then setting mode = 011. When direction is 1  
the hardware shall handshake for each ECP  
read data byte and attempt to fill the FIFO.  
Bytes may then be read from the ecpDFifo as  
long as it is not empty.  
ECP transfers may also be accomplished (albeit  
slowly) by handshaking individual bytes under  
program control in mode = 001, or 000.  
Termination from ECP Mode  
Termination from ECP Mode is similar to the  
termination from Nibble/Byte Modes. The host is  
permitted to terminate from ECP Mode only in  
specific well-defined states. The termination can  
only be executed while the bus is in the forward  
direction. To terminate while the channel is in  
the reverse direction, it must first be transitioned  
into the forward direction.  
ECP Operation  
Prior to ECP operation the Host must negotiate  
on the parallel port to determine if the peripheral  
supports the ECP protocol. This is a somewhat  
complex negotiation carried out under program  
control in mode 000.  
104  
is not supported. To transfer compressed data  
in ECP mode, the compression count is written  
to the ecpAFifo and the data byte is written to  
the ecpDFifo.  
Command/Data  
ECP Mode supports two advanced features to  
improve the effectiveness of the protocol for  
some  
applications.  
The  
features  
are  
Compression is accomplished by counting  
identical bytes and transmitting an RLE byte  
that indicates how many times the next byte is  
to be repeated. Decompression simply  
intercepts the RLE byte and repeats the  
following byte the specified number of times.  
When a run-length count is received from a  
peripheral, the subsequent data byte is  
replicated the specified number of times. A  
run-length count of zero specifies that only one  
byte of data is represented by the next data  
implemented by allowing the transfer of normal  
8-bit data or 8-bit commands.  
When in the forward direction, normal data is  
transferred when HostAck is high and an 8-bit  
command is transferred when HostAck is low.  
The most significant bit of the command  
indicates whether it is a run-length count (for  
compression) or a channel address.  
byte, whereas a run-length  
count  
of 127  
When in the reverse direction, normal data is  
transferred when PeriphAck is high and an 8-bit  
command is transferred when PeriphAck is low.  
The most significant bit of the command is  
always zero. Reverse channel addresses are  
seldom used and may not be supported in  
hardware.  
indicates that the next byte should be expanded  
to 128 bytes. To prevent data expansion,  
however, run-length counts of zero should be  
avoided.  
Pin Definition  
The drivers for nStrobe, nAutoFd, nInit and  
nSelectIn are open-collector in mode 000 and  
are push-pull in all other modes.  
Table 42  
Forward Channel Commands (HostAck Low)  
Reverse Channel Commands (PeripAck Low)  
D7  
D[6:0]  
ISA Connections  
0
Run-Length Count (0-127)  
(mode 0011 0X00 only)  
The interface can never stall causing the host to  
hang. The width of data transfers is strictly  
controlled on an I/O address basis per this  
specification. All FIFO-DMA transfers are byte  
wide, byte aligned and end on a byte boundary.  
(The PWord value can be obtained by reading  
Configuration Register A, cnfgA, described in  
the next section.) Single byte wide transfers  
are always possible with standard or PS/2 mode  
using program control of the control signals.  
1
Channel Address (0-127)  
Data Compression  
The ECP port supports run length encoded  
(RLE) decompression in hardware and can  
transfer compressed data to a peripheral. Run  
length encoded (RLE) compression in hardware  
105  
readIntrThreshold or more  
bytes in the FIFO. Also, an  
interrupt is generated when  
Interrupts  
The interrupts are enabled by serviceIntr in the  
ecr register.  
serviceIntr is cleared to  
whenever there  
0
are  
readIntrThreshold or more  
bytes in the FIFO.  
serviceIntr = 1 Disables the DMA and all of the  
service interrupts.  
3. When nErrIntrEn is 0 and nFault transitions  
from high to low or when nErrIntrEn is set  
from 1 to 0 and nFault is asserted.  
serviceIntr = 0 Enables the selected interrupt  
condition. If the interrupting  
condition is valid, then the  
interrupt  
is  
generated  
4. When ackIntEn is 1 and the nAck signal  
transitions from a low to a high.  
immediately when this bit is  
changed from a 1 to a 0. This  
can occur during Programmed  
I/O if the number of bytes  
removed or added from/to the  
FIFO does not cross the  
threshold.  
FIFO Operation  
The FIFO threshold is set in the chip  
configuration registers. All data transfers to or  
from the parallel port can proceed in DMA or  
Programmed I/O (non-DMA) mode as indicated  
by the selected mode. The FIFO is used by  
selecting the Parallel Port FIFO mode or ECP  
Parallel Port Mode. (FIFO test mode will be  
addressed separately.) After a reset, the FIFO  
is disabled. Each data byte is transferred by a  
Programmed I/O cycle or PDRQ depending on  
the selection of DMA or Programmed I/O mode.  
The interrupt generated is ISA friendly in that it  
must pulse the interrupt line low, allowing for  
interrupt sharing.  
After a brief pulse low  
following the interrupt event, the interrupt line is  
tri-stated so that other interrupts may assert.  
An interrupt is generated when:  
1. For DMA transfers: When serviceIntr is 0,  
dmaEn is 1 and the DMA TC is received.  
The following paragraphs detail the operation of  
the FIFO flow control. In these descriptions,  
2. For Programmed I/O:  
<threshold> ranges from  
1
to 16.  
The  
a.  
When serviceIntr is 0, dmaEn is 0,  
direction is and there are  
writeIntrThreshold or more free bytes in  
the FIFO. Also, an interrupt is  
generated when serviceIntr is cleared  
to whenever there are  
parameter FIFOTHR, which the user programs,  
is one less and ranges from 0 to 15.  
0
A low threshold value (i.e. 2) results in longer  
periods of time between service requests, but  
requires faster servicing of the request for both  
read and write cases. The host must be very  
responsive to the service request. This is the  
0
writeIntrThreshold or more free bytes in  
the FIFO.  
b.  
(1) When serviceIntr is 0, dmaEn is  
0, direction is 1 and there are  
desired case for use with a "fast" system.  
A
high value of threshold (i.e. 12) is used with a  
"sluggish" system by affording a long latency  
period after a service request, but results in  
more frequent service requests.  
106  
DMA TRANSFERS  
DMA Mode - Transfers from the FIFO to the  
Host  
DMA transfers are always to or from the  
ecpDFifo, tFifo or CFifo. DMA utilizes the  
standard PC DMA services. To use the DMA  
transfers, the host first sets up the direction and  
state as in the programmed I/O case. Then it  
programs the DMA controller in the host with the  
desired count and memory address. Lastly it  
sets dmaEn to 1 and serviceIntr to 0. The ECP  
requests DMA transfers from the host by  
activating the PDRQ pin. The DMA will empty  
or fill the FIFO using the appropriate direction  
and mode. When the terminal count in the DMA  
controller is reached, an interrupt is generated  
and serviceIntr is asserted, disabling DMA. In  
order to prevent possible blocking of refresh  
requests dReq shall not be asserted for more  
than 32 DMA cycles in a row. The FIFO is  
enabled directly by asserting nPDACK and  
addresses need not be valid. PINTR is  
generated when a TC is received. PDRQ must  
not be asserted for more than 32 DMA cycles in  
a row. After the 32nd cycle, PDRQ must be  
kept unasserted until nPDACK is deasserted for  
a minimum of 350nsec. (Note: The only way to  
properly terminate DMA transfers is with a TC.)  
(Note: In the reverse mode, the peripheral may  
not continue to fill the FIFO if it runs out of data  
to transfer, even if the chip continues to request  
more data from the peripheral.)  
The ECP activates the PDRQ pin whenever  
there is data in the FIFO. The DMA controller  
must respond to the request by reading data  
from the FIFO. The ECP will deactivate the  
PDRQ pin when the FIFO becomes empty or  
when the TC becomes true (qualified by  
nPDACK), indicating that no more data is  
required. PDRQ goes inactive after nPDACK  
goes active for the last byte of a data transfer  
(or on the active edge of nIOR, on the last byte,  
if no edge is present on nPDACK). If PDRQ  
goes inactive due to the FIFO going empty, then  
PDRQ is active again as soon as there is one  
byte in the FIFO. If PDRQ goes inactive due to  
the TC, then PDRQ is active again when there  
is one byte in the FIFO, and serviceIntr has  
been re-enabled. (Note: A data underrun may  
occur if PDRQ is not removed in time to prevent  
an unwanted cycle.)  
DMA may be disabled in the middle of a transfer  
by first disabling the host DMA controller. Then  
setting serviceIntr to 1, followed by setting  
dmaEn to 0, and waiting for the FIFO to  
become empty or full. Restarting the DMA is  
accomplished by enabling DMA in the host,  
setting dmaEn to 1, followed by setting  
serviceIntr to 0.  
Programmed I/O Mode or Non-DMA Mode  
The ECP or parallel port FIFOs may also be  
operated using interrupt driven programmed I/O.  
Software can determine the writeIntrThreshold,  
readIntrThreshold, and FIFO depth by accessing  
the FIFO in Test Mode.  
Programmed I/O transfers are to the ecpDFifo  
at 400H and ecpAFifo at 000H or from the  
ecpDFifo located at 400H, or to/from the tFifo at  
400H. To use the programmed I/O transfers,  
the host first sets up the direction and state, sets  
dmaEn to 0 and serviceIntr to 0.  
107  
The ECP requests programmed I/O transfers  
from the host by activating the PINTR pin. The  
programmed I/O will empty or fill the FIFO using  
the appropriate direction and mode.  
the FIFO. If at this time the FIFO is full, it can  
be completely emptied in single burst,  
otherwise a minimum of (16-<threshold>) bytes  
may be read from the FIFO in a single burst.  
a
Note: A threshold of 16 is equivalent to a  
threshold of 15. These two cases are treated  
the same.  
Programmed I/O - Transfers from the Host to  
the FIFO  
In the forward direction an interrupt occurs when  
serviceIntr is 0 and there are writeIntrThreshold  
or more bytes free in the FIFO. At this time if  
the FIFO is empty it can be filled with a single  
burst before the empty bit needs to be re-read.  
Programmed I/O - Transfers from the FIFO to  
the Host  
In the reverse direction an interrupt occurs when  
serviceIntr is 0 and readIntrThreshold bytes  
are available in the FIFO. If at this time the  
FIFO is full it can be emptied completely in a  
single burst, otherwise readIntrThreshold bytes  
may be read from the FIFO in a single burst.  
Otherwise  
it  
may  
be  
filled  
with  
writeIntrThreshold bytes.  
writeIntrThreshold = (16-<threshold>) free  
bytes in FIFO  
readIntrThreshold  
=
(16-<threshold>)  
data bytes in FIFO  
An interrupt is generated when serviceIntr is 0  
and the number of bytes in the FIFO is less than  
or equal to <threshold>. (If the threshold = 12,  
then the interrupt is set whenever there are 12 or  
less bytes of data in the FIFO.) The PINT pin  
can be used for interrupt-driven systems. The  
host must respond to the request by writing data  
to the FIFO. If at this time the FIFO is empty, it  
can be completely filled in a single burst,  
otherwise a minimum of (16-<threshold>) bytes  
may be written to the FIFO in a single burst.  
This process is repeated until the last byte is  
transferred into the FIFO.  
An interrupt is generated when serviceIntr is 0  
and the number of bytes in the FIFO is greater  
than or equal to (16-<threshold>). (If the  
threshold  
= 12, then the interrupt is set  
whenever there are 4-16 bytes in the FIFO). The  
PINT pin can be used for interrupt-driven  
systems. The host must respond to the request  
by reading data from the FIFO. This process is  
repeated until the last byte is transferred out of  
108  
PARALLEL PORT FLOPPY DISK CONTROLLER  
The following parallel port pins are read as  
In this mode, the Floppy Disk Control signals  
are available on the parallel port pins. When  
this mode is selected, the parallel port is not  
available. There are two modes of operation,  
PPFD1 and PPFD2. These modes can be  
selected in the Parallel Port Mode Register, as  
defined in the Parallel Port Mode Register,  
Logical Device 3, at 0xF1. PPFD1 has only  
drive 1 on the parallel port pins; PPFD2 has  
drive 0 and 1 on the parallel port pins.  
follows by a read of the parallel port register:  
1. Data Register (read) = last Data Register  
(write)  
2. Control Register read as "cable not  
connected" STROBE, AUTOFD and SLC =  
0 and nINIT =1  
3. Status Register reads: nBUSY = 0, PE = 0,  
SLCT = 0, nACK = 1, nERR = 1.  
The following FDC pins are all in the high  
impedence state when the PPFDC is actually  
selected by the drive select register:  
When the PPFDC is selected the following pins  
are set as follows:  
1. nPDACK: high-Z  
2. PDRQ: not ECP = high-Z, ECP & dmaEn =  
0, ECP & not dmaEn = high-Z  
3. PINTR: not active, this is hi-Z or Low  
depending on settings.  
1. nWDATA, DENSEL, nHDSEL, nWGATE,  
nDIR, nSTEP, nDS1, nDS0, nMTR0,  
nMTR1.  
2. If PPFDx is selected, then the parallel port  
can not be used as a parallel port until  
"Normal" mode is selected.  
Note:  
nPDACK, PDRQ and PINTR refer to  
the nDACK, DRQ and IRQ chosen  
for the parallel port.  
The FDC signals are muxed onto the Parallel  
Port pins as shown in Table 43.  
109  
Table 43 - FDC Parallel Port Pins  
CONNECTOR  
PIN #  
CHIP PIN #  
SPP MODE  
FDC MODE  
PIN DIRECTION  
PIN DIRECTION  
1
2
144  
138  
137  
136  
135  
134  
133  
132  
131  
129  
128  
127  
126  
143  
142  
141  
140  
nSTB  
PD0  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I
(nDS0)  
nINDEX  
nTRK0  
I/(O) (Note1)  
I
3
PD1  
I
4
PD2  
nWP  
I
5
PD3  
nRDATA  
nDSKCHG  
nMEDIA_ID0  
(nMTR0)  
MEDIA_ID1  
nDS1  
I
6
PD4  
I
7
PD5  
I
8
PD6  
I/(O) (Note1)  
9
PD7  
I
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
nACK  
BUSY  
PE  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
nMTR1  
I
nWDATA  
nWGATE  
DRVDEN0  
nHDSEL  
nDIR  
SLCT  
nALF  
nERROR  
nINIT  
nSLCTIN  
I
I/O  
I
I/O  
I/O  
nSTEP  
Note 1: These pins are outputs in mode PPFD2, inputs in mode PPFD1.  
110  
AUTO POWER MANAGEMENT  
Power management capabilities are provided for  
DSR From Powerdown  
the following logical devices: floppy disk, UART  
1, UART 2 and the parallel port. For each  
logical device, two types of power management  
are provided; direct powerdown and auto  
powerdown.  
If DSR powerdown is used when the part is in  
auto powerdown, the DSR powerdown will  
override the auto powerdown. However, when  
the part is awakened from DSR powerdown, the  
auto powerdown will once again become  
effective.  
FDC Power Management  
Direct power management is controlled by  
CR22. Refer to CR22 for more information.  
Wake Up From Auto Powerdown  
If the part enters the powerdown state through  
the auto powerdown mode, then the part can be  
awakened by reset or by appropriate access to  
certain registers.  
Auto Power Management is enabled by CR23-  
B0. When set, this bit allows FDC to enter  
powerdown when all of the following conditions  
have been met:  
If a hardware or software reset is used then the  
part will go through the normal reset sequence.  
If the access is through the selected registers,  
then the FDC resumes operation as though it  
was never in powerdown. Besides activating the  
RESET pin or one of the software reset bits in  
the DOR or DSR, the following register  
accesses will wake up the part:  
1. The motor enable pins of register 3F2H are  
inactive (zero).  
2. The part must be idle; MSR=80H and INT =  
0 (INT may be high even if MSR = 80H due  
to polling interrupts).  
3. The head unload timer must have expired.  
4. The auto powerdown timer (10msec) must  
have timed out.  
1. Enabling any one of the motor enable bits  
in the DOR register (reading the DOR does  
not awaken the part).  
2. A read from the MSR register.  
3. A read or write to the data register.  
An internal timer is initiated as soon as the auto  
powerdown command is enabled. The part is  
then powered down when all the conditions are  
met.  
Disabling the auto powerdown mode cancels the  
timer and holds the FDC block out of auto  
powerdown.  
Once awake, the FDC will reinitiate the auto  
powerdown timer for 10 ms. The part will  
powerdown again when all the powerdown  
conditions are satisfied.  
111  
Register Behavior  
Pin Behavior  
Table 44 reiterates the AT and PS/2 (including  
Model 30) configuration registers available. It  
also shows the type of access permitted. In  
order to maintain software transparency, access  
to all the registers must be maintained. As Table  
44 shows, two sets of registers are distinguished  
based on whether their access results in the part  
remaining in powerdown state or exiting it.  
The FDC37C93xAPM is specifically designed for  
portable PC systems in which power  
conservation is a primary concern. This makes  
the behavior of the pins during powerdown very  
important.  
The pins of the FDC37C93xAPM can be divided  
into two major categories: system interface and  
floppy disk drive interface. The floppy disk drive  
pins are disabled so that no power will be drawn  
through the part as a result of any voltage  
applied to the pin within the part's power supply  
range. Most of the system interface pins are left  
active to monitor system accesses that may  
wake up the part.  
Access to all other registers is possible without  
awakening the part. These registers can be  
accessed during powerdown without changing  
the status of the part. A read from these  
registers will reflect the true status as shown in  
the register description in the FDC description.  
A write to the part will result in the part retaining  
the data and subsequently reflecting it when the  
System Interface Pins  
part awakens.  
Accessing the part during  
powerdown may cause an increase in the power  
consumption by the part. The part will revert  
back to its low power mode when the access  
has been completed.  
Table 45 gives the state of the system interface  
pins in the powerdown state. Pins unaffected by  
the powerdown are labeled "Unchanged". Input  
pins are "Disabled" to prevent them from  
causing  
currents  
internal  
to  
the  
FDC37C93xAPM when they have indeterminate  
input values.  
112  
Table 44 - PC/AT and PS/2 Available Registers  
Available Registers  
Base + Address  
Access to these registers DOES NOT wake up the part  
PC-AT  
PS/2 (Model 30) Access Permitted  
00H  
01H  
02H  
03H  
04H  
06H  
07H  
07H  
----  
----  
SRA  
SRB  
R
R
DOR (1)  
---  
DOR (1)  
---  
R/W  
---  
W
DSR (1)  
---  
DSR (1)  
---  
---  
R
DIR  
DIR  
CCR  
CCR  
W
Access to these registers wakes up the part  
04H  
05H  
MSR  
Data  
MSR  
Data  
R
R/W  
Note 1: Writing to the DOR or DSR does not wake up the part, however, writing any of the  
motor enable bits or doing a software reset (via DOR or DSR reset bits) will wake up the part.  
Table 45 - State of System Pins in Auto Powerdown  
SYSTEM PINS  
STATE IN AUTO POWERDOWN  
Input Pins  
IOR  
IOW  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
A[0:9]  
D[0:7]  
RESET  
IDENT  
DACKx  
TC  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Unchanged  
Output Pins  
Unchanged (low)  
Unchanged  
IRQx  
DB[0:7]  
DRQx  
Unchanged (low)  
113  
FDD Interface Pins  
Pins used for local logic control or part  
programming are unaffected. Table 46 depicts  
the state of the floppy disk drive interface pins in  
the powerdown state.  
All pins in the FDD interface which can be  
connected directly to the floppy disk drive itself  
are either DISABLED or TRISTATED.  
Table 46 - State of Floppy Disk Drive Interface Pins in Powerdown  
FDD PINS  
STATE IN AUTO POWERDOWN  
Input Pins  
Input  
RDATA  
WP  
Input  
TRK0  
Input  
INDX  
Input  
DRV2  
DSKCHG  
Input  
Input  
Output Pins  
Tristated  
Tristated  
Active  
MOTEN[0:3]  
DS[0:3]  
DIR  
STEP  
Active  
WRDATA  
WE  
Tristated  
Tristated  
Active  
HDSEL  
DENSEL  
DRATE[0:1]  
Active  
Active  
114  
UART Power Management  
Parallel Port  
Direct power management is controlled by  
CR22. Refer to CR22 for more information.  
Direct power management is controlled by  
CR22. Refer to CR22 for more information.  
Auto Power Management is enabled by CR23-  
B4 and B5. When set, these bits allow the  
following auto power management operations:  
Auto power management is enabled by CR23-  
B3. When set, this bit allows the ECP or EPP  
logical parallel port blocks to be placed into  
powerdown when not being used.  
1. The transmitter enters auto powerdown  
when the transmit buffer and shift register  
are empty.  
The EPP logic is in powerdown under any of the  
following conditions:  
2. The receiver enters powerdown when the  
following conditions are all met:  
1. EPP is not enabled in the configuration  
registers.  
A. Receive FIFO is empty  
B. The receiver is waiting for a start bit.  
2. EPP is not selected through ecr while in  
ECP mode.  
Note: While in powerdown the Ring Indicator  
interrupt is still valid and transitions when the  
RI input changes.  
The ECP logic is in powerdown under any of the  
following conditions:  
1. ECP is not enabled in the configuration  
registers.  
Exit Auto Powerdown  
2
SPP, PS/2 Parallel port or EPP mode is  
selected through ecr while in ECP mode.  
The transmitter exits powerdown on a write to  
the XMIT buffer.  
The receiver exits auto  
powerdown when RXDx changes state.  
Exit Auto Powerdown  
The parallel port logic can change powerdown  
modes when the ECP mode is changed through  
the ecr register or when the parallel port mode is  
changed through the configuration registers.  
115  
INTEGRATED DRIVE ELECTRONICS INTERFACE  
The FDC37C93xAPM contains two IDE the AT Task File, and the Miscellaneous AT  
interfaces. This enables hard disks with  
embedded controllers (AT or IDE) to be  
Register.  
interfaced to the host processor.  
The IDE  
ADDRESS 1F0H-1F7H; 170H-177H  
interface performs the address decoding for the  
IDE interface, generates the buffer enables for  
external buffers and provides internal buffers for  
the low byte IDE data transfers. For more  
information, refer to the IDE pin descriptions  
These AT registers contain the Task File  
Registers. These registers communicate data,  
command, and status information with the AT  
host, and are addressed when nHCS0 or nHCS2  
is low.  
and the ATA specification.  
The following  
example uses IDE1 base1=1F0H, base2=3F6H  
and IDE2 base1=170H, base2 =376H.  
ADDRESS 3F6H/376H;  
These AT registers may be used by the BIOS for  
drive control. They are accessed by the AT  
interface when nHCS1 or nHCS3 is active low.  
HOST FILE REGISTERS  
The Host File Registers are accessed by the AT  
Host.  
There are two groups of registers,  
HOST PROCESSOR REGISTER ADDRESS MAP (AT MODE)  
PRIMARY  
1F0H  
SECONDARY  
170H  
|
|
TASK FILE REGISTERS  
MISC AT REGISTERS  
1F7H  
3F6H  
177H  
376H  
and EATA specifications. These are available  
from:  
TASK FILE REGISTERS  
Task File Registers may be accessed by the  
host AT when pin nHDCS0 is active (low). The  
Data Register (1F0H) is 16 bits wide; the  
remaining task file registers are 8 bits wide. The  
Global Engineering  
2805 McGaw Street  
Irvine, CA 92714  
(800) 854-7179 or  
(714) 261-1455  
task file registers are  
ATA  
and EATA  
compatible. Please refer to the ATA  
116  
IDE OUTPUT ENABLES  
Two IDE output Enables are available. The IDE output enables treat all IDE transfers as 16 bit  
transfers.  
nIDE1_OE  
IDE1 (1)  
nIDE2_OE  
IDE2 (2)  
Option 1  
Option 2  
IDE1&IDE2 (3)  
(Not used)  
Note 1:  
Note 2:  
Note 3:  
The low and high byte transfers for IDE1 goes through external buffers controlled by  
IDE1_OE. (Refer to Option 1)  
The low and high byte transfers for IDE2 goes through external buffers controlled by  
IDE2_OE. (Refer to Option 1)  
The low and high byte transfers of IDE1 and IDE2 go through one set of external buffers  
controlled by IDE1. (Refer to Option 2)  
configured to support IDE drives, can be  
programmed as general purpose address  
decoders. Refer to the Configuration Register  
Section, Logical Device 1, CRF0 and CRF1.  
HDCS0 and HDCS1 of IDE1 as General  
Purpose Address Decoders  
HDCS0 and HDCS1 of IDE1, initially  
117  
BIOS BUFFER  
The FDC37C93xAPM contains one 245 type  
This function allows data transmission from the  
RD bus to the SD bus or from the SD bus to the  
buffer that can be used for a BIOS Buffer. If the  
BIOS buffer is not used, then nROMCS and  
nROMDIR must be tied high so as not to  
interfere with the boot ROM.  
RD bus.  
The direction of the transfer is  
controlled by nROMDIR. The enable input,  
nROMCS, can be used to disable the transfer  
and isolate the buses.  
nROMCS  
nROMDIR  
L
L
L
H
X
RD[0:7] data to SD[0:7] bus  
SD[0:7] data to RD[0:7]  
Isolation  
H
SD[15:8]  
IDE Channel 1  
FDC37C93xAPM  
SD[7:0]  
IDE1_OE  
B1  
BIOS  
Option 1  
IDE2_OE  
IDE Channel 2  
FIGURE 2 - IDE OUTPUT ENABLE OPTION 1  
118  
SD[15:8]  
IDE Channel 1  
FDC37C93xAPM  
SD[7:0]  
IDE1_OE  
B1  
BIOS  
Option 2  
IDE2_OE  
NC  
IDE Channel 2  
FIGURE 3 - IDE OUTPUT ENABLE OPTION 2  
119  
floats - cannot use as a bus. Any pin can be  
programmed as an alternate function.  
RD Bus Functionality  
The following four cases described below  
illustrate the use of the RD Bus.  
Case 4: nROMCS and nROMOE as alternate  
function. Same as Case 3.  
Case 1: nROMCS and nROMOE as original  
function. The RD bus can be used as the RD  
bus or one or more RD pins can be  
8042 Functions  
programmed as alternate function.  
These  
The second alternate function for pins 113-118  
are the 8042 functions P12-P17. These are  
implemented as in a true 8042 part. Reference  
the 8042 specification for all timing. A port  
signal of 0 drives the output to 0. A port signal  
of 1 causes the port enable signal to drive the  
output to 1 within 20-30nsec. After several (#  
TBD) clocks, the port enable goes away and the  
internal 90µA pull-up maintains the output signal  
as 1.  
alternate functions behave as follows: if in RD to  
SD mode, any value on RDx will appear on SDx;  
if in SD to RD mode, SDx will not appear on  
RDx, RDx gets the alternate function value.  
Note: In this case, nROMCS=0, nROMOE=1.  
Case 2: nROMOE as alternate function  
(nROMOE internally tied to ground). In this  
case, the RD bus is a unidirectional bus (read  
only) controlled by nROMCS. If nROMCS = 0,  
the values on RD0-7 appear on SD0-7. If  
nROMCS = 1, the RD bus is disabled and  
nothing appears on the SD bus. Note: any RD  
bus pin can be programmed as an alternate  
function, however, if nROMCS=0, then anything  
on the RD bus will appear on the SD bus.  
In 8042 mode, the pins can be programmed as  
open drain. When programmed in open drain  
mode, the port enables do not come into play. If  
the port signal is 0 the output will be 0. If the  
port signal is 1, the output tristates: an external  
pull-up can pull the pin high, and the pin can be  
shared i.e., P12 and nSMI can be externally tied  
together. In 8042 mode, the pins cannot be  
programmed as input nor inverted through the  
GP configuration registers.  
Case 3: nROMCS as alternate function  
(nROMCS internally tied to VDD). The RD bus  
120  
GENERAL PURPOSE I/O FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
The FDC37C93xAPM provides a set of flexible  
General Purpose I/O Ports  
Input/Output control functions to the system  
designer through a set of General Purpose I/O  
pins (GPI/O). These GPI/O pins may perform  
simple I/O or may be individually configured to  
provide a predefined alternate function. Power-  
on reset configures all GPI/O pins as simple  
non-inverting inputs.  
The FDC37C93xAPM has 14 dedicated,  
independently-programmable general purpose  
I/O ports (GPI/O).  
Each GPI/O port is  
represented as a bit in one of two GPI/O 8-bit  
registers, GP1 or GP2. Only 6 bits of GP2 are  
implemented. Each GPI/O port and its alternate  
function is listed in Table 47A.  
Table 47A - General Purpose I/O Port Assignments  
Alternate Alternate Alternate  
Function 1 Function 2  
Pin  
Number  
96  
Original  
Function  
GP10  
Register  
Assignment  
GP1, bit 0  
Function 3  
Interrupt Steering*  
Interrupt Steering*  
WD Timer Output  
Power LED  
-
-
97  
98  
GP11  
GP12  
GP13  
GP14  
IRQ 13  
IRRX Input  
IRTX Output  
-
-
-
-
-
GP1, bit 1  
GP1, bit 2  
GP1, bit 3  
GP1, bit 4  
99  
100  
GP Address  
Decoder  
102  
103  
104  
GP15  
GP16  
GP17  
GP Write Strobe  
-
-
-
-
GP1, bit 5  
GP1, bit 6  
GP1, bit 7  
Joystick RD Strobe Joystick Chip Sel  
Joystick WR  
Strobe  
-
105  
106  
GP20  
GP21  
IDE2 Buffer Enable  
8042 P20  
AB_DATA  
-
-
GP2, bit 0  
GP2, bit 1  
Serial EEPROM  
Data In *  
107  
108  
109  
110  
GP22  
GP23  
GP24  
GP25  
Serial EEPROM  
Data Out  
AB_CLK  
-
-
-
-
GP2, bit 2  
GP2, bit 3  
GP2, bit 4  
GP2, bit 5  
Serial EEPROM  
Clock  
-
-
-
Serial EEPROM  
Enable  
8042 P21  
Note 1: 8042 P21 is normally used for Gate A20  
Note 2: 8042 P20 is normally used for the Keyboard Reset Output  
* These are input-type alternate functions; all other GPI/O pins contain output-type alternate  
functions.  
121  
The FDC37C93xAPM also has 28 GPI/O ports  
that are the first alternate functions of pins  
with other default functions. These pins are  
listed in Table 47B below.  
Table 47B - Multifunction GPI/O Pins  
GPI/O  
PIN  
NUMBER  
19  
ORIGINAL  
FUNCTION  
MEDIA_ID1  
ALTERNATE  
FUNCTION 1  
GP40  
ALTERNATE ALTERNATE  
FUNCTION 2 FUNCTION 3 ASSIGNMENT  
REGISTER  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
GP4, bit 0  
GP4, bit 1  
GP4, bit 2  
GP4, bit 3  
GP4, bit 4  
GP4, bit 5  
GP4, bit 6  
20  
23  
24  
25  
26  
30  
MEDIA_ID0  
nIDE1_OE  
nHDCS0  
GP41  
GP42  
GP43  
GP44  
GP45  
GP46  
-
-
-
nHDCS1  
-
-
IDE1_IRQ  
nIOROP  
Power LED  
Output  
WDT  
31  
33  
nIOWOP  
nPowerOn  
Button_In  
RD0 (1) (3)  
GP47  
GP51  
GP50  
GP60  
nSMI  
-
-
-
-
GP4, bit 7  
GP5, bit 1  
GP5, bit 0  
GP6, bit 0  
-
-
34  
Power LED  
Output  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
153  
154  
155  
156  
RD1 (1) (3)  
RD2 (1) (3)  
RD3 (1) (3)  
RD4 (1) (3)  
RD5 (1) (3)  
RD6 (1) (3)  
RD7 (1) (3)  
nROMCS (1)  
nROMOE (1)  
nRI2 (2)  
GP61  
GP62  
GP63  
GP64  
GP65  
GP66  
GP67  
GP53  
GP54  
GP70  
GP71  
GP72  
GP73  
WDT  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
GP6, bit 1  
GP6, bit 2  
GP6, bit 3  
GP6, bit 4  
GP6, bit 5  
GP6, bit 6  
GP6, bit 7  
GP5, bit 3  
GP5, bit 4  
GP7, bit 0  
GP7, bit 1  
GP7, bit 2  
GP7, bit 3  
8042 - P12  
8042 - P13  
8042 - P14  
8042 - P15  
8042 - P16  
8042 - P17  
-
-
-
-
-
-
nDCD2 (2)  
RXD2 (2)  
TXD2 (2) (3)  
122  
GPI/O  
PIN  
NUMBER  
157  
ORIGINAL  
FUNCTION  
nDSR2 (2)  
ALTERNATE  
FUNCTION 1  
GP74  
ALTERNATE ALTERNATE  
FUNCTION 2 FUNCTION 3 ASSIGNMENT  
REGISTER  
-
-
GP7, bit 4  
158  
nRTS2 (2)  
(3)  
GP75  
-
-
GP7, bit 5  
159  
160  
nCTS2 (2)  
GP76  
GP77  
-
-
-
-
GP7, bit 6  
GP7, bit 7  
nDTR2 (2)  
(3)  
Note 1: At power-up, RD0-RD7, nROMCS and nROMOE function as the XD Bus. To use RD0-  
RD7 for functions other than the XD Bus, nROMCS must stay high until those pins are  
finished being reprogrammed.  
Note 2: These pins are input (high-z) until programmed for second serial port.  
Note 3: These pins cannot be programmed as open drain pins in their original function.  
Note 4: No pins in their original function can be programmed as inverted input or inverted output.  
GPI/O registers GP1 through GP7 as well as the  
Soft Power and SMI Enable and Status  
Registers can be accessed by the host when the  
chip is in the normal run mode if CR03 Bit[7]=1.  
The host uses an Index and Data register to  
access these registers. The Power on default  
Index and Data registers are 0xEA and 0xEB  
respectively. In configuration mode the Index  
address may be programmed to reside on  
addresses 0xE0, 0xE2, 0xE4 or 0xEA. The Data  
address is automatically set to the Index  
address + 1. Upon exiting the configuration  
mode the new Index and Data registers are used  
to access registers GP1 through GP7 and Soft  
Power and SMI Enable and Status Registers.  
To access the GP1 register when in normal  
(run) mode, the host should perform an IOW of  
0x01 to the Index register (at 0xEX) to select  
GP1 and then read or write the Data register (at  
Index+1) to access the GP1 register. To access  
GP2 the host should perform an IOW of 0x02 to  
the Index register and then access GP2 through  
the Data register. GP4-7 and the Soft Power  
and SMI Registers are acessed similarly.  
Additionally the host can access the  
WDT_CTRL (Watch Dog Timer Control)  
Configuration Register while in the normal (run)  
mode by writing an 0x03 to the index register.  
The GP registers can also be accessed by the  
host when in configuration mode through CRF6-  
FB of Logical Device 8.  
123  
Table 48A - Index and Data Register  
REGISTER  
Index  
ADDRESS  
NORMAL (RUN) MODE  
0xE0, E2, E4, EA  
Index address + 1  
0x01-0x0F  
Data  
Access to GP1, GP2,  
Watchdog Timer Control,  
GP4, GP5, GP6, GP7, Soft  
Power and SMI Enable and  
Status Registers (see  
Table 48B)  
Table 48B - Index and Data Register Normal (Run) Mode  
INDEX  
NORMAL (RUN) MODE  
Access to GP1 (L8 - CRF6)  
0x01  
0x02  
0x03  
0x04  
0x05  
0x06  
0x07  
0x08  
0x09  
0x0A  
0x0B  
0x0C  
0x0D  
0x0E  
0x0F  
Access to GP2 (L8 - CRF7)  
Access to Watchdog Timer Control (L8 - CRF4)  
Access to GP4 (L8 - CRF8)  
Access to GP5 (L8 - CRF9)  
Access to GP6 (L8 - CRFA)  
Access to GP7 (L8 - CRFB)  
Access to Soft Power Enable Register 1 (L8-CRB0)  
Access to Soft Power Enable Register 2 (L8-CRB1)  
Access to Soft Power Status Register 1 (L8-CRB2)  
Access to Soft Power Status Register 2 (L8-CRB3)  
Access to SMI Enable Register 1 (L8-CRB4)  
Access to SMI Enable Register 2 (L8-CRB5)  
Access to SMI Status Register 1 (L8-CRB6)  
Access to SMI Status Register 2 (L8-CRB7)  
Note 1: These registers can also be accessed through the configuration registers at L8 -  
CRxx shown in the table above.  
124  
GPI/O ports contain alternate functions which  
are either output-type or input-type. The GPI/O  
port structure  
in the following two figures. Note: the input pin  
buffer is always enabled.  
for each type is illustrated  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
Configuration  
Register bit-1  
(Polarity)  
Configuration  
Register bit-0  
(Input/Output)  
SD-bit  
D-TYPE  
nIOW  
GPI/O  
Pin  
0
Transparent  
0
1
nIOR  
1
GPI/O  
Register  
Bit-n  
GPI/O  
GPIO  
Configuration  
Register bit-3  
(Alt Function)  
Configuration  
Register bit-2  
(Int En)  
Alternate  
Input  
Function  
To GP Interrupt  
FIGURE 4 - GPI/O HAVING AN INPUT-TYPE ALTERNATE FUNCTION [GP10, GP11, GP12, GP21]  
125  
GPIO  
GPI/O  
GPI/O  
Configuration  
Register bit-3  
(Alt Function)  
Configuration  
Register bit-1  
(Polarity)  
Configuration  
Register bit-0  
(Input/Output)  
Alternate  
Output  
Function  
1
0
SD-bit  
nIOW  
D-TYPE  
GPI/O  
Pin  
0
1
Transparent  
0
nIOR  
1
GPI/O  
Register  
Bit-n  
GPI/O  
Configuration  
Register bit-2  
(Int En)  
To GP Interrupt  
FIGURE 5 - GPI/O HAVING AN OUTPUT-TYPE ALTERNATE FUNCTION [GP12 - GP17, GP20,  
GP22 - GP25]  
126  
In addition, the GPI/O port may be optionally  
programmed to steer its signal to a Combined  
General Purpose Interrupt request output pin on  
the FDC37C93xAPM. The interrupt channel for  
the Combined Interrupt is selected by the  
GP_INT Configuration Register defined in the  
FDC37C93xAPM System Configuration Section.  
The Combined Interrupt is the "ORed" function  
of the interrupt enabled GPI/O ports and will  
represent a standard ISA interrupt (edge high).  
General Purpose I/O Configuration Registers  
Assigned to each GPI/O port is an 8-bit GPI/O  
Configuration Register which is used to  
independently program each I/O port. The  
GPI/O Configuration Registers are only  
accessible when the FDC37C93xAPM is in the  
Configuration Mode; more information can be  
found in the Configuration section of this  
specification.  
Each GPI/O port may be programmed as either  
a simple inverting or non-inverting input or  
output port, or as an alternate function port. The  
least-significant four bits of each GPI/O  
Configuration Register define the operation of  
the respective GPI/O port. The basic GPI/O  
operations are outlined in Table 49.  
When programmed as an input steered onto  
the General Purpose Combined Interrupt (GP  
IRQ), the Interrupt Circuitry contains  
a
selectable debounce/digital filter circuit in  
order that switches or push-buttons may be  
directly connected to the chip. This filter will  
reject signals with pulse widths of 1ms or less.  
Table 49 - GPI/O Configuration Register Bits [3:0]  
POLARITY  
ALT FUNC  
BIT 3  
BIT 1  
0=  
INT EN  
BIT 2  
I/O  
BIT 0  
0=  
DISABLE  
1=SELECT  
NO INVERT  
1=INVERT  
GPI/O PORT  
OPERATION  
0=DISABLE  
1=ENABLE  
1=INPUT  
0=OUTPUT  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
simple non-inverting output  
simple non-inverting input  
simple inverting output  
simple inverting input  
non-inverting output steered back to GP  
IRQ  
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
non-inverting input steered to GP IRQ  
inverting output steered back to GP IRQ  
inverting input steered to GP IRQ  
Alternate Function Output-type:  
Alternate non-inverted output.  
Alternate Function Input-type:  
Alternate function not valid, GPI/O pin  
acts as a simple non-inverting output.  
127  
Table 49 - GPI/O Configuration Register Bits [3:0]  
POLARITY  
ALT FUNC  
BIT 3  
BIT 1  
0=  
INT EN  
BIT 2  
I/O  
BIT 0  
0=  
DISABLE  
1=SELECT  
NO INVERT  
1=INVERT  
GPI/O PORT  
OPERATION  
0=DISABLE  
1=ENABLE  
1=INPUT  
0=OUTPUT  
1
0
0
1
1
0
Alternate Function Output-type:  
Alternate function not valid, GPI/O pin  
acts as a simple non-inverting input.  
Alternate Function Input-type:  
Alternate non-inverting input.  
1
0
Alternate Function Output-type:  
Alternate output function with inverted  
sense  
Alternate Function Input-type:  
Alternate function not valid, GPI/O pin  
acts as a simple inverting output.  
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
Alternate Function Output-type:  
Alternate output function not valid,  
GPI/O pin acts as a simple inverting  
input.  
Alternate Function Input-type:  
Inverting input to alternate input  
function.  
Alternate Function Output-type:  
Alternate output function with non  
inverted sense steered to GP IRQ  
Alternate Function Input-type:  
Alternate function not valid, GPI/O pin  
acts as a simple non-inverting output  
steered to GP IRQ  
Alternate Function Output-Type:  
Alternate output function not valid,  
GPI/O pin acts as a simple non-inverting  
input steered to GP IRQ.  
Alternate Function Input-type:  
Non-inverting input to alternate input  
function also steered to the GP IRQ.  
128  
Table 49 - GPI/O Configuration Register Bits [3:0]  
POLARITY  
ALT FUNC  
BIT 3  
BIT 1  
0=  
INT EN  
BIT 2  
I/O  
BIT 0  
0=  
DISABLE  
1=SELECT  
NO INVERT  
1=INVERT  
GPI/O PORT  
OPERATION  
0=DISABLE  
1=ENABLE  
1=INPUT  
0=OUTPUT  
1
1
1
0
Alternate Function Output-type:  
Alternate output function with inverted  
sense steered to GP IRQ  
Alternate Function Input-  
type:Alternate function not valid, GPI/O  
pin acts as a simple inverting output  
steered to GP IRQ.  
1
1
1
1
Alternate Function Output-type:  
Alternate output function not valid,  
GPI/O pin acts as a simple inverting  
input steered to GP IRQ.  
Alternate Function Input-type:  
Inverting input to alternate input function  
also steered to the GP IRQ.  
The alternate function of GP10 and GP11 allows  
these GPI/O port pins to be mapped to their own  
configuration registers is used to select the  
active interrupt channel for each of these ports  
as shown in the Configuration section of this  
specification.  
independent interrupt channels.  
nibble of the GP10 and  
The upper  
GP11 GPI/O  
129  
effect. When a GPI/O port is programmed as  
an output, the logic value written into the GPI/O  
register is either output to or inverted to the  
GPI/O pin; when read the result will reflect the  
contents of the GPI/O register bit. This is  
summarized in Table 50.  
Reading and Writing GPI/O Ports  
When a GPI/O port is programmed as an input,  
reading it through the GPI/O register latches  
either the inverted or non-inverted logic value  
present at the GPI/O pin; writing it has no  
Table 50 - GPI/O Read/Write Behavior  
GPI/O INPUT PORT  
HOST OPERATION  
GPI/O OUTPUT PORT  
Bit Value In GP Register  
Bit Placed In GP Register  
Read  
Write  
Latched Value of GPI/O Pin  
No Effect  
WATCH DOG TIMER/POWER LED CONTROL  
Configuration Registers is set "and" bit 6 of the  
BASIC FUNCTIONS  
IR Options Register is set.  
The FDC37C93xAPM contains a Watch Dog  
Timer (WDT) and also has the capability to  
directly drive the system's Power-on LED.  
Pins 30 (nIOROP/GP46) and 111 (RD0/GP60)  
can also be configured for Power LED.  
The Watch Dog Time-Out status bit  
(WDT_CTRL bit 0) is mapped to GP12 when the  
alternate function bit of the GP12 Configuration  
Register is set "and" bit 6 of the IR Options  
Register = 0. In addition, the Watch Dog Time-  
out status bit may be mapped to an interrupt  
through the WDT_CFG Configuration Register.  
WATCH DOG TIMER  
The  
FDC37C93xAPM's  
WDT  
has  
a
programmable time-out ranging from one to 255  
minutes with one minute resolution, or one to  
255 seconds with one second resolution. The  
units of the WDT timeout value are selected via  
bit 7 of the GPA_GPW_EN register (located at  
0xF1 of Logical Device 8). The WDT time-out  
Pins 30 (nIOROP/GP46) and 112 (RD1/GP61)  
can also be configured for WDT.  
value  
is  
set  
through  
the  
WDT_VAL  
Configuration register. Setting the WDT_VAL  
register to 0x00 disables the WDT function (this  
is its power on default). Setting the WDT_VAL  
to any other non-zero value will cause the WDT  
to reload and begin counting down from the  
value loaded. When the WDT count value  
reaches zero the counter stops and sets the  
Watchdog time-out status bit in the WDT_CTRL  
Configuration Register. Note: Regardless of the  
current state of the WDT, the WDT time-out  
status bit can be directly set or cleared by the  
Host CPU.  
GP13 may be configured as a high current LED  
driver to drive the power LED.  
This is  
accomplished by setting the alternate function  
bit of the GP13 Configuration Register "and"  
clearing bit 6 of the IR Options Register.  
The infared signals, IRRX and IRTX, are  
mapped to GP12 and GP13 when the alternate  
function bit of the GP12 and GP13  
130  
There are three system events which can reset  
the WDT; these are a keyboard interrupt, a  
mouse interrupt, or I/O reads/writes to address  
0x201 (the internal or an external joystick Port).  
The effect on the WDT for each of these system  
events may be individually enabled or disabled  
through bits in the WDT_CFG Configuration  
Register. When a system event is enabled  
through the WDT_CFG register, the occurence  
of that event will cause the WDT to reload the  
value stored in WDT_VAL and reset the WDT  
time-out status bit if set. If all three system  
events are disabled, the WDT will inevitably  
time out.  
The host may force a Watch Dog time-out to  
occur by writing a "1" to bit 2 of the WDT_CTRL  
(Force WD Time-out) Configuration Register.  
Writing a "1" to this bit forces the WDT count  
value to zero and sets bit 0 of the WDT_CTRL  
(Watch Dog Status). Bit 2 of the WDT_CTRL is  
self-clearing.  
POWER LED TOGGLE  
Setting bit 1 of the WDT_CTRL Configuration  
Register will cause the power LED output driver  
to toggle at 1 Hertz with a 50 percent duty cycle.  
When this bit is cleared the power LED output  
will drive continuously unless it has been  
configured to toggle on Watch Dog time-out  
conditions. Setting bit 3 of the WDT_CFG  
configuration register will cause the Power LED  
output driver to toggle at 1 Hertz with a 50  
percent duty cycle whenever the WDT time-out  
status bit is set. The truth table below clarifies  
the conditions for which the Power LED will  
toggle.  
The Watch Dog Timer may be configured to  
generate an interrupt on the rising edge of the  
time-out status bit.  
mapped to an interrupt channel through the  
WDT_CFG Configuration Register. When  
The WDT interrupt is  
mapped to an interrupt the interrupt request pin  
reflects the value of the WDT time-out status bit.  
When the polarity bit is 0, GP12 reflect the value  
of the Watch Dog Time-out status bit, however  
when the polarity bit is 1, GP12 reflects the  
inverted value of the Watch Dog time-out status  
bit. This is also true for the other two pins used  
for WDT, nIOROP (GP46) and RD1 (GP61).  
When the polarity bit is 0, the power LED output  
asserts or drives low. If the polarity bit is 1 then  
the power LED output asserts or drives high.  
Table 51 - LED Toggle Truth Table  
WDT_CFG BIT 3  
POWER LED  
WDT_CTRL BIT 1  
WDT_CTRL BIT 0  
POWER LED TOGGLE  
TOGGLE ON WDT  
POWER LED STATE  
Toggle  
WDT T/O STATUS BIT  
1
0
0
0
X
0
1
1
X
X
0
1
Continuous  
Continuous  
Toggle  
131  
Table 52 - Watchdog Timer/Power LED Configuration Registers  
CONFIG REG.  
WDT_VAL  
BIT FIELD  
Bits[7:0]  
DESCRIPTION  
Binary coded time-out value, 0x00 disables the WDT.  
Joystick enable  
WDT_CFG  
Bit[0]  
Bit[1]  
Keyboard enable  
Bit[2]  
Mouse enable  
Bit[3]  
Power LED toggle on WDT time-out  
Bits[7:4]  
WDT interrupt mapping,  
0000b = diables irq mapping  
WDT_CTRL  
Bit[0]  
WDT time-out status bit  
Bit[1]  
Power LED toggle  
Bit[2]  
Force Timeout, self-clearing  
P20 Force Timeout Enable  
Reserved, set to zero  
Bit[3]  
Bit[4]  
Bit[5,6,7]  
Stop_Cnt, Restart_Cnt, SPOFF: used for Soft power mgt  
GENERAL PURPOSE ADDRESS DECODER  
GENERAL PURPOSE WRITE  
General Purpose I/O pin GP15 may be  
configured as a General Purpose Write pin. The  
General Purpose Write provides an output  
decoded from the 12-bit address stored in a  
two-byte Base I/O Address Register (Logical  
Device 8 Configuration Registers 0x62, 0x63)  
qualified with IOW and AEN. This General  
Purpose output is normally active low, however  
the polarity may be altered through the polarity  
bit in its GPI/O Configuration Register.  
General Purpose I/O pin GP14 may be  
configured as a General Purpose Address  
Decode Pin. The General Purpose Address  
Decoder provides an output decoded from bits  
A11-A1 of the 12-bit address stored in a two-  
byte Base I/O Address Register (Logical Device  
8 Configuration Registers 0x60, 0x61) qualified  
with AEN. Thus, the decoder provides a two  
address decode where A0=X. This General  
Purpose output is normally active low, however  
the polarity may be altered through the polarity  
bit in its GPI/O Configuration Register.  
The GPA_GPW_EN Configuration Register  
contains two bits which allow the General  
Purpose Address Decode and Write functions to  
be independently enabled or disabled.  
The pins nHDCS0 and nHDCS1 can also be  
used as general purpose address decoders. See  
Configuration section, Logical Device 1, for  
more information.  
JOYSTICK CONTROL  
The base I/O address of the Joystick (Game)  
Port is fixed at address 0x201.  
132  
GP16 JOYSTICK FUNCTION  
SERIAL EEPROM INTERFACE  
The FDC37C93xAPM may be configured to  
generate either a Joystick Chip Select or a  
Joystick Read Strobe on GP16. The polarity is  
programmable through a bit in the GP16  
confiugration register. When configured as a  
Joystick Chip Select the output is simply a  
decode of the address = 0x201 qualified by AEN  
active. When configured as a Joystick Read  
Strobe the output is a decode of the address =  
0x201 qualified by IOR and AEN both active.  
The Joystick Chip Select or Read Strobe is  
normally active low, however its polarity is  
programmable through a bit in the GP20  
configuration register.  
Four of the FDC37C93xAPM's general purpose  
I/O pins may be configured to provide a four  
wire direct interface to a family of industry  
standard serial EEPROMs.  
For proper  
operation the polarity bits of these four pins  
must be set to 0 (non-inverting). The interface  
is depicted below and will allow connection to  
either a 93C06 (256-bit), a 93C46 (1K-bit), a  
93C56 (2K-bit), or a 93C66 (4K-bit) device.  
GP21 <---- Serial EEPROM Data In  
GP22 ----> Serial EEPROM Data Out  
GP23 ----> Serial EEPROM Clock  
GP24 ----> Serial EEPROM Enable  
Reset out is an internal signal from the keyboard  
controller (Port 20). The FDC37C93xAPM may  
be configured to drive this signal onto GP20 by  
programming its GPI/O configuration register.  
GP17 JOYSTICK FUNCTION  
The FDC37C93xAPM may be configured to  
generate a Joystick Write Strobe on GP17.  
When configured as a Joystick Write Strobe the  
output is a decode of the address = 0x201  
qualified by IOW and AEN both active.  
Access to the serial EEPROM is only available  
when the FDC37C93xAPM is in the  
configuration mode. A set of six configuration  
registers, located in Logical Device 6 (RTC) is  
used to fully access and configure the serial  
EEPROM. The registers are defined as follows:  
The Joystick Write Strobe is normally active  
low, however, its polarity is programmable  
through a bit in the GP20 configuration register.  
Serial EEPROM Mode Register, 0xF1  
IDE2 BUFFER ENABLE/RESET OUT  
The FDC37C93xAPM may be configured to  
provide an nIDE2_OE buffer enable signal on  
pin GP20. The IDE2 Mode Register (0xF0 of  
BIT 3 and 0  
These are the lock bits which once set deny  
access to the serial EEPROM's first 128 bytes in  
32 byte blocks. Bit 0 locks the first block, bit 1  
the second block, bit 2 the third block and bit 3  
the fourth block of 32 bytes. Once these lock  
bits are set they cannot be reset in any way  
other than by a Hard reset or a power-on reset.  
Logical Device 2) contains  
a
bit which  
determines whether nIDE1_OE or nIDE2_OE is  
active for IDE2 transfers. If GP20 is selected  
as a General Purpose I/O pin, IDE2 I/O  
accesses must be configured to activate  
nIDE1_OE for IDE2 transfers if a secondary  
hard drive interface is present.  
BIT 4  
This selects the type of EEPROM connected to  
the FDC37C93xAPM. If cleared the device must  
be either a 93C06 or 93C46 and if set the device  
must be either an 93C56 or 93C66. This bit  
must be properly set before attempting to  
access the serial EEPROM.  
The polarity of nIDE2_OE, which is normally  
active low, is programmable through a bit in the  
GP20 configuration register.  
133  
When = (0,0) bit 1 is cleared on the second  
write of the Write EEPROM Data register  
indicating that two bytes have been accepted  
and that the serial device interface is busy  
writing the word to the EEPROM.  
BIT 7 - 5  
Reserved, set to zero.  
Serial EEPROM Pointer Register, 0xF2  
BIT 7 - 0  
BIT 6 - 2  
Use this register to set the Serial EEPROM's  
Reserved, set to “0”  
pointer.  
The value in this register always  
reflects the current EEPROM pointer address.  
The Serial Device Pointer increments after each  
pair of reads from the Resource Data register or  
after each pair of writes to the Program  
Resource Data register.  
BIT 7  
This bit is cleared to configure the EEPROM  
interface for Read operations. Clearing this bit  
enables the serial EEPROM prefetch when the  
Serial EEPROM Pointer Register is updated  
(written or auto-incremented).  
Write EEPROM Data Register, 0xF3  
This bit is set to configure the EEPROM  
interface for Write operations. Setting this bit  
disables the serial EEPROM prefetch when the  
Serial EEPROM Pointer Register is updated  
(written or auto-incremented).  
BIT 7 - 0  
This register allows the host to write data into  
the serial EEPROM.  
supports serial EEPROMS  
The FDC37C93xAPM  
with x16  
configurations. Two bytes must be written to  
this register in order to generate an EEPROM  
write cycle. The LSB leads the MSB. The first  
write to this register resets bit 0 of the Write  
Status register. The second write resets bit 1 of  
the Write Status register and generates a write  
cycle to the serial EEPROM. The Write Status  
register must be polled before performing a pair  
of writes to this register.  
Read EEPROM Data Register, 0xF5  
BIT 7 - 0  
This register allows the host to read data from  
the serial EEPROM. Data is not valid in this  
register until bit 0 of the Read Status Register is  
set. Since the EEPROM is a 16-bit device this  
register presents the LSB followed by the MSB  
for each pair of register reads. Immediately after  
the MSB is read bit-0 of the Read Status  
Register will be cleared, then the Serial  
EEPROM Pointer Register will be auto-  
incremented, then the next word of EEPROM  
data will be fetched, followed by the Read  
Status Register, bit 0 being set.  
Write Status Register, 0xF4  
BIT 1 and 0  
When = (1,1)Indicates that the Write EEPROM  
Data register is ready to accept a pair of bytes.  
When = (1,0) bit 0 is cleared on the first write of  
the Write EEPROM Data register. This status  
indicates that the serial device controller has  
received one byte (LSB) and is waiting for the  
second byte (MSB).  
Read Status Register, 0xF6  
Bit[0]  
When set, indicates that data in the Read  
EEPROM Data register is valid. This bit is  
cleared when EEPROM Data is read until the  
next byte is valid. Reading the Read EEPROM  
Data register when bit 0 is clear will have no  
detremental effects; the data will simply be  
invalid.  
134  
pin. In addition, if this function is selected, then  
the bits that control in/out, polarity and open  
collector/push-pull will have no effect on the  
function of the pin. However, the polarity will  
affect the value of the GP bit.  
GATEA20  
GATEA20 is an internal signal from the  
Keyboard  
FDC37C93xAPM may be configured to drive this  
signal onto GP25 by programming its GPI/O  
Configuration Register. See the 8042 Keyboard  
Controller Section for more information.  
controller  
(Port  
21).  
The  
An interrupt occurs if the status bit is set and the  
interrupt is enabled. The status bits indicate  
which of these interrupts transitioned. These  
status bits are located in the MSC_STS register  
(See ACPI section). These bits are cleared by a  
writing a 1 to their respective bit locations  
(writing a 0 has no effect). The status is valid  
whether the interrupt is enabled or not and  
whether or not the pin is selected for either edge  
triggered interrupt.  
EITHER EDGE TRIGGERED INTERRUPTS  
Three GPIOs will allow an interrupt to be  
generated on either a high-to-low or low-to-high  
edge transition, instead of one or the other as  
selected by the polarity bit. These GPIOs,  
GP42, GP23, GP24, pins 23, 108, 109,  
respectively, can be used to detect system  
changes.  
Note: These additional interrupts will go through  
the same selectable debounce/digital filter  
circuit as any interrupt that is steered onto one  
of the GP group interrupts.  
Note: These pins are enabled as interrupts by  
selecting the “Either Edge Triggered Interrupt  
Input  
x Enable” function through bits[4:3].  
These interrupts function as follows: when an  
edge comes in, an interrupt is generated and the  
status bit is set. When the interrupt is serviced,  
the status bit is cleared. When the next edge  
comes in, an interrupt is generated and the  
status bit is set. Again, when the interrupt is  
serviced, the status bit is cleared. See Figure 6  
below.  
Selecting the “Either Edge Triggered Interrupt  
Input x Enable” function for these GPI/O pins is  
only applicable if the combined interrupt is  
enabled (GP42 can be enabled onto either  
GPINT1 or GPINT2; GP23 and GP24 can be  
enabled onto GPINT1). Otherwise, selection of  
this function will produce no function for the  
GPI/O Pin  
GP Interrupt  
Cleared by a Write to the  
Status Bit  
FIGURE 6 - EITHER EDGE TRIGGERED INTERRUPT TIMING EXAMPLE  
135  
8042 KEYBOARD CONTROLLER AND REAL TIME CLOCK FUNCTIONAL  
DESCRIPTION  
The FDC37C93xAPM is a Ultra I/O, Real Time  
Clock and Universal Keyboard Controller de-  
signed for intelligent keyboard management in  
desktop computer applications. The Ultra I/O  
supports a floppy disk controller, two 16550-  
type serial ports, one ECP/EPP parallel port and  
two IDE drive interfaces with support for four  
drives.  
The Universal Keyboard Controller uses an  
8042 microcontroller CPU core. This section  
concentrates  
enhancements to the 8042.  
on  
the  
FDC37C93xAPM  
For general  
information about the 8042, refer to the "Hard-  
ware Description of the 8042" in the 8-Bit  
Embedded Controller Handbook.  
P24  
P25  
P21  
P20  
KIRQ  
MIRQ  
GP25  
GP20 (WD Timer)  
8042A  
LS05  
P27  
P10  
KDAT  
KCLK  
MCLK  
MDAT  
P26  
TST0  
P23  
TST1  
P22  
P11  
FIGURE 6 - KEYBOARD AND MOUSE INTERFACE  
KIRQ is the Keyboard IRQ  
MIRQ is the Mouse IRQ  
GP25 - Port 21 is GP25's alternate function output and can be used to create a GATEA20 signal from  
the FDC37C93xAPM.  
GP20 - This general purpose output can be configured as the 8042 Port 2.0 which is typically used to  
create a "keyboard reset" signal. The 8042's P20 can be used to optionally reset the Watch Dog  
Timer.  
136  
KEYBOARD AND RTC ISA INTERFACE  
The FDC37C93xAPM ISA interface  
functionally compatible with the 8042-style host  
interface. It consists of the D0-7 data bus, the  
nIOR, nIOW and the Status register,  
Input Data register, and Output Data register.  
Table 53 shows how the interface decodes the  
control signals. In addition to the above signals,  
the host interface includes keyboard and mouse  
IRQs.  
is  
Table 53 - ISA I/O Address Map  
Addresses 0x60, 0x64, 0x70 and 0x71 are qualified by AEN  
ISA ADDRESS (NOTE 1)  
0x70 (R/W)  
BLOCK  
RTC  
FUNCTION  
Address Register  
Data Register  
0x71 (R/W)  
RTC  
Bank 0 is at 70h. Bank 1 and 2 are relocatable via the RTC Mode Register and the Secondary Base  
Address for RTC Bank 1 and 2 (CR62 and CR63). See Configuration section.  
ISA ADDRESS  
nIOW  
nIOR  
BLOCK  
KDATA  
KDATA  
KDCTL  
KDCTL  
FUNCTION*  
Keyboard Data Write (C/D=0)  
Keyboard Data Read  
0x60  
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0x64  
Keyboard Command Write (C/D=1)  
Keyboard Status Read  
Note*:  
These registers consist of three separate 8 bit registers: Status, Data/Command Write  
and Data Read.  
Keyboard Data Write  
Keyboard Command Write  
This is an 8 bit write only register. When  
written, the C/D status bit of the status register  
is cleared to zero and the IBF bit is set.  
This is an 8 bit write only register. When  
written, the C/D status bit of the status register  
is set to one and the IBF bit is set.  
Keyboard Data Read  
Keyboard Status Read  
This is an 8 bit read only register. If enabled by  
"ENABLE FLAGS", when read, the KIRQ output  
is cleared and the OBF flag in the status register  
is cleared. If not enabled, the KIRQ and/or  
AUXOBF1 must be cleared in software.  
This is an 8 bit read only register. Refer to the  
description of the Status Register for more  
information.  
RTC Address Register  
Writing to this register sets the CMOS address  
that will be read or written.  
137  
RTC Data Register  
CPU-to-Host Communication  
A read of this register will read the contents of  
the selected CMOS register. A write to this  
register will write to the selected CMOS register.  
The FDC37C93xAPM CPU can write to the Out-  
put Data register via register DBB. A write  
to this register automatically sets Bit 0 (OBF) in  
the Status register. See Table 54.  
Table 54 - Host Interface Flags  
8042 INSTRUCTION  
FLAG  
OUT DBB  
Set OBF, and, if enabled, the KIRQ output signal goes high  
If "EN FLAGS” has not been executed, KIRQ  
can be controlled by writing to P24. Writing a  
Host-to-CPU Communication  
“0” to P24 forces KIRQ low; a high forces KIRQ  
high.  
The host system can send both commands and  
data to the Input Data register. The CPU  
differentiates between commands and data by  
reading the value of Bit 3 of the Status register.  
When bit 3 is "1", the CPU interprets the register  
contents as a command. When bit 3 is "0", the  
CPU interprets the register contents as data.  
During a host write operation, bit 3 is set to "1" if  
SA2 = 1 or reset to "0" if SA2 = 0.  
MIRQ  
If "EN FLAGS" has been executed and P25 is  
set to a “1”, IBF is inverted and gated onto  
MIRQ. The MIRQ signal can be connected to  
system  
interrupt  
to  
signify  
that  
the  
FDC37C93xAPM’s CPU has read the DBB  
register.  
KIRQ  
If "EN FLAGS” has not been executed, MIRQ is  
controlled by P25, Writing a “0” to P25 forces  
MIRQ low; a high forces MIRQ high. (MIRQ is  
normally selected as IRQ12 for mouse support.)  
If "EN FLAGS" has been executed and P24 is  
set to a one: the OBF flag is gated onto KIRQ.  
The KIRQ signal can be connected to system  
interrupt to signify that the FDC37C93xAPM’s  
CPU has written to the output data register via  
"OUT DBB,A". If P24 is set to a “0”, KIRQ is  
forced low. On power-up, after a valid RST  
pulse has been delivered to the device, KIRQ is  
reset to 0. KIRQ will normally reflects the status  
of writes "DBB". (KIRQ is normally selected as  
IRQ1 for keyboard support.)  
Gate A20  
A general purpose P21 can be routed out to the  
general purpose pin GP25 for use as  
a
software-controlled Gate A20 or user-defined  
output.  
138  
interrupt and the IBF interrupt is enabled, then  
program execution resumes with a CALL to the  
interrupt routine, otherwise the next instruction  
is executed. If it is exited using RESET, then a  
normal reset sequence is initiated and program  
execution starts from program memory location  
0.  
EXTERNAL  
INTERFACE  
KEYBOARD  
AND  
MOUSE  
Industry-standard PC/AT-compatible keyboards  
employ a two-wire, bidirectional TTL interface  
for data transmission. Several sources also  
supply PS/2 mouse products that employ the  
same type of interface. To facilitate system  
expansion, the FDC37C93xAPM provides four  
signal pins that may be used to implement this  
interface directly for an external keyboard and  
mouse.  
Hard Powerdown Mode  
This mode is entered by executing a STOP  
instruction. The oscillator is stopped by  
disabling the oscillator driver  
either RESET is driven active or a data byte is  
written to the DBBIN register by master  
CPU, this mode will be exited (as above).  
However, as the oscillator cell will require an  
initialization time, either RESET must be held  
active for sufficient time to allow the oscillator to  
stabilise. Program execution will resume as  
above.  
cell. When  
The FDC37C93xAPM has four high-drive, open-  
drain output, bidirectional port pins that can be  
used for external serial interfaces, such as ISA  
external keyboard and PS/2-type mouse  
interfaces. They are KCLK, KDAT, MCLK, and  
MDAT. P26 is inverted and output as KCLK.  
The KCLK pin is connected to TEST0. P27 is  
inverted and output as KDAT. The KDAT pin is  
connected to P10. P23 is inverted and output  
as MCLK. The MCLK pin is connected to  
TEST1. P22 is inverted and output as MDAT.  
The MDAT pin is connected to P11. Note:  
External pull-ups may be required.  
a
INTERRUPTS  
The FDC37C93xAPM provides the two 8042  
interrupts, IBF and the Timer/Counter Overflow.  
KEYBOARD POWER MANAGEMENT  
MEMORY CONFIGURATIONS  
The keyboard provides support for two power-  
saving modes: soft powerdown mode and hard  
powerdown mode. In soft powerdown mode,  
the clock to the ALU is stopped but the  
timer/counter and interrupts are still active. In  
hard power down mode the clock to the 8042 is  
The FDC37C93xAPM provides 2K of on-chip  
ROM and 256 bytes of on-chip RAM.  
REGISTER DEFINITIONS  
Host I/F Data Register  
stopped.  
Efforts must be made to reduce  
power wherever possible!  
The Input Data register and Output Data register  
are each 8 bits wide. A write to this 8 bit register  
will load the Keyboard Data Read Buffer, set the  
OBF flag and set the KIRQ output if enabled. A  
read of this register will read the data from the  
Keyboard Data or Command Write Buffer and  
clear the IBF flag. Refer to the KIRQ and Status  
register descriptions for more information.  
Soft Powerdown Mode  
This mode is entered by executing a HALT  
instruction. The execution of program code is  
halted until either RESET is driven active or a  
data byte is written to the DBBIN register by a  
master CPU. If this mode is exited using the  
139  
Host I/F Status Register  
The Status register is 8 bits wide. Table 55 shows the contents of the Status register.  
Table 55 - Status Register  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
UD  
UD  
UD  
UD  
C/D  
UD  
IBF  
OBF  
Status Register  
OBF  
Output Buffer Full  
This flag is set to  
1
whenever the  
This register is cleared on a reset. This register  
is read-only for the Host and read/write by the  
FDC37C93xAPM CPU.  
FDC37C93xAPM CPU write to the output data  
register (DBB). When the host system reads  
the output data register, this bit is automatically  
reset.  
UD  
Writeable by FDC37C93xAPM CPU. These bits  
are user-definable.  
EXTERNAL CLOCK SIGNAL  
The FDC37C93xAPM’s X1K clock source is a 12  
MHz clock generated from a 14.318 MHz clock.  
The reset pulse must last for at least 24 16  
C/D  
Command Data  
This bit specifies whether the input data register  
contains data or a command (0 = data, 1 =  
command). During a host data/command write  
operation, this bit is set to "1" if SA2 = 1 or reset  
to "0" if SA2 = 0.  
MHz clock periods.  
requirement applies to both internally - and  
externally generated reset signals. In  
The pulse-width  
-
powerdown mode, the external clock signal on  
X1K is not loaded by the chip.  
IBF  
The FDC37C93xAPM’s X1C clock source must  
be from a crystal connected across X1C and  
X2C. Due to the low current internal oscillator  
circuit, this X1C can not be driven by an external  
clock signal.  
Input Buffer Full  
This flag is set to 1 whenever the host system  
writes data into the input data register. Setting  
this flag activates the FDC37C93xAPM CPU's  
nIBF (MIRQ) interrupt if enabled. When the  
FDC37C93xAPM’s CPU reads the input data  
register (DBB), this bit is automatically reset and  
the interrupt is cleared. There is no output pin  
associated with this internal signal.  
DEFAULT RESET CONDITIONS  
The FDC37C93xAPM has one source of reset,  
an external reset via the RESET pin. Refer to  
Table 56 for the effect of each type of reset on  
the internal registers.  
140  
Table 56 - Resets  
HARDWARE RESET (RESET)  
DESCRIPTION  
KCLK  
Weak High  
Weak High  
Weak High  
Weak High  
N/A  
KDAT  
MCLK  
MDAT  
Host I/F Data Reg  
Host I/F Status Reg  
RTCCNTRL  
RTCADDR  
RTCDATA  
00H  
80H  
NC  
NC  
NC: No Change N/A: Not Applicable  
GATEA20 AND KEYBOARD RESET  
Port 92 Fast GateA20 and Keyboard Reset  
The FDC37C93xAPM provides several options  
for GateA20 and Keyboard Reset: 8042  
Software Generated GateA20 and KRESET,  
Fast GateA20 and KRESET (via Hardware  
Speed-up) and Port 92 Fast GateA20 and  
KRESET.  
Port 92 Register  
This port can only be read or written if Port 92  
has been enabled via bit 2 of the KRST_GA20  
Register (Logical Device 7, 0xF0) set to 1.  
This register is used to support the alternate  
reset (nALT_RST) and alternate A20 (ALT_A20)  
functions.  
NAME  
Location  
PORT 92  
92h  
Default Value 24h  
Attribute  
Size  
Read/Write  
8 bits  
141  
Table 57 - Port 92 Register  
FUNCTION  
Reserved. Returns 00 when read.  
BIT  
7:6  
5
Reserved. Returns a 1 when read.  
4
Reserved. Returns a 0 when read.  
3
Reserved. Returns a 0 when read.  
2
Reserved. Returns a 1 when read.  
1
ALT_A20 Signal control. Writing a 0 to this bit causes the ALT_A20 signal to  
be driven low. Writing a 1 to this bit causes the ALT_A20 signal to be driven  
high.  
0
Alternate System Reset. This read/write bit provides an alternate system reset  
function. This function provides an alternate means to reset the system CPU to  
effect a mode switch from Protected Virtual Address Mode to the Real Address  
Mode. This provides a faster means of reset than is provided by the Keyboard  
controller. This bit is set to a 0 by a system reset. Writing a 1 to this bit will  
cause the nALT_RST signal to pulse acitive (low) for a minimum of 1 µs after a  
delay of 500 ns. Before another nALT_RST pulse can be generated, this bit  
must be written back to a 0.  
Table 58 - nGATEA20  
8042  
System  
P21  
0
0
1
1
ALT_A20  
nA20M  
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Bit 0 of Port 92, which generates the nALT_RST  
signal, is used to reset the CPU under program  
The diagram on the following page illustrates  
the generation of the nALT_RST function. If  
software control is selected, i.e., bit 0 of  
KRST_GA20 is set to 0, the reset pulse is  
generated by the 8042 upon writing an FE  
command to register 64. If hardware speed-up  
is selected, i.e., bit 0 of KRST_GA20 is set to 1,  
the reset pulse is generated in hardware upon  
writing an FE command to register 64.  
control.  
This signal is AND’ed together  
externally with the reset signal (nKBDRST) from  
the keyboard controller to provide a software  
means of resetting the CPU. This provides a  
faster means of reset than is provided by the  
keyboard controller. Writing a 1 to bit 0 in the  
Port 92 Register causes this signal to pulse low  
for a minimum of 6µs after a delay of a  
minimum of 14µs. Before another nALT_RST  
pulse can be generated, bit 0 must be set to 0  
either by a system reset of a write to Port 92.  
Upon reset, this signal is driven inactive high (bit  
0 in the Port 92 Register is set to 0).  
In addition, if Port 92 is enabled, i.e., bit 2 of  
KRST_GA20 is set to 1, then a pulse is also  
generated by writing a 1 to bit 0 of the Port 92  
Register and this pulse is ANDed with the  
142  
pulse generated above. This pulse is output on  
pin KRESET and its polarity is controlled by the  
GPI/O polarity configuration.  
14us  
6us  
8042  
P20  
KRST  
MUX  
FE  
Command  
GPI/O Polarity  
Config  
Pulse  
Gen  
KRST_GA20  
Bit 0  
KRESET  
KRST_GA20  
P92  
Bit 2  
nALT_RST  
Bit 0  
Pulse  
Gen  
14us  
Note: When Port 92 is disabled,  
writes are ignored and reads  
return undefined values.  
6us  
FIGURE 7 - KRESET GENERATION  
Bit 1 of Port 92, the ALT_A20 signal, is used to  
force nA20M to the CPU low for support of real  
low. Writing a 1 to bit 1 of the Port 92 Register  
forces ALT_A20 high. ALT_A20 high drives  
nA20M to the CPU high, regardless of the state  
of A20GATE from the keyboard controller. Upon  
reset, this signal is driven low.  
mode compatible software.  
This signal is  
externally OR’ed with the A20GATE signal from  
the keyboard controller and CPURST to control  
the nA20M input of the CPU. Writing a 0 to bit 1  
of the Port 92 Register forces ALT_A20 low.  
ALT_A20 low drives nA20M to the CPU low, if  
A20GATE from the keyboard controller is also  
The diagram on the following page illustrates  
the logic for the generation of the Gate A20  
signal.  
143  
GateA20 Logic  
64&nAEN  
KRST_GA20  
Bit 1  
A
nIOW  
nIOW  
DD1  
nIOW  
DFF  
DFE  
8042  
Address  
A
KRST_GA20  
Bit 0  
CPURST  
To KRESET Gen  
GPI/O Polarity  
Config  
nAEN&60  
A20GATE  
nIOW  
GA20  
MUX  
GateA20  
DD1  
After D1  
D[1]  
nIOW  
KRST_GA20  
Bit 1  
nAEN&64  
nIOW  
D
KRST_GA20  
Bit 2  
nAEN&60  
Trailing Edge Delay  
ALT_A20  
P92  
Bit 1  
Delay  
VCC  
Note: When Port 92 is disabled,  
writes are ignored and reads  
return undefined values.  
A
nIOW  
24MHz  
Note: Use 64 and 60 or the alternate addresses  
for command and data ports.  
FIGURE 8 - GATEA20 GENERATION LOGIC  
The timing for a D1 command write followed by  
data write is shown on the following  
page. This is the GATEA20 turn-on sequence  
shown in the Table “GATE20 Command/Data  
Sequence Examples”.  
a
144  
0ns  
250ns  
500ns  
CLK  
AEN  
nAEN  
64=I/O Addr  
n64  
nIOW  
nA  
DD1  
nDD1  
nCNTL  
nIOW'  
nIOW+n64  
AfterD1  
nAfterD1  
60=I/O Addr  
n60  
nIOW+n60=B  
nAfterD1+B  
D[1]  
GA20  
FIGURE 9 - GATE A20 TURN-ON SEQUENCE TIMING  
When writing to the command and data port  
setup time is only required to be met when using  
hardware speedup; the data must be valid a  
minimum of 0 nsec from the leading edge of  
the write and held throughout the entire write  
cycle.  
with hardware speedup, the IOW timing shown  
in the figure titled “IOW Timing for Port 92” in  
the Timing Diagrams Section is used. This  
145  
hardware speed-up feature. GATEA20 from the  
chip is part of the control required to mask  
address line A20 to emulate 8086 addressing.  
FAST GATEA20 AND KEYBOARD RESET  
GATEA20/KRESET Hardware Speed-Up  
GATEA20 and KRESET is configured via a byte  
at F0 in the keyboard configuration space,  
Logical Device 7. The byte is defined below.  
The FDC37C93xAPM contains on-chip logic  
support for the GATEA20 and KRESET  
Table 59 - GATEA20/KRESET  
REG INDEX DESCRIPTION  
0xF0  
NAME  
STATE  
KRST_GA20  
Bits[7:3] Reserved  
C
Bit[2] Port 92 Select  
= 0 Port 92 Disabled  
= 1 Port 92 Enabled  
Bit[1] GATEA20 Select  
= 0 8042 Software Control  
= 1 Hardware Speed-up  
Bit[0] KRESET Select  
= 0 8042 Software Control  
= 1 Hardware Speed-up  
When the chip receives a "D1" command  
followed by data (via the host interface), the on-  
chip hardware copies the value of data bit 1 in  
the received data field to the GATEA20 host  
latch. It also copies the value of D[0] to  
KRESET latch. At no time during this host-  
interface transaction will PCOBF or the IBF flag  
(bit 1) in the Status register be activated; i.e.,  
this host control of GATEA20 is transparent to  
firmware, with no consequent degradation of  
overall system performance. Table 60 details  
the possible GATEA20 sequences and the chip  
responses.  
On VCC1 POR, GATEA20 and KRESET pins  
will float.  
GATEA20 comes from either the software  
control or hardware speed-up and they are  
mutually exclusive.  
If Port 92 is enabled,  
GATEA20 from one of these two are merged  
along with Port 92. See Port 92 Section.  
KRESET comes from either the software control  
or hardware speed-up and they are mutually  
exclusive. If Port 92 is enabled, KRESET from  
one of these two are merged along with Port 92.  
See Port 92 Section.  
146  
Table 60 - GATEA20 Command/Data Sequence Examples  
IBF  
SA2  
R/W  
D[0:7]  
FLAG  
GATEA20  
COMMENTS  
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
D1  
D[1]=1  
FF  
D1  
D[1]=0  
FF  
D1  
D1  
D[1]=1  
FF  
D1  
D1  
D[1]=0  
FF  
D1  
XX**  
FF  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Q
1
Q
Q
0
Q
Q
Q
1
Q
Q
Q
0
GATEA20 Turn-on Sequence  
GATEA20 Turn-off Sequence  
GATEA20 Turn-on Sequence(*)  
GATEA20 Turn-off Sequence(*)  
Invalid Sequence  
Q
Q
Q
Q
Notes:  
"Q" indicates the bit remains set at the previous state.  
*Not a standard sequence.  
**XX = Anything except D1.  
If multiple data bytes, set IBF and wait at state 0. Let the software know something unusual  
happened.  
For data bytes SA2=0, only D[1] is used; all other bits are don't care.  
The polarity control bit for GPI/O controls the polarity of GATEA20.  
Table 61 below details the possible KRESET sequences and the chip responses.  
Table 61 - KRESET Command/Data Sequence Examples  
IBF  
SA2  
R/W  
D[0:7]  
FLAG  
COMMENTS  
1
W
FE  
0
Pulse KRESET  
When an FE command is received, pulse  
KRESET. KRESET is pulsed low for  
The polarity control bit for GPI/O controls the  
polarity of KRESET.  
a
minimum of 6µs pulse width after a minimum of  
a 14µs delay.  
147  
RTC Reset  
REAL TIME CLOCK  
The clock, calendar, or RAM functions are not  
affected by the system reset (RESET_DRV  
active). When the RESET_DRV pin is active  
(i.e., system reset) and the battery voltage is  
above 1 volt nominal, the following occurs:  
The Real Time Clock is a complete time of day  
clock with two alarms, calendar (up to the year  
9999), a programmable periodic interrupt, and a  
programmable square wave generator.  
Features  
1. Periodic Interrupt Enable (PIE) is cleared to  
0.  
2. Alarm Interrupt Enable (AIE) bit is cleared  
to 0.  
3. Update Ended Interrupt Enable (UIE) bit is  
cleared to 0.  
4. Update Ended Interrupt Flag (UF) bit is  
cleared to 0.  
5. Interrupt Request Status Flag (IRQF) bit is  
cleared to 0.  
6. Periodic Interrupt Flag (PIF) is cleared to 0.  
7. The RTC and CMOS registers are not  
accessable.  
·
·
Counts seconds, minutes, and hours of the  
day.  
Counts days of the week, date, month, year  
and century.  
·
·
·
Time of Day Alarm  
Time Of Century Wake-Up Alarm  
Binary or BCD representation of time,  
calendar and alarms.  
·
·
Three interrupts  
software maskable. (No daylight savings  
time!)  
-
each is separately  
256 Bytes of CMOS RAM.  
8. Alarm Interrupt Flag (AF) is cleared to 0.  
9. nIRQ pin is in high impedance state.  
Port Definition and Description  
When RESET_DRV is active and the battery  
voltage is below 1 volt nominal, the following  
occurs:  
OSC  
Crystal Oscillator input. Maximum clock  
frequency is 32.768 kHz.  
1. Registers 00-0D are initialized to 00h.  
2. Access to all registers from the host or  
FDC37C93xAPM’s CPU (8042) are blocked.  
148  
RTC Interrupt  
to a non-zero value. If IRQ 8 is selected then  
the polarity of this IRQ output is  
programmable through a bit in the OSC Global  
Configuration Register.  
8
The interrupt generated by the RTC is an active  
high output. The RTC interrupt output remains  
high as long as the status bit causing the  
interrupt is present and the corresponding  
interrupt-enable  
bit  
is  
set.  
Activating  
INTERNAL REGISTERS  
RESET_DRV or reading register C clears the  
RTC interrupt.  
Table 62A shows the address map of the RTC,  
ten bytes of time, calendar, and alarm 1 data,  
four control and status bytes and 114 bytes of  
"CMOS" registers.  
The RTC Interrupt is brought out by  
programming the RTC Primary Interrupt Select  
Table 62A - Real Time Clock Address Map, Bank 0  
ADDRESS  
REGISTER TYPE  
REGISTER FUNCTION  
Register 0: Seconds  
0
1
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
Register 1: Seconds Alarm 1  
Register 2: Minutes  
2
3
Register 3: Minutes Alarm 1  
Register 4: Hours  
4
5
Register 5: Hours Alarm 1  
Register 6: Day of Week  
Register 7: Date of Month  
Register 8: Month  
6
7
8
9
Register 9: Year  
A
Register A:  
B
Register B: (Bit 0 is Read Only)  
Register C:  
C
D
E-7F  
R
Register D:  
R/W  
Register E-7F: General Purpose  
All 14 bytes are directly writable and readable by  
the host with the following exceptions:  
a. Registers C and D are read only  
b. Bit 7 of Register A is read only  
c. Bits 0 of Register B is read only  
149  
Table 62B shows Bank 1, the second bank of  
CMOS registers which contains an additional  
128 bytes of general purpose CMOS registers.  
All 128 bytes are directly writeable and readable  
by the host.  
Table 62B - Real Time Clock Address Map, Bank 1  
ADDRESS  
REGISTER TYPE  
REGISTER FUNCTION  
0-7F  
R/W  
Register 0-7F: General Purpose  
Table 62C shows the address map of Bank 2,  
the third bank of CMOS registers, which contain  
the registers for the century byte and the second  
alarm function.  
All 9 bytes are directly writable and readable by  
the host.  
Table 62C - Real Time Clock Address Map, Bank 2  
ADDRESS  
REGISTER TYPE  
REGISTER FUNCTION  
Register 0: Century Byte  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Register 1: Seconds Alarm 2  
Register 2: Minutes Alarm 2  
Register 3: Hours Alarm 2  
Register 4: Day of Week Alarm 2  
Register 5: Date of Month Alarm 2  
Register 6: Month Alarm 2  
Register 7: Year Alarm 2  
Register 8: Control Register 1  
Note: One or two of the three banks of CMOS  
Registers are selected via the RTC Mode  
Register (Logical Device 6, 0xF0). Banks 1 and  
2 are also relocatable via the RTC Mode  
Register and the Secondary Base Address  
(CR62 and CR63). See Configuration Section.  
and seven alarm 2 bytes can also be in binary  
or BCD as shown in Table 63B.  
Before initializing the internal registers, the SET  
bit in Register B should be set to a "1" to prevent  
time/calendar updates from occurring. The  
program initializes the ten locations in the binary  
or BCD format as defined by the DM bit in  
Register B. The SET bit may now be cleared to  
allow updates.  
Time Calendar and Alarm  
The processor program obtains time and  
calendar information by reading the appropriate  
locations. The program may initialize the time,  
calendar and alarm by writing to these locations.  
The contents of the ten time, calendar and  
alarm 1 bytes can be in binary or BCD as shown  
in Table 63A. The contents of the century byte  
The 12/24 bit in Register B establishes whether  
the hour locations represent 1 to 12 or 0 to 23.  
The 12/24 bit cannot be changed without  
reinitializing the hour locations. When the 12  
150  
hour format is selected, the high order bit of the  
hours byte represents PM when it is a "1".  
The three alarm 1 bytes may be used in two  
ways. First, when the program inserts an alarm  
time in the appropriate hours, minutes and  
seconds alarm locations, the alarm interrupt is  
initiated at the specified time each day if the  
alarm enable bit is high. The second usage is to  
insert a "don't care" state in one or more of three  
alarm bytes. The "don't care" code is any  
hexadecimal byte from C0 to FF inclusive. That  
is the two most significant bits of each byte,  
when set to "1" create a "don't care" situation.  
An alarm interrupt each hour is created with a  
"don't care" code in the hours alarm location.  
Similarly, an alarm is generated every minute  
with "don't care" codes in the hours and minutes  
alarm bytes. The "don't care" codes in all three  
alarm bytes create an interrupt every second.  
Once per second, the ten time, calendar and  
alarm 1 bytes as well as the century byte and  
seven alarm 2 bytes are switched to the update  
logic to be advanced by one second and to  
check for an alarm condition. If any of these  
bytes are read at this time, the data outputs are  
undefined. The update cycle time is shown in  
Table 63. The update logic contains circuitry for  
automatic end-of-month recognition as well as  
automatic leap year compensation.  
151  
Table 63A - Time, Calendar and Alarm 1 Bytes  
ADD  
REGISTER FUNCTION  
Register 0: Seconds  
BCD RANGE  
00-59  
BINARY RANGE  
00-3B  
0
1
2
3
4
Register 1: Seconds Alarm  
Register 2: Minutes  
Register 3: Minutes Alarm  
Register 4: Hours  
00-59  
00-3B  
00-59  
00-3B  
00-59  
00-3B  
01-12 am  
81-92 pm  
00-23  
01-0C  
81-8C  
00-17  
(12 hour mode)  
(24 hour mode)  
5
Register 5: Hours Alarm  
(12 hour mode)  
01-12 am  
81-92 pm  
00-23  
01-0C  
81-8C  
00-17  
(24 hour mode)  
6
7
8
9
Register 6: Day of Week  
Register 7: Day of Month  
Register 8: Month  
01-07  
01-07  
01-31  
01-1F  
01-12  
01-0C  
00-63  
Register 9: Year  
00-99  
Table 63B - Century Byte and Alarm 2 Bytes  
DECIMAL  
RANGE  
0-99  
ADDRESS  
40h  
REGISTER FUNCTION  
Register 0: Century Byte  
Register 1: Seconds Alarm 2  
Register 2: Minutes Alarm 2  
BCD RANGE BINARY RANGE  
00-99  
00-59  
00-63  
00-3B  
41h  
42h  
0-59  
0-59  
00-59  
00-3B  
12-hr  
mode  
24-hr  
mode  
1-12  
01-12 AM  
81-92 PM  
00-23  
01-0C AM  
81-8C PM  
00-17  
43h  
Register 3: Hours Alarm 2  
0-23  
44h  
45h  
46h  
47h  
Register 4: Day of Week Alarm 2  
Register 5: Date of Month Alarm 2  
Register 6: Month Alarm 2  
1-7  
01-07  
01-31  
01-12  
00-99  
01-07  
01-1F  
01-0C  
00-63  
1-31  
1-12  
0-99  
Register 7: Year Alarm 2  
Alarm 2 Function  
Alarm 2 can only be used as a wake-up alarm to  
turn on power to the system when the system is  
powered off. There are two bits used to control  
alarm 2. The alarm 2 wake-up function is  
enabled via the alarm 2 Enable bit, AL2_EN, in  
the Soft Power Enable Register 2. The alarm 2  
Remember Enable bit, AL2_REM_EN, in the  
RTC Control Register 1, is used to power-up the  
152  
system upon return of power if the alarm 2 time  
has passed during loss of power. These bits  
function as follows:  
code is set in the year, month, date, day and  
hours alarm byte. An alarm is generated every  
minute with “don’t care” codes in the year,  
month, date, day, hours and minutes alarm  
bytes. The “don’t care” codes in all seven alarm  
bytes creates an interrupt every second. As a  
final example, an alarm is generated every one  
of a certain day of the week, i.e., every Friday,  
by specifying the “don’t care” code in the year,  
month and date of month bytes.  
If VTR is present: AL2_EN controls whether or  
not alarm 2 is enabled as a wake-up function. If  
AL2_EN is set and VTR=5V, the nPowerOn pin  
will go active (low) when the date/time is equal  
to the alarm 2 date/time and the power supply  
will turn on the machine.  
If VTR is not present: AL2_REM_EN controls  
whether or not Alarm 2 will power-up the system  
upon the return of VTR, regardless of the value  
of AL2_EN. If AL2_REM_EN is set and VTR=0  
at the date/time that Alarm 2 is set for, the  
nPowerOn pin will go active (low) as soon as  
VTR comes back and the machine will power-  
up.  
Update Cycle  
An update cycle is executed once per second if  
the SET bit in Register B is clear and the  
DV0-DV2 divider is not clear. The SET bit in the  
"1" state permits the program to initialize the  
time and calendar bytes by stopping an existing  
update and preventing  
occurring.  
a
new one from  
The seven alarm 2 bytes may be used in two  
ways. First, when the alarm time is written in  
the appropriate year, month, date, day, hours,  
minutes, and seconds alarm locations, the  
alarm interrupt is initiated at the specified time  
on the day of the week, on the date of the  
month, in the year if the Alarm 2 Enable bit is  
high. The second usage is to insert a “don’t  
care” state into one or more of the alarm bytes.  
The “don’t care” code is any hexadecimal byte  
from C0 to FF inclusive. That is, the two most  
significant bits of each byte, when set to “1”  
create a “don’t care” situation. An alarm is  
generated each year if the year byte is set to a  
“don’t care” condition. Similarly, an alarm is  
generated every month with “don’t care” codes  
in the year and month bytes. An alarm is  
generated on every day of every month of every  
year with “don’t care” codes in the year, month,  
date of month and day of week bytes. An alarm  
is generated each hour, every day of the month,  
every month, every year when the “don’t care”  
The primary function of the update cycle is to  
increment the seconds byte, check for overflow,  
increment the minutes byte when appropriate  
and so forth through to the year of the century  
byte. The update cycle also compares each  
alarm byte with the corresponding time byte and  
issues an alarm if a match or if a "don't care"  
code is present.  
The length of an update cycle is shown in Table  
58. During the update cycle the time, calendar  
and alarm bytes are not accessible by the  
processor program. If the processor reads these  
locations before the update cycle is complete  
the output will be undefined. The UIP (update in  
progress) status bit is set during the interval.  
When the UIP bit goes high, the update cycle  
will begin 244 us later. Therefore, if a low is read  
on the UIP bit the user has at least 244ms before  
time/calendar data will be changed.  
153  
Table 64 - Update Cycle Time  
INPUT CLOCK  
FREQUENCY  
MINIMUM TIME  
UPDATE CYCLE  
UIP BIT  
UPDATE CYCLE TIME  
32.768 kHz  
32.768 kHz  
1
0
-
1948 ms  
-
244 ms  
CONTROL AND STATUS REGISTERS, BANK  
0
times when Bank 0 is enabled, even during the  
update cycle.  
Bank 0 of the RTC has four registers which are  
accessible to the processor program at all  
REGISTER A (AH)  
MSB  
LSB  
b7  
b6  
b5  
b4  
b3  
b2  
b1  
b0  
UIP  
DV2  
DV1  
DV0  
RS3  
RS2  
RS1  
RS0  
UIP  
also used to reset the divider chain. When the  
time/calendar is first initialized, the program  
may start the divider chain at the precise time  
stored in the registers. When the divider reset is  
removed the first update begins one-half second  
later. These three read/write bits are not affected  
by RESET_DRV.  
The update in progress bit is a status flag that  
may be monitored by the program. When UIP is  
a "1" the update cycle is in progress or will soon  
begin. When UIP is a "0" the update cycle is not  
in progress and will not be for at least 244us.  
The time, calendar, and alarm information is  
fully available to the program when the UIP bit is  
zero. The UIP bit is a read only bit and is not  
affected by RESET_DRV. Writing the SET bit in  
Register B to a "1" inhibits any update cycle and  
then clears the UIP status bit. The UIP bit is  
only valid when the RTC is enabled. Refer to  
Table 64.  
RS3-0  
The four rate selection bits select one of 15 taps  
on the divider chain or disable the divider  
output. The selected tap determines rate or  
frequency of the periodic interrupt. The program  
may enable or disable the interrupt with the PIE  
bit in Register B. Table 66 lists the periodic  
interrupt rates and equivalent output frequencies  
that may be chosen with the RS0-RS3 bits.  
These four bits are read/write bits which are not  
affected by RESET_DRV.  
DV2-0  
Three bits are used to permit the program to  
select various conditions of the 22 stage divider  
chain. Table 65 shows the allowable  
combinations. The divider selection bits are  
154  
Table 65 - Divider Selection Bits  
REGISTER A BITS  
OSCILLATOR  
FREQUENCY  
DV2  
DV1  
DV0  
MODE  
32.768 KHz  
32.768 KHz  
32.768 KHz  
32.768 KHz  
32.768 KHz  
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
X
X
Oscillator Disabled  
Oscillator Disabled  
Normal Operate  
Test  
Test  
Reset Driver  
Table 66 - Periodic Interrupt Rates  
32.768 kHz TIME BASE  
RATE SELECT  
PERIOD RATE OF  
INTERRUPT  
FREQUENCY OF  
INTERRUPT  
RS3  
0
RS2  
0
RS1  
0
RS0  
0
0.0  
0
0
0
1
3.90625 ms  
7.8125 ms  
122.070 us  
244.141 us  
488.281 us  
976.562 us  
1.953125 ms  
3.90625 ms  
7.8125 ms  
15.625 ms  
31.25 ms  
62.5 ms  
256 Hz  
128 Hz  
8.192 kHz  
4.096 kHz  
2.048 kHz  
1.024 kHz  
512 Hz  
256 Hz  
128 Hz  
64 Hz  
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
32 Hz  
1
1
0
0
16 Hz  
1
1
0
1
125 ms  
8 Hz  
1
1
1
0
250 ms  
4 Hz  
1
1
1
1
500 ms  
2 Hz  
155  
REGISTER B (BH)  
MSB  
LSB  
b0  
b7  
b6  
PIE  
b5  
b4  
b3  
b2  
b1  
SET  
AIE  
UIE  
RES  
DM2  
24/12  
DSE  
"0". The AIE bit is not affected by any internal  
functions.  
SET  
When the SET bit is a "0", the update functions  
normally by advancing the counts once per  
second. When the SET bit is a "1", an update  
cycle in progress is aborted and the program  
may initialize the time and calendar bytes  
without an update occurring in the middle of  
initialization. SET is a read/write bit which is  
not modified by RESET_DRV or any internal  
functions.  
UIE  
The update-ended interrupt enable bit is a  
read/write bit which enables the update-end flag  
(UF) bit in Register C to assert IRQB. The  
RESET_DRV port or the SET bit going high  
clears the UIE bit.  
RES  
PIE  
Reserved - read as “0”.  
The periodic interrupt enable bit is a read/write  
bit which allows the periodic-interrupt flag (PF)  
bit in Register C to cause the IRQB port to be  
driven low. The program writes a "1" to the PIE  
bit in order to receive periodic interrupts at the  
rate specified by the RS3-RS0 bits in Register  
A. A zero in PIE blocks IRQB from being  
initiated by a periodic interrupt, but the periodic  
flag (PF) is still set at the periodic rate. PIE is  
not modified by any internal function, but is  
cleared to "0" by a RESET_DRV.  
DM  
The data mode bit indicates whether time and  
calendar updates are to use binary or BCD  
formats. The DM bit is written by the processor  
program and may be read by the program,  
but is not modified by any internal functions  
or by RESET_DRV.  
binary data, while a "0" in DM specifies BCD  
data.  
A
"1" in DM signifies  
24/12  
AIE  
The 24/12 control bit establishes the format of  
the hours byte as either the 24 hour mode if  
set to a "1", or the 12 hour mode if cleared to  
a "0". This is a read/write bit which is not  
affected by RESET_DRV or any internal  
function.  
The alarm interrupt enable bit is a read/write bit,  
which when set to a "1" permits the alarm flag  
(AF) bit in Register C to assert IRQB. An  
alarm interrupt occurs for each second that the  
three time bytes equal the three alarm bytes  
(including a "don't care" alarm code of binary  
11XXXXXX). When the AIE bit is a "0", the AF  
bit does not initiate an IRQB signal. The  
DSE  
The daylight savings enable bit is read only and  
is always set to a "0" to indicate that the daylight  
savings time option is not available.  
RESET_DRV  
port  
clears  
AIE  
to  
156  
REGISTER C (CH) - READ ONLY REGISTER  
MSB  
LSB  
b0  
0
b7  
b6  
b5  
b4  
b3  
0
b2  
0
b1  
0
IRQF  
PF  
AF  
UF  
IRQF  
AF  
The interrupt request flag is set to a "1" when  
one or more of the following are true:  
The alarm interrupt flag when set to a "1"  
indicates that the current time has matched the  
alarm time. A "1" in AF causes a "1" to appear in  
IRQF and the IRQB port to go low when the AIE  
bit is also a "1". A RESET_DRV or a read of  
Register C clears the AF bit.  
PF = PIE = 1  
AF = AIE = 1  
UF = UIE = 1  
Any time the IRQF bit is a "1", the IRQB signal  
is driven low. All flag bits are cleared after  
Register C is read or by the RESET_DRV port.  
UF  
The update-ended interrupt flag bit is set after  
each update cycle. When the UIE bit is also a  
"1", the "1" in UF causes the IRQF bit to be set  
and asserts IRQB. A RESET_DRV or a read of  
Register C causes UF to be cleared.  
PF  
The periodic interrupt flag is a read-only bit  
which is set to a "1" when a particular edge is  
detected on the selected tap of the divider chain.  
The RS3 -RS0 bits establish the periodic rate.  
PF is set to a "1" independent of the state of  
the PIE bit. PF being a "1" sets the IRQF bit  
and initiates an IRQB signal when PIE is also a  
"1". The PF bit is cleared by RESET_DRV or by  
a read of Register C.  
b3-0  
The unused bits of Register C are read as zeros  
and cannot be written.  
157  
REGISTER D (DH) READ ONLY REGISTER  
MSB  
LSB  
b0  
0
b7  
b6  
0
b5  
0
b4  
0
b3  
0
b2  
0
b1  
0
VRT  
The processor program selects which interrupts,  
if any, it wishes to receive by writing a "1" to the  
appropriate enable bits in Register B. A "0" in  
an enable bit prohibits the IRQB port from being  
asserted due to that interrupt cause. When an  
interrupt event occurs a flag bit is set to a "1" in  
Register C. Each of the three interrupt sources  
have separate flag bits in Register C, which are  
set independent of the state of the  
corresponding enable bits in Register B. The  
flag bits may be used with or without enabling  
the corresponding enable bits. The flag bits in  
Register C are cleared (record of the interrupt  
event is erased) when Register C is read.  
Double latching is included in Register C to  
ensure the bits that are set are stable  
throughout the read cycle. All bits which are  
high when read by the program are cleared, and  
new interrupts are held until after the read cycle.  
If an interrupt flag is already set when the  
interrupt becomes enabled, the IRQB port is  
immediately activated, though the interrupt  
initiating the event may have occurred much  
earlier.  
VRT  
When a "1", this bit indicates that the contents  
of the RTC are valid. A "0" appears in the VRT  
bit when the battery voltage is low. The VRT bit  
is read only bit which can only be set by a read  
of Register D. Refer to Power Management for  
the conditions when this bit is reset. The  
processor program can set the VRT bit when the  
time and calendar are initialized to indicate that  
the time is valid.  
b6:b0  
The remaining bits of Register D are read as  
zeros and cannot be written.  
Register EH-FFH: General purpose  
Registers Eh-FFH are general purpose CMOS  
registers. These registers can be used by the  
host or 8042 and are fully available during the  
time update cycle.  
registers are preserved by the battery power.  
The contents of these  
INTERRUPTS  
When an interrupt flag bit is set and the  
corresponding interrupt-enable bit is also set,  
the IRQB port is driven low. IRQB is asserted as  
long as at least one of the three interrupt  
sources has its flag and enable bits both set.  
The IRQF bit in Register C is a "1" whenever the  
IRQB port is being driven low.  
The RTC includes three separate fully-  
automatic sources of interrupts to the processor.  
The alarm interrupt may be programmed to  
occur at rates from one-per-second to  
one-a-day.  
The periodic interrupt may be  
selected for rates from half-a-second to 122.070  
ms. The update ended interrupt may be used  
to indicate to the program that an update cycle  
is completed.  
Each of these independent  
interrupts are described in greater detail in  
other sections.  
158  
Control Registers, Bank 2  
CONTROL REGISTER 1  
Default is 0; cleared upon Vbat POR. This  
register is battery backed-up.  
Bank 2 of the RTC has one control register.  
D7  
0
D6  
0
D5  
0
D4  
0
D3  
0
D2  
VTR_POR  
_EN  
D1  
0
D0  
AL2_REM  
_EN  
Frequency Divider  
AL2_REM_EN - One of the two control bits for  
the Alarm wakeup function; it is the  
2
The RTC has 22 binary divider stages following  
the clock input. The output of the divider is a 1  
Hz signal to the update-cycle logic. The divider  
is controlled by the three divider bits (DV3-DV0)  
in Register A. As shown in Table 65 the divider  
control bits can select the operating mode or  
be used to hold the divider chain reset which  
allows precision setting of the time. When the  
divider chain is changed from reset to the  
operating mode, the first update cycle is  
one-half second later. The divider control bits  
are also used to facilitate testing of the RTC.  
“remember” enable bit for the second alarm.  
This bit, if set to 1, wil cause the system to  
power-up upon return of power if the Alarm 2  
time has passed during loss of power. It is only  
applicable when VTR=0. This bit is independent  
of the other control bit for the Alarm 2 wake-up  
function, Al2_EN (bit 4 of the Soft Power Enable  
Register 2) which controls Alarm 2 when  
VTR=5V. See the Alarm 2 Function Section for  
more information. The function of Bit 0 is  
summarized as follows:  
If AL2_REM_EN is set and VTR=0 at the  
date/time that Alarm 2 is set for, the nPowerOn  
pin will go active (low) and the machine will  
power-up as soon as VTR comes back.  
Periodic Interrupt Selection  
The periodic interrupt allows the IRQB port to be  
triggered from once every 500 ms to once every  
122.07 ms. As Table 66 shows, the periodic  
interrupt is selected with the RS0-RS3 bits in  
Register A. The periodic interrupt is enabled  
with the PIE bit in Register B.  
VTR POR - The enable bit for VTR POR. If  
VTR_POR_EN is set, the nPowerOn pin will go  
active (low) and the machine will power-up as  
soon as a VTR POR occurs.  
159  
1. The Divider Chain Controls (bits 6-4) are in  
any mode but Normal Operation ("010").  
2. The VRT bit is a "0".  
3. When battery voltage is below 1 volt  
nominal and RESET_DRV is a "1". This  
will also initialize all registers 00-0D to a  
"00".  
Power Supply Operational Modes  
Note: See the Operational Description Section  
for the Power Supply Operational Modes.  
Power Management  
The RAMD signal controls all bus inputs to the  
RTC and RAM (nIOW, nIOR, RESET_DRV).  
When asserted, it disallows any modification of  
the RTC and RAM data by the host or 8042.  
RAMD is asserted whenever: VCC is below 4.0  
volts nominal.  
To minimize power consumption, the oscillator  
is not operational under the following conditions:  
1. The Divider Chain Controls (bits 6-4) are in  
Oscillator Disabled mode (000, or 001).  
2. If VTR and VCC=0 and the battery power is  
removed and then re-applied (a new battery  
is installed) the following occurs:  
When the VTR voltage drops below the battery  
voltage, the RTC switches to battery power.  
When VTR rises above the battery voltage, the  
RTC switches back to VTR power.  
a. The oscillator is disabled immediately.  
b. Initialize all registers 00-0D to a "00"  
when VCC is applied.  
When the VCC voltage drops below 4.0 volts  
nominal, all inputs are locked out so that the  
internal registers cannot be modified by the  
system. This lockout condition continues for 62  
msec (min) to 125 msec (max) after the system  
power has been restored. The 62 msec lockout  
does not occur under the following conditions:  
If the battery voltage is between 1 volt nominal  
and 2.4 volt nominal when VCC is applied:  
1. Clear VRT bit to "0". Maintain all other RTC  
bits in the state as before VCC was applied  
VCC  
<4.0  
>4.0  
HYSTER  
BATTERY  
REGISTER ACCESS  
1
0
1
x
N
Y
Hyster=1 implies that VCC <4.0 volts +/-0.25V; Hyster=0 implies that VCC >4.0  
volts +/-0.25V.  
160  
SOFT POWER MANAGEMENT  
The FDC37C93xAPM employs soft power  
transition on the Button input or on any of the  
enabled wakeup events (SPx) causes the  
nPowerOn output to go active low which turns  
on the main power supply. Even if the power  
supply is completely lost (i.e., VTR is not  
present) the power supply can still be turned on  
upon the return of VTR by an alarm 2 event that  
has already passed (if the alarm 2 remember bit  
is enabled) or by a VTR power on reset (if the  
VTR POR bit is enabled). These bits are  
described in the RTC section.  
management to allow the chip to enter low  
power mode and to provide a variety of wakeup  
events to power up the chip. This technique  
allows for software control over powerdown and  
wakeup events. In low power mode, the chip  
runs off of the trickle voltage, VTR, which is 5  
volts at 2mA maximum. In this mode, the chip  
is ready to power up from either the power  
button or from one of a number of wakeup  
events including pressing a key, touching the  
mouse or receiving data from one of the UARTs.  
The alarm can also be set to power up the  
system at a predetermined time to perform one  
or more tasks.  
The Button input can be used to turn off the  
power supply after a debounce delay. The  
power supply can also be turned off under  
software control (via  
a
write to register  
The implementation of Soft Power Management  
is illustrated in Figure 11. A high to low  
WDT_CTRL with bit 7 set).  
161  
Soft Power Mangement  
nBINT  
Delay2  
OFF_EN  
nSPOFF1  
Logic  
OFF_DLY  
Button  
nSPOFF  
L
VTR_POR_EN  
VTR POR  
Logic  
AL2_REM_EN  
Alarm 2  
Button Input  
ED; PG  
ED; L  
OFF_DLY  
Delay1  
SP1  
VTR  
EN1  
Flip  
Flop 1  
nSPOFF1  
nPowerOn  
D
Q
CLR  
Open Collector  
Type output  
SPx  
ED; L  
VBAT POR  
ENx  
Logic  
nSPOFF1  
Soft Power  
Off nSPOFF1  
Override  
Timer  
PWRBTNOR_STS  
PWRBTNOR_EN  
A transition on the Button input or on any enabled SPx inputs causes the nPowerOn output to go active low.  
A low pulse on the Soft Power Off signal causes the nPowerOn bit to float.  
ED;PG = Edge Detect, Pulse Generator  
ED;L = Edge Detect and Latch  
FIGURE 11 - SOFT POWER MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM  
Note 1: All soft power management functions run off of VTR. When VTR is present, it supplies power  
to the RTC. When VTR is not present, Vbat supplies power to the RTC and Flip Flop 1.  
Note 2: Flip Flop 1 is battery backed-up so that it returns the last valid state of the machine.  
Note 3: A battery backed-up enable bit in the alarm control register can be set to force Flip Flop 1 in  
the soft power management circuit to come up ‘on’ if an alarm occurred when VTR was not present.  
This is gated into wakeup circuitry. Refer to the AL2_REM_EN Bit description in the RTC Control  
Register section for more information.  
162  
This register contains the status for the wake-up  
events. Note: The status bit gets set if the  
wakeup event occurs, whether or not it is  
enabled as a wakeup function by setting the  
corresponding bit in Soft Power Enable Register  
1. However, only the enabled wakeup functions  
will turn on power to the system.  
REGISTERS  
The following registers can be accessed when in  
configuration mode at Logical Device 8,  
Registers B0-B3, B8 and F4, and when not in  
configuration they can be accessed through the  
Index and Data Register.  
Soft Power Status Register 2  
Soft Power Enable Registers  
(Configuration Register B3, Logical Device 8)  
This register contains additional status for the  
wake-up events. Note: The status bit gets set if  
the wakeup event occurs, whether or not it is  
enabled as a wakeup function by setting the  
corresponding bit in Soft Power Enable Register  
2. However, only the enabled wakeup functions  
will turn on power to the system.  
Soft Power Enable Register 1  
(Configuration Register B0, Logical Device 8)  
This register contains the enable bits for the  
wake-up function of the nPowerOn bit. When  
enabled, these bits allow their corresponding  
function to turn on power to the system.  
Soft Power Enable Register 2  
Soft Power Control Registers  
(Configuration Register B1, Logical Device 8)  
This register contains additional enable bits for  
the wake-up function of the nPowerOn bit.  
When enabled, these bits allow their  
corresponding function to turn on power to the  
system. It also contains OFF_EN: After power  
up, this bit defaults to 1, i.e., enabled. This bit  
allows the software to enable or disable the  
button control of power off.  
WDT_CTRL  
(Configuration Register F4, Logical Device 8)  
This register is used for soft power management  
and watchdog timer control. Bits[7:5] are for soft  
power management: SPOFF, Restart_Cnt,  
Stop_Cnt.  
Delay 2 Time Set Register  
(Configuration Register B8, Logical Device 8)  
This register is used to set Delay 2 to value from  
500msec to 32sec. The default value is  
500msec.  
Soft Power Status Registers  
Soft Power Status Register 1  
(Configuration Register B2, Logical Device 8)  
163  
The power button has an override event as  
required by the ACPI specification. If the user  
presses the power button for more than four  
seconds while the system is in the working  
state, a hardware event is generated and the  
system will transition to the off state. There are  
status and enable bits associated with this  
feature in the PM1_BLK registers. See the ACPI  
section.  
to turn off the system. The override status bit  
alerts the system upon power-up that an  
override event was used to power down the  
system, and will be used to properly power-up  
the system.  
Figure 11 shows the soft power management  
logic with the override timer path from the  
button input. The override timer counts while  
the button is held (in the present implementation  
this would be when the button input is high) and  
is cleared upon release of the button. It has a  
0.5 second or faster resolution (run off of the  
32kHz clock divided down) and the minimum  
time for triggering the override power down is  
four seconds, with a maximum of 4.5 seconds.  
The timer output will pulse the clear on the Flip  
Flop 1.  
This override event utilizes power button logic to  
determine that the power button (Button_In) has  
been pressed for more that four seconds. The  
override enable/disable bit, PWRBTNOR_EN,  
allows this override function to be turned on/off.  
If enabled, this override event will result in  
setting  
the  
override  
status  
bit,  
PWRBTNOR_STS (to be cleared by writing a 1  
to its bit position - writing a 0 has no effect),  
clearing the regular button status bit,  
PWRBTN_STS, and generating an event to be  
routed into the soft power management logic  
Figure 12 illustrates the timing of the blanking  
period relative to Button_In and nPowerOn for  
the override event.  
Button_In  
nPowerOn  
4+  
sec  
Release  
4 sec  
Blanking Period  
4 sec  
V
cc  
FIGURE 12 - BLANKING PERIOD  
164  
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT INTERRUPT (SMI)  
The FDC37C93xAPM implements a group nSMI  
SMI Enable Registers  
output pin. The System Management Interrupt  
is a non-maskable interrupt with the highest  
priority level used for transparent power  
management. The nSMI group interrupt output  
consists of the enabled interrupts from each of  
the functional blocks in the chip. The interrupts  
are enabled onto the group nSMI output via the  
SMI Enable Registers 1 and 2. The nSMI output  
is then enabled onto the group nSMI output pin  
via bit[7] in the SMI Enable Register 2. The  
logic equation for the nSMI output is as follows:  
SMI Enable Register 1  
(Configuration Register B4, Logical Device 8)  
This register is used to enable the different  
interrupt sources onto the group nSMI output.  
SMI Enable Register 2  
(Configuration Register B5, Logical Device 8)  
This register is used to enable additional  
interrupt sources onto the group nSMI output.  
This register is also used to enable the group  
nSMI output onto the nSMI GPI/O pin and the  
routing of 8042 P12 internally to nSMI.  
nSMI =  
(EN_IDE1  
(EN_PINT  
and  
and  
IRQ_IDE1)  
IRQ_PINT)  
or  
or  
(EN_U2INT and IRQ_U2INT) or  
(EN_U1INT and IRQ_U1INT) or  
(EN_FINT  
and  
IRQ_FINT)  
or  
SMI Status Registers  
(EN_GPINT2 and IRQ_GPINT2) or  
(EN_GPINT1 and IRQ_GPINT1) or  
SMI Status Register 1  
(EN_WDT  
(EN_MINT  
(EN_KINT  
(EN_IRINT  
(EN_BINT  
and  
and  
and  
and  
and  
IRQ_WDT)  
IRQ_MINT)  
IRQ_KINT)  
IRQ_IRINT)  
iRQ_BINT)  
or  
or  
or  
or  
or  
(Configuration Register B6, Logical Device 8)  
This register is used to read the status of the  
SMI input events. Note: The status bit gets set  
whether or not the interrupt is enabled onto the  
group SMI output.  
(EN_ABINT and IRQ_ABINT)  
SMI Status Register 2  
(Configuration Register B7, Logical Device 8)  
This register is used to read the status of the  
SMI input events. Note: The status bit gets set  
whether or not the interrupt is enabled onto the  
group SMI output.  
REGISTERS  
The following registers can be accessed when in  
configuration mode at Logical Device 8,  
Registers B4-B7 and when not in configuration  
they can be accessed through the Index and  
Data Register.  
165  
ACCESS.bus  
The FDC37C93xAPM supports ACCESS.bus.  
device driver interface, and several specific  
device protocols.  
ACCESS.bus is a serial communication protocol  
between a computer host and its peripheral  
devices. It provides a simple, uniform and  
inexpensive way to connect peripheral devices  
to a single computer port. A single ACCESS.bus  
For a description of the ACCESS.bus protocol,  
please refer to the ACCESS.bus Specifications  
Version 2.2, February 1994, available from the  
ACCESS.bus Industry Group.  
on  
a host can accommodate up to 125  
peripheral devices.  
The ACCESS.bus interface is based on the  
PDC8584 controller. The registers are mapped  
into the ISA I/O register space as set by the  
configuration registers. The addresses for the  
registers are shown in Table 67.  
The ACCESS.bus protocol includes a physical  
layer based on the I2C serial bus developed by  
Philips, and several software layers.  
The  
software layers include the base protocol, the  
Table 67 - ACCESS.bus Register Addresses  
ADDRESS*  
Base+0  
Base+1  
REGISTER  
Control/Status  
Own Address  
Data  
Base+2  
Base+3  
Clock  
Note 1: Base I/O Range: [0x00:0x0FFC] on 4 byte boundaries  
ACCESS.bus. Register  
S1  
contains  
REGISTERS  
ACCESS.bus status information required for bus  
access and or monitoring.  
The ACCESS.bus interface has four internal  
register locations. Two of these, Own Address  
Register S0 and Clock Register S2, are used for  
initialization of the chip. Normally they are only  
written once directly after resetting of the chip.  
The other two registers, the Data Shift Register  
S0 and the Control/Status Register S1 (which  
functions as a double register), are used during  
actual data transmission/reception. Register S0  
performs all serial-to-parallel interfacing with the  
ACCESS.bus Control/Status Register S1  
The control/status register controls the  
ACCESS.bus operation and provides status  
information. This register has separate read and  
write functions for all bit positions. The write-  
only section provides register access control  
and control over ACCESS.bus signals, while the  
read-only section provides ACCESS.bus status  
information.  
166  
Table 68 - ACCESS.BUS Control/Status Register S1:  
Control  
R/W  
D7  
W
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
W
D0  
W
W
W
W
W
W
Bit Def  
PIN  
ES0  
Reserved  
Reserved  
ENI  
STA  
STO  
ACK  
Status  
R/W  
D7  
R
D6  
R
D5  
R
D4  
R
D3  
R
D2  
R
D1  
R
D0  
R
Bit Def  
PIN  
0
STS  
BER  
LRB  
AAS  
LAB  
nBB  
communication with serial shift register S0 is  
enabled and the S1 bus status bits are made  
available for reading. With ESO = 0, bits ENI,  
STA, STO and ACK of S1 can be read for test  
purposes.  
Bit Definitions  
Register S1 Control Section  
The write-only section of S1 enables access to  
registers S0, S0’, S1 and S2, and controls  
ACCESS.bus operation.  
BITS 5 and 4: Reserved  
BIT 3: ENI  
BIT 7: PIN  
This bit enables the internal interrupt, nINT,  
which is generated when the PIN bit is active  
(logic “0”).  
Pending Interrupt Not. When the PIN bit is  
written with a logic 1, all status bits are reset to  
logic 0, with the exception of PIN which is set to  
1, and nBB which is not affected. This may  
serve as a software reset function.  
BITS 2 and 1: STA and STO  
These bits control the generation of the  
ACCESS.bus  
START  
condition  
and  
BIT 6: ESO  
transmission of slave address and R/nW bit,  
generation of repeated START condition, and  
generation of the STOP condition (see Table 69)  
Enable Serial Output. ESO enables or disables  
the serial ACCESS.bus I/O. When ESO is high,  
ACCESS.bus communication is enabled;  
Table 69 - Instruction Table for Serial Bus Control  
STA  
1
STO  
0
PRESENT MODE  
FUNCTION  
START  
OPERATION  
Transmit START+address, remain  
MST/TRM if R/nW=0; go to MST/REC if  
R/nW=1  
SLV/REC  
1
0
0
1
MST/TRM  
MST/REC;  
MST/TRM  
MST  
REPEAT START Same as for SLV/REC  
STOP READ;  
STOP WRITE  
Transmit STOP go to SLV/REC mode;  
Note 1  
1
0
1
0
DATA CHAINING Send STOP, START and address after  
last master frame without STOP sent;  
Note 2  
ANY  
NOP  
No operation; Note 3  
167  
Note 1: In master receiver mode, the last byte  
must be terminated with ACK bit high (‘negative  
acknowledge’)  
also set to logic “1” (inactive) each time S0 is  
written. In receiver mode, the PIN bit is  
automatically set to logic “1” each time the data  
register S0 is read.  
Note 2: If both STA and STO are set high  
simultaneously in master mode,  
condition followed by a START condition +  
address will be generated. This allows  
‘chaining’ of transmissions without relinquishing  
bus control.  
a
STOP  
After transmission or reception of one byte on  
the ACCESS.bus (9 clock pulses, including  
acknowledge) the PIN bit will be automatically  
reset to logic “0” (active) indicating a complete  
byte transmission/reception. When the PIN bit  
is subsequently set to logic “1” (inactive), all  
status bits will be reset to “0” on a BER (bus  
error) condition.  
Note 3: All other STA and STO mode  
combinations not mentioned in Table 69 are  
NOPs.  
In polled applications, the PIN bit is tested to  
determine when a serial transmission/reception  
has been completed. When the ENI bit (bit 4 of  
write-only section of register S1) is also set to  
logic 1 the hardware interrupt is enabled. In this  
case, the PI flag also triggers and internal  
interrupt (active low) via the nINT output each  
time PIN is reset to logic “0”.  
BIT 0: ACK  
This bit must be set normally to logic “1”. This  
causes the ACCESS.bus to send an  
acknowledge automatically after each byte (this  
occurs during the ninth clock pulse) . The bit  
must be reset (to logic 0) when the  
ACCESS.bus controller is operating in  
master/receiver mode and requires no further  
data to be sent from the slave transmitter. This  
When acting as a slave transmitter or slave  
receiver, while PIN=“0”, the chip will suspend  
ACCESS.bus transmission by holding the SCL  
line low until the PIN bit is set to logic “1”  
(inactive). This prevents further data from being  
transmitted or received until the current data  
byte in S0 has been read (when acting as slave  
receiver) or the next data byte is written to S0  
(when acting as slave transmitter).  
causes  
a
negative acknowledge on the  
ACCESS.bus, which halts further transmission  
from the slave device.  
Register S1 Status Section  
The read-only section of S1 enables access to  
ACCESS.bus status information.  
PIN bit summary:  
BIT 7: PIN  
(Pending Interrupt Not)  
·
The PIN bit can be used in polled  
applications to test when serial  
This bit is a status flag which is used to  
synchronize serial communication and is set to  
logic “0” whenever the chip requires servicing.  
The PIN bit is normally read in polled  
applications to determine when an ACCESS.bus  
byte transmission/reception is completed.  
a
transmission has been completed. When  
the ENI bit is also set, the PIN flag sets the  
internal interrupt via the nINT output.  
Setting the STA bit (start bit) will set  
PIN=“1” (inactive).  
In transmitter mode, after successful  
transmission of one byte on the  
ACCESS.bus the PIN bit will be  
·
·
Each time a serial data transmission is initiated  
(by setting the STA bit in the same register) the  
PIN bit will be set to logic “1” automatically  
(inactive). When acting as transmitter, PIN is  
168  
automatically reset to logic “0” (active)  
indicating a complete byte transmission.  
In transmitter mode, PIN is set to logic “1”  
(inactive) each time register S0 is written.  
In receiver mode, PIN is set to logic “0”  
(inactive) on completion of each received  
byte. Subsequently, the SCL line will be  
held low until PIN is set to logic “1”.  
In receiver mode, when register S0 is read,  
PIN is set to logic “1” (inactive).  
In slave receiver mode, an ACCESS.bus  
STOP condition will set PIN=“0” (active).  
PIN= “0” if a bus error (BER) occurs.  
2. ADO; when AAS=“1” (Addressed as slave  
condition) the ACCESS.bus controller has  
been addressed as a slave. Under this  
condition, this bit becomes the AD0 bit and  
will be set to logic “1” if the slave address  
received was the ‘general call’ (00h)  
address, or logic “0” if it was the  
·
·
ACCESS.bus  
address.  
controller’s  
own  
slave  
·
·
·
BIT 2: AAS  
Addressed As Slave bit.  
Valid only when  
PIN=“0”. When acting as slave receiver, this  
flag is set when an incoming address over the  
ACCESS.bus matches the value in own address  
register S0’ (shifted by one bit) or if the  
ACCESS.bus ‘general call’ address (00h) has  
been received (‘general call’ is indicated when  
AD0 status bit is also set to logic “1”).  
BIT 6: Logic 0  
BIT 5: STS  
When in slave receiver mode, this flag is  
asserted when an externally generated STOP  
condition is detected (used only in slave receiver  
mode).  
BIT 1: LAB  
Lost Arbitration Bit. This bit is set when, in  
multi-master operation, arbitration is lost to  
another master on the ACCESS.bus.  
BIT 4: BER  
Bus error;  
a misplaced START or STOP  
condition has been detected. Resets nBB (to  
logic “1”; inactive), sets PIN= “0” (active).  
Bit 0: nBB  
Bus Busy bit.  
This is a read-only flag indicating when the  
ACCESS.bus is in use. A “0” indicates that the  
bus is busy and access is not possible. This bit  
is set/reset (logic “1”/logic “0”) by START/STOP  
conditions.  
BIT 3: LRB/AD0  
Last Received Bit or Address 0 (general call) bit.  
This status bit serves a dual function, and is  
valid only while PIN= “0”.  
1. LRB holds the value of the last received bit  
over the ACCESS.bus while AAS=“0” (not  
addressed as slave). Normally this will be  
the value of the slave acknowledgment;  
thus checking for slave acknowledgment is  
done via testing of the LRB.  
169  
when this address is received (the value in S0 is  
compared with the value in S0’). Note that the  
S0 and S0’ registers are offset by one bit;  
hence, programming the own address register  
S0’ with a value of 55h will result in the value  
AAh being recognized as the chip’s  
ACCESS.bus slave address.  
Own Address Register S0’  
When the chip is addressed as slave, this  
register must be loaded with the 7-bit  
ACCESS.bus address to which the chip is to  
respond. During initialization, the own address  
register S0’ must be written to, regardless  
whether it is later used. The Addressed As  
Slave (AAS) bit in status register S1 is set  
After reset, S0’ has default address 00h.  
D7  
R/W  
D6  
R/W  
D5  
R/W  
D4  
R/W  
D3  
R/W  
D2  
R/W  
D1  
R/W  
D0  
R/W  
Reserved  
Slave  
Address  
6
Slave  
Address  
5
Slave  
Address  
4
Slave  
Address  
3
Slave  
Address  
2
Slave  
Address  
1
Slave  
Address  
0
In receiver mode the ACCESS.bus data is  
shifted into the shift register until the  
acknowledge phase. Further reception of data  
is inhibited (SCL held low) until the S0 data shift  
register is read.  
Data Shift Register S0  
Register S0 acts as serial shift register and read  
buffer interfacing to the ACCESS.bus. All read  
and write operations to/from the ACCESS.bus  
are done via this register. ACCESS.bus data is  
always shifted in or out of shift register S0.  
In the transmitter mode data is transmitted to  
the ACCESS.bus as soon as it is written to the  
S0 shift register if the serial I/O is enabled  
(ESO=1).  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
170  
Clock Register S2  
ACCESS.bus block. This determines the SCL  
clock frequency generated by the chip. The  
selection is made via Bits[2:0] (see Table 70).  
Register S2 controls the selection of the internal  
chip  
clock  
D7  
AB RST  
frequency  
used  
for  
the  
D6  
D5  
R
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
R/W  
D0  
RESERVED  
See Table 70  
Default = 00 at hard reset and power on reset.  
entire ACCESS.bus block. Not self-clearing,  
must be written high and then written low.  
BIT 7: AB_RST  
ACCESS.bus Reset Bit. This bit resets the  
Table 70 - Internal Clock Rates and ACCESS.bus Data Rates in the FDC37C93xAPM  
ACCESS BUS  
CLOCK  
REGISTER D[2:0]  
CLOCK  
RATE  
DATA  
RATE  
NOMINAL  
HIGH  
NOMINAL MINIMUM  
LOW  
HIGH  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
110  
Off  
12MHz  
14.318 MHz  
16MHz  
24MHz  
50kHz  
60kHz  
67kHz  
100kHz  
8ms  
6.7ms  
6ms  
12ms  
10.1ms  
9ms  
4ms  
4ms  
4ms  
4ms  
4ms  
6ms  
171  
ADVANCED CONFIGURATION AND POWER INTERFACE  
The FDC37C93xAPM supports the Advanced  
Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) as  
described in this section.  
The SCI enable and status registers are run-  
time registers which have the same interrupt  
event enable and status bits as the SMI  
registers. The SCI registers are contained in the  
MSC_BLK. Logical Device A will hold the  
address pointers to the ACPI power  
management register block, PM1_BLK, and the  
Miscellaneous register block, MSC_BLK.  
LEGACY/ACPI SELECT CAPABILITY  
This capability consists of an SMI/SCI switch  
which is required if the system supports both  
legacy and ACPI power management models.  
This is due to the fact that the system software  
for legacy power management consists of the  
SMI interrupt handler while for ACPI it consists  
of the ACPI driver (SCI interrupt handler). This  
support uses Logical Device A at 0x0A to hold  
the address pointers to the ACPI power  
management register block, PM1_BLK, and the  
Miscellaneous register block, MSC_BLK. These  
The SCI pin is the second alternate function  
added to pin 97, with the resulting pin having the  
multiple functions GP11/IRQIN/IRQ13. The  
configuration register for this pin (0xE1) allows  
polarity control and selection of open collector  
for this interrupt. The nSMI output pin is the  
second alternate function of pin 31 in the  
FDC37C93xAPM.  
are run-time registers.  
Contained in the  
The SCI interrupt can be routed to any of the  
dedicated interrupt request pins, IRQ[1,3:15].  
The SCI interrupt is active low open collector for  
all of these IRQ pins. Note that the SCI  
interrupt is the only one routed to IRQ13 and its  
polarity and output type is selected through  
configuration register 0xE1.  
MSC_BLK are SCI enable and status registers  
which will allow the SMI interrupt events to be  
enabled as SCI interrupt events. Included in the  
PM1_BLK is an enable bit to allow the SCI  
group interrupt to be switched out to SCI  
interrupt 13 (pin 97, IRQ13) or routed to one of  
the dedicated interrupts.  
GLOBAL STATUS AND BIOS STATUS  
The software power management events (those  
that generate an SMI in legacy mode and an  
SCI in ACPI mode) are controlled by the  
EN_SMI and SCI_EN bits. For legacy power  
management, the EN_SMI bit is used; if set, it  
routes the power management events to the  
Figure 13 shows the process of generating an  
interrupt from SMI to SCI and SCI to SMI. This  
figure shows the bits involved in this process.  
The GBL_EN, GBL_STS and GBL_RLS bits are  
located in the PM1_BLK registers.  
The  
SMI interrupt logic.  
For ACPI power  
BIOS_RLS, BIOS_EN and BIOS_STS bits are  
located in the MISC_BLK registers. These bits  
are described below.  
management, the SCI_EN bit is used; if set, it  
routes the power management events to the SCI  
interrupt logic.  
The BIOS_RLS bit is used by the BIOS to raise  
an event to the ACPI software. GBL_EN and  
GBL_STS are the corresponding enable and  
status bits used by ACPI software to control its  
ability to receive SCI events. Setting BIOS_RLS  
The SCI enable bit, SCI_EN, is located in the  
PM1_CNTRL register, bit 0. This bit is used in  
conjunction with EN_SMI, bit 7 of the SMI  
enable register 2, to enable either SCI or SMI (or  
both).  
sets GBL_STS.  
If GBL_EN is set and  
BIOS_RLS is set an SCI is raised. BIOS_RLS is  
172  
set by writing “1” to its bit location; it is cleared  
by writing a “1” to the GBL_STS bit. Writing a  
“0” to BIOS_RLS has no effect. Writing a “0” to  
GBL_STS has no effect.  
status bits used by the BIOS to control its ability  
to receive ACPI events. Setting GBL_RLS sets  
BIOS_STS. If BIOS_EN is set and GBL_RLS  
is set an SMI is raised. GBL_RLS is set by  
writing a “1” to its bit location; it is cleared by  
writing a “1” to the BIOS_STS bit. Writing a “0”  
to GBL_RLS has no effect. Writing a “0” to  
BIOS_STS has no effect.  
The GBL_RLS bit is used by the ACPI software  
to raise an event to the BIOS. BIOS_EN and  
BIOS_STS are the corresponding enable and  
SMI to SCI  
Clears  
GBL_STS  
BIOS_RLS  
GBL_EN  
To SCI Logic  
SCI to SMI  
Clears  
BIOS_STS  
GBL_RLS  
BIOS_EN  
To SMI Logic  
Enable bit. Software writing this bit HIGH or LOW will result in the bit  
being read as HIGH or LOW.  
SYMBOL  
DEFINITION  
Sticky Status Bit. This bit is set by a hardware signal assertion HIGH.  
Cleared by software writing a one to its bit position.  
Latched on trailing edge of write strobe.  
FIGURE 13 - PROCESS OF GENERATING AN INTERRUPT FROM SMI TO SCI AND SCI TO SMI  
173  
Setting BM_CNTRL sets BM_STS. If BM_RLD  
is set and BM_CNTRL is set, an SCI is raised.  
BM_CNTRL is set by writing a 1 to its bit  
location; it is cleared by writing a “1” to the  
BM_STS bit. Writing a “0” to BM_CNTRL has no  
effect. Writing a “0” to BM_STS has no effect.  
Bus Master  
The Bus Master event logic is shown in Figure  
14. The BM_RLD and BM_STS bits are located  
in the PM1_BLK and BM_CNTRL is located in  
the MSC_BLK. These bits are described below.  
C lears  
B M _ S T S  
B M _ C N T R L  
B M _ R L D  
S C I  
FIGURE 14 - BUS MASTER SCI EVENT LOGIC  
174  
extend the number of bits in the timer, the power  
management timer generates an SCI interrupt (if  
enabled) when the last bit of the timer changes  
from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0. The implementation also  
includes a timer enable bit and a timer status  
bit. Three additional registers are used to read  
the timer value. Figure 15 shows the power  
management timer functional diagram.  
POWER MANAGEMENT TIMER  
This is a 24-bit free running timer that is  
required for ACPI compliance.  
management timer provides an accurate time  
function while the system is in the working state.  
This feature is a 24-bit counter which runs off of  
a 3.579545 MHz clock. To allow software to  
The power  
TMR_ON_OFF  
TMR_STS  
24-bit  
Counter  
TMR_PME  
3.5795454MHz  
24  
TMR_EN  
TMR_VAL  
FIGURE 15 - POWER MANAGEMENT TIMER  
This circuit has an enable/disable bit to turn the  
timer on/off (TMR_ON_OFF, MSC_EN Register,  
bit 1). The default of this bit is disabled (off). It  
also has a status bit, TMR_STS (PM1_STS  
register, bit 0), which is set when the timer  
changes from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 and is cleared by  
writing a 1 to its bit location (writing a 0 has no  
effect). In addition, it has a bit (TMR_EN,  
PM1_EN register, bit 0) to enable the power  
management event, TMR_PME, as an SCI  
event. The default of this enable/disable bit is  
disabled.  
The three bytes used to read the 24 bit timer  
value, TMR_VAL, are located in the PM1_TMR  
register at bits 0-23. Note: Reading the lower  
byte of the timer value latches the value in the  
other 2 bytes. Reading any byte other than the  
lower byte first won’t latch the other 2 bytes, and  
the data read will be the previous latched data.  
175  
with events (which have an associated interrupt  
status and enable bits, and sometimes an  
associated control function) and control  
features. The status registers illustrate what  
defined function is requesting ACPI interrupt  
services (SCI). Any status bit in the ACPI  
specification has the following attributes:  
POWER BUTTON OVERRIDE EVENT  
The power button has an override event as  
required for ACPI compliance. See the Soft  
Power Management Section. If the user presses  
the power button for more than four seconds  
while the system is in the working state, a  
hardware event is generated and the system will  
transition to the off state. There are status and  
enable bits associated with this feature in the  
PM1_BLK registers.  
A. Status bits are only set through some  
defined “hardware event”.  
B. Unless otherwise noted, Status bits are  
cleared by writing a “HIGH” to that bit  
position and upon VTR POR. Writing a “0”  
has no effect.  
RTC ALARM  
C. Status bits only generate interrupts while  
their associated bits in the enable register  
are set.  
D. Function bit positions in the status register  
have the same bit position in the enable  
register (there are exceptions to this rule;  
special status bits have no enables).  
The ACPI specification requires that the RTC  
alarm generate a hardware wake-up event from  
the sleeping state. The extended RTC alarm 2  
event can be enabled as both an SMI and an  
SCI event.  
There is a bit in the SMI Enable Register 2 and  
the SMI Status Register 2 to enable the RTC  
alarm 2 event as an SMI interrupt and to read its  
status. The status bit is set when the RTC  
generates an alarm event and is cleared by  
writing a “1” to this bit (writing a “0” has no  
effect). When the RTC generates an alarm  
event, the RTC_STS bit will be set. If the  
RTC_EN bit is set, an RTC hardware power  
Note that this implies that if the respective  
enable bit is reset and the hardware event  
occurs, the respective status bit is set, however  
no interrupt is generated until the enable bit is  
set. This allows software to test the state of the  
event (by examining the status bit) without  
necessarily generating an interrupt. There is a  
special class of status bits that have no  
respective enable bit; these are called out  
specifically, and the respective enable bit in the  
enable register is marked as reserved for these  
special cases.  
management event will be generated.  
The  
RTC_EN bit will be located at bit 6 of the SMI  
Enable Register 2, Logical Device 8, 0xB5. The  
RTC_STS bit will be located at bit 6 of the SMI  
Status Register 2, Logical Device 8, 0xB7.  
The enable registers allow the setting of the  
status bit to generate an interrupt. As a general  
rule, there is an enable bit in the enable register  
for every status bit in the status register. The  
control register provides special controls for the  
associated event, or special control features that  
are not associated with an interrupt event. The  
ordering of a register block is the status  
registers, followed by enable registers, followed  
by control registers.  
For SCI, the RTC_STS and RTC_EN bits are in  
the PM1_STS and PM1_EN registers.  
ACPI REGISTER BLOCK DESCRIPTION  
The ACPI register model consists of a number  
of fixed register blocks that perform designated  
functions. A register block consists of a number  
of registers that perform Status, Enable and  
Control functions. The ACPI specification deals  
176  
Table 71A and 71B list the PM1 and  
MSCregister blocks and the locations of the  
registers contained in these blocks. All of these  
new registers are to be powered by VTR. Table  
71C shows the block size and range of base  
addresses for each block.  
Table 71A - PM1 Register Block  
REGISTER  
PM1_STS 1  
PM1_STS 2  
PM1_EN 1  
SIZE  
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
ADDRESS  
<PM1_BLK>  
<PM1_BLK>+1h  
<PM1_BLK>+2h  
<PM1_BLK>+3h  
<PM1_BLK>+4h  
<PM1_BLK>+5h  
<PM1_BLK>+6h  
<PM1_BLK>+7h  
<PM1_BLK>+8h  
<PM1_BLK>+9h  
<PM1_BLK>+Ah  
<PM1_BLK>+Bh  
PM1_EN 2  
PM1_CNTRL 1  
PM1_CNTRL 2  
Reserved  
Reserved  
PM1_TMR 1  
PM1_TMR 2  
PM1_TMR 3  
PM1_TMR 4  
Table 71B - MSC Register Block  
REGISTER  
SIZE  
ADDRESS  
SCI_STS 1  
SCI_STS 2  
SCI_EN 1  
SCI_EN 2  
MSC_STS  
Reserved  
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
<MSC_BLK>  
<MSC_BLK>+1h  
<MSC_BLK>+2h  
<MSC_BLK>+3h  
<MSC_BLK>+4h  
<MSC_BLK>+5h  
<MSC_BLK>+6h  
<MSC_BLK>+7h  
MSC_EN  
MSC_CNTRL  
Table 71C - Register Block Attributes  
BLOCK NAME  
BLOCK SIZE  
BASE ADDRESS RANGE  
PM1_BLK  
MSC_BLK  
16  
8
0-FFFF  
0-FFFF  
177  
Power Management 1 Register Block (PM1_BLK)  
The registers in this block are powered by VTR.  
Power Management 1 Status Register 1 (PM1_STS 1)  
Register Location: <PM1_BLK> System I/O Space  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
Size:  
00h on VTR POR  
Read/Write (Note 0)  
8 bits  
Table 72 - Power Management 1 Status Register 1  
BIT  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
0
TMR_STS  
This is the timer status bit. This bit gets set any time bit 23 of the 24  
bit counter changes (whenever the MSB changes from low to high or  
high to low). Note: bits are counted from 0 to 23. While TMR_EN  
and TMR_STS are set a power management event is raised. Note:  
This bit is only set by hardware and is reset by software writing a “1”  
to this bit position and by VTR POR. Writing a “0” has no effect.  
Reserved.  
1-3  
4
Reserved  
BM_STS  
This is the bus master status bit. Cleared by VTR POR, and writing  
a “1” to this bit position (writing a “0” has no effect). Writing a “1” to  
this bit also clears BM_CNTRL.  
MSC_CNTRL register, sets this bit.  
BM_CNTRL, bit 1 of the  
5
GBL_STS  
Reserved  
The global status bit. This bit is set when BIOS_RLS is set. Setting  
BIOS_RLS will also raise an SCI if GBL_EN is set. This bit is only  
set by hardware and is reset by software writing a “1” to this bit  
position and by VTR POR. Writing a “0” has no effect. Writing a “1”  
to this bit also clears BIOS_RLS.  
6-7  
Reserved. These bits always return a value of “0”.  
178  
Power Management 1 Status Register 2 (PM1_STS 2)  
Register Location: <PM1_BLK>+1h System I/O Space  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
Size:  
00h on VTR POR  
Read/Write (Note 0)  
8 bits  
Table 73 - Power Management 1 Status Register 2  
BIT  
0
NAME  
PWRBTN_ST  
DESCRIPTION  
This bit is set when the Button_In signal is asserted. In the system  
working state, while PWRBTN_EN and PWRBTN_STS are both set,  
an SCI interrupt event is raised. In the sleeping state, while  
PWRBTN_EN and PWRBTN_STS are both set a wake-up event is  
generated (Note 2). This bit is only set, by hardware and is reset by  
software writing a “1” to this bit position, by VTR POR. Writing a 0  
has no effect. It is also reset as follows: If PWRBTNOR_EN is set,  
and if the Button_In signal is held asserted for more than four  
seconds, then this bit is cleared, the PWRBTNOR_STS bit is set  
and the system will transition into the soft off state (nPowerOn  
floats). Note: The implementation of the PWRBTN_STS and  
PWRBTN_EN as described here which requires that PWRBTN_EN  
be set for the button to generate a wake-up event is redundant  
relative to our present implementation of Button_In where pressing  
the button will always wake the machine (i.e., activate nPowerOn).  
Reserved.  
S
1
2
Reserved  
RTC_STS  
This bit is set when the RTC generates an alarm 2. Additionally if  
the RTC_EN bit is set then the setting of the RTC_STS bit will  
generate an SCI. (See Note)  
3
PWRBTNOR_  
STS  
This bit is set when the power switch over-ride function is set: If  
PWRBTNOR_EN is set, and if the Button_In signal is held asserted  
for more than four seconds. Hardware is also required to reset the  
PWRBTN_STS when issuing a power switch over-ride function.  
(See Note)  
4-6  
7
Reserved  
WAK_STS  
Reserved. These bits always return a value of “0”.  
This bit is set when the system is in the suspended state and an  
enabled resume event occurs. This bit is set on the high-to-low  
transition of nPowerOn. It is cleared by writing a 1 to its bit location  
when nPowerOn is active. Upon setting this bit, the suspend/resume  
state machine will transition the system to the on state. (See Note)  
Note: This bit is only set by hardware and is reset by software writing a “1” to this bit position and by  
VTR POR. Writing a “0” has no effect.  
179  
Power Management 1 Enable Register 1 (PM1_EN 1)  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<PM1_BLK>+2 System I/O Space  
00h on VTR POR  
Read/Write (Note 0)  
8 bits  
Size:  
Table 74 - Power Management 1 Enable Register 1  
DESCRIPTION  
BIT  
0
NAME  
TMR_EN  
This is the timer interrupt enable bit. When this bit is set, then, an  
SCI event is generated any time the TMR_STS bit is set. When this  
bit is reset, then no interrupt is generated when the TMR_STS bit is  
set.  
1-4  
5
Reserved  
GBL_EN  
Reserved. These bits always return a value of “0”.  
The global enable bit. When both the GBL_EN and the GBL_STS  
are set, an SCI is raised.  
6-7  
Reserved  
Reserved.  
Power Management 1 Enable Register 2 (PM1_EN 2)  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<PM1_BLK>+3 System I/O Space  
00h on VTR POR  
Read/Write (Note 0)  
8 bits  
Size:  
Table 75 - Power Management 1 Enable Register 2  
NAME DESCRIPTION  
BIT  
0
PWRBTN_EN This bit is used to enable the assertion of the Button_In to generate  
an SCI or wake-up event. The PWRBTN_STS bit is set any time the  
Button_In signal is asserted. The enable bit does not have to be set  
to enable the setting of the PWRBTN_STS bit by the assertion of the  
Button_In signal.  
1
2
Reserved  
RTC_EN  
Reserved.  
This bit is used to enable the setting of the RTC_STS bit to generate  
an SCI. The RTC_STS bit is set any time the RTC generates an  
alarm 2.  
3-7  
Reserved  
Reserved. These bits always return a value of “0”.  
180  
Power Management 1 Control Register 1 (PM1_CNTRL 1)  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<PM1_BLK>+4 System I/O Space  
00h on VTR POR  
Read/Write (Note 0)  
8 bits  
Size:  
Table 76 - Power Management 1 Control Register 1  
NAME DESCRIPTION  
BIT  
0
SCI_EN  
When this bit is set, then the SCI enabled power management events  
will generate an SCI interrupt. When this bit is reset, power  
management events will not generate an SCI interrupt.  
When set, this bit allows the generation of a bus master request to  
cause any processor in the “soft off” state (nPowerOn floats) to  
transition to the working state (nPowerOn active). When this bit is  
reset, the generation of a bus master request does not affect any  
processor in the “soft off” state. If this bit is set and BM_CNTRL is  
set, an SCI is raised.  
The global release bit. This bit is used by the ACPI software to raise  
an event to the BIOS software. BIOS software has corresponding  
enable and status bits to control its ability to receive ACPI events.  
Setting GBL_RLS sets BIOS_STS, and, if BIOS_EN is set, generates  
an SMI. Cleared by writing a “1” to BIOS_STS (writing a “0” has no  
effect).  
1
2
BM_RLD  
GBL_RLS  
Reserved  
3-7  
Reserved. These bits always return a value of “0”.  
Power Management 1 Control Register 2 (PM1_CNTRL 2)  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<PM1_BLK>+5 System I/O Space  
00h on VTR POR  
Read/Write (Note 0)  
8 bits  
Size:  
Table 77 - Power Management 1 Control Register 2  
DESCRIPTION  
BIT  
0
NAME  
Reserved  
Reserved. This field always returns “0”.  
1
PWRBTNOR_E  
N
This bit controls the power button over-ride function. When set, then  
any time the Button_In signal is asserted for more than four seconds  
the system will transition to the off state. When a power button over-  
ride event occurs, the logic should clear the PWRBTN_STS bit, and  
set the PWRBTNOR_STS bit.  
2-7  
Reserved  
Reserved. This field always returns “0”.  
181  
Power Management 1 Timer 1 (PM1_TMR 1)  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<PM1_BLK>+8h System I/O Space  
00h on VTR POR and RESET_DRV  
Read-Only  
8 bits  
Size:  
Table 78 - Power Management 1 Timer 1  
BIT  
0-7  
NAME  
TMR_VAL  
DESCRIPTION  
This read-only field returns the first byte of the running count of the  
power management timer. Note: Reading this byte latches the other  
two bytes. This is a 24-bit counter that runs off a 3.579545 MHz  
clock, and counts while in the working system state. The timer is reset  
to an initial value of “0” during a RESET_DRV or VTR POR and then  
continues counting until the 14.31818 MHz input to the chip is  
stopped. If the 14.31818 MHz clock is restarted without  
a
RESET_DRV or VTR POR, then the counter will continue counting  
from where it stopped. Any time bit 23 of the timer changes state  
(goes from LOW to HIGH or HIGH to LOW), the TMR_STS bit is set.  
If the TMR_EN bit is set an SCI interrupt is also generated.  
Power Management 1 Timer 2 (PM1_TMR 2)  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<PM1_BLK>+9h System I/O Space  
00h on VTR POR and RESET_DRV  
Read-Only  
8 bits  
Size:  
Table 79 - Power Management 1 Timer 2  
BIT  
0-7  
NAME  
TMR_VAL  
DESCRIPTION  
This read-only field returns the second byte of the running count of the  
power management timer. This is a 24-bit counter that runs off a  
3.579545 MHz clock and counts while in the working system state.  
The timer is reset to an initial value of “0” during a RESET_DRV or  
VTR POR and then continues counting until the 14.31818 MHz input  
to the chip is stopped. If the 14.31818 MHz clock is restarted without a  
RESET_DRV or VTR POR, then the counter will continue counting  
from where it stopped. Any time bit 23 of the timer changes state  
(goes from LOW to HIGH or HIGH to LOW), the TMR_STS bit is set.  
If the TMR_EN bit is set an SCI interrupt is also generated.  
182  
Power Management 1 Timer 3 (PM1_TMR 3)  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<PM1_BLK>+Ah System I/O Space  
00h on VTR POR and RESET_DRV  
Read-Only  
8 bits  
Size:  
Table 80 - Power Management 1 Timer 3  
BIT  
0-7  
NAME  
TMR_VAL  
DESCRIPTION  
This read-only field returns the third byte of the running count of the  
power management timer. This is a 24-bit counter that runs off a  
3.579545 MHz clock and counts while in the working system state.  
The timer is reset to an initial value of “0” during a RESET_DRV or  
VTR POR and then continues counting until the 14.31818 MHz input  
to the chip is stopped. If the 14.31818 MHz clock is restarted without a  
RESET_DRV or VTR POR, then the counter will continue counting  
from where it stopped. Any time bit 23 of the timer changes state  
(goes from LOW to HIGH or HIGH to LOW), the TMR_STS bit is set.  
If the TMR_EN bit is set an SCI interrupt is also generated.  
Power Management 1 Timer 4 (PM1_TMR 4)  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<PM1_BLK>+Bh System I/O Space  
00h on VTR POR and RESET_DRV  
Read-Only  
8 bits  
Size:  
Table 81 - Power Management 1 Timer4  
DESCRIPTION  
Reserved.  
BIT  
0-7  
NAME  
Reserved  
183  
Miscellaneous Block (MSC_BLK)  
The registers in this block are powered by VTR.  
SCI Status Register 1 (SCI_STS1) This register is used to read the status of the SCI inputs.  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<MSC_BLK>+0h System I/O Space  
N/A (Status Bits Cleared at Source)  
Read Only  
Size:  
8 bits  
Table 82 - SCI Status Register 1  
BIT  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NAME  
IDE1  
PINT  
U2INT  
U1INT  
FINT  
GPINT2  
GPINT1  
WDT  
DEFINITION  
IDE Interrupt Status. Cleared at source.  
Parallel Port Interrupt Status. Cleared at source.  
UART 2 Interrupt Status. Cleared at source.  
UART 1 Interrupt Status. Cleared at source.  
Floppy Disk Controller Interrupt Status. Cleared at source.  
Group Interrupt 2 Status. Cleared at source.  
Group Interrupt 1 Status. Cleared at source.  
Watch Dog Timer Status. Cleared at source.  
SCI Status Register 2 (SCI_STS2) This register is used to read the status of the SCI inputs.  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<MSC_BLK>+1h System I/O Space  
Bits 2, 3 Cleared on VTR POR, Others N/A  
Read/Write (Bits 0,1,4-7 are Read Only) (Note 0)  
8 bits  
Size:  
Table 83 - SCI Status Register 2  
BIT  
0
1
NAME  
MINT  
KINT  
DEFINITION  
Mouse Interrupt. Cleared at source.  
Keyboard Interrupt. Cleared at source.  
2
IRINT  
IR Interrupt. This bit is set by a transition on the IR pin (IRDX2 or  
GP12 as selected in CR L5-F1-B6 i.e., after the MUX). Cleared by  
writing a “1” to this bit location (writing a “0” has no effect). Note:  
This bit is cleared by VTR POR.  
3
BINT  
Button Interrupt. This bit is set when the DELAY counter is started.  
Cleared by writing a “1” to this bit location (writing a 0 has no effect).  
Note: This bit is cleared by VTR POR.  
4
5
P12  
ABINT  
8042 P1.2. Cleared at source.  
Access.bus Interrupt. Cleared at source.  
6
Reserved  
Reserved. This bit always returns “0”. Note: RTC_STS is located in  
the PM1_STS register.  
7
Reserved  
Reserved. This bit always returns zero.  
184  
SCI Enable Register 1 (SCI_EN1). This register is used to enable the different interrupt sources onto  
the group SCI output, and the group SCI output onto an IRQ pin for SCI.  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<MSC_BLK>+2h System I/O Space  
00h on VTR POR  
Read/Write (Note 0)  
8 bits  
Size:  
Table 84 - SCI Enable Register 1  
BIT  
0
1
2
3
NAME  
DEFINITION  
IDE Interrupt Enable. 1=Enable, 0=Disable  
EN_IDE1  
EN_PINT  
EN_U2INT  
EN_U1INT  
EN_FINT  
EN_GPINT2  
EN_GPINT1  
EN_WDT  
Parallel Port Interrupt Enable. 1=Enable, 0=Disable  
UART 2 Interrupt Enable. 1=Enable, 0=Disable  
UART 1 Interrupt Enable. 1=Enable, 0=Disable  
Floppy Disk Controller Interrupt Enable. 1=Enable, 0=Disable  
Group Interrupt 2 Enable. 1=Enable, 0=Disable  
Group Interrupt 1 Enable. 1=Enable, 0=Disable  
Watch Dog Timer Enable. 1=Enable, 0=Disable  
4
5
6
7
SCI Enable Register 2 (SCI_EN2). This register is used to enable the different interrupt sources onto  
the group SCI output, and the group SCI output onto an IRQ pin for SCI.  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<MSC_BLK>+3h System I/O Space  
00h on VTR POR  
Read/Write (Note 0)  
8 bits  
Size:  
Table 85 - SCI Enable Register 2  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
EN_MINT  
EN_KINT  
EN_IRINT  
EN_BINT  
EN_P12  
Mouse Interrupt. 1=Enable, 0=Disable  
Keyboard Interrupt. 1=Enable, 0=Disable  
IR Interrupt. 1=Enable, 0=Disable  
Button Interrupt. 1=Enable, 0=Disable  
8042 P1.2 Interrupt. 1=Enable, 0=Disable  
Access.bus Interrupt. 1=Enable, 0=Disable  
Reserved. This bit always returns “0”. Note: RTC_EN is located in  
the PM1_EN register.  
EN_ABINT  
Reserved  
7
Reserved  
Reserved. This bit always returns zero. Note SCI_EN is located in  
the PM1_CNTRL register.  
185  
Miscellaneous Status Register (MSC_STS)  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<MSC_BLK>+4h System I/O Space  
02h on VTR POR  
Read/Write (Note 0)  
8 bits  
Size:  
Table 86 - Miscellaneous Status Register  
DEFINITION  
BIT  
NAME  
0
BIOS_STS  
This bit is set when GBL_RLS is set. Setting GBL_RLS will also  
raise an SMI if BIOS_EN is set. This bit is cleared by a writing a “1”  
to its bit location (writing a “0” has no effect). Writing a “1” to this bit  
also clears GBL_RLS. Note: This bit is cleared by VTR POR  
VTR POR Status. This bit is set upon VTRPOR; it is cleared by a  
writing a “1” to its bit location (writing a “0” has no effect). Note: This  
bit is cleared by VTR POR  
Either Edge Triggered Interrupt Input 1 Status. This bit is cleared by  
writing a “1” to this bit position (writing a “0” has no effect). Note:  
This bit is cleared by VTR POR  
Either Edge Triggered Interrupt Input 2 Status. This bit is cleared by  
writing a “1” to this bit position (writing a “0” has no effect). Note:  
This bit is cleared by VTR POR  
Either Edge Triggered Interrupt Input 3 Status. This bit is cleared by  
writing a “1” to this bit position (writing a “0” has no effect). Note:  
This bit is cleared by VTR POR  
1
2
VTRP_STS  
EETI1_STS  
EETI2_STS  
EETI3_STS  
Reserved  
3
4
5-7  
Reserved. This bit always returns “0”.  
Miscellaneous Enable Register (MSC_EN)  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<MSC_BLK>+6h System I/O Space  
00h on VTR POR  
Read/Write (Note 0)  
8 bits  
Size:  
Table 87 - Miscellaneous Enable Register  
DEFINITION  
BIT  
NAME  
0
BIOS_EN  
This bit is used to enable the SMI event. When both the BIOS_EN  
and GBL_RLS are set, an SMI is generated.  
This bit is used to turn the power management timer on/off.  
0=Off, 1=On.  
1
TMR_ON_OF  
F
2-7  
Reserved  
Reserved. This bit always returns “0”.  
186  
Miscellaneous Control Register (MSC_CNTRL)  
Register Location:  
Default Value:  
Attribute:  
<MSC_BLK>+7h System I/O Space  
00h on VTR POR  
Read/Write (Note 0)  
8 bits  
Size:  
Table 88 - Miscellaneous Control Register  
DEFINITION  
BIT  
NAME  
0
BIOS_RLS  
This bit is used by the BIOS to raise an event to the ACPI software.  
ACPI software has corresponding enable and status bits to control  
its ability to receive SCI events. Set by writing “1” to this bit  
location. Setting BIOS_RLS sets GBL_STS, and if GBL_EN is set,  
generates an SCI. Writing “0” has no effect. Cleared by writing a “1”  
to the GBL_STS bit (writing a “0” has no effect).  
1
BM_CNTRL  
Reserved  
This bit is used to set the BM_STS bit and generate an SCI.  
BM_STS is set by writing “1” to this bit location. Writing “0” has no  
effect. It is cleared by writing a “1” to the BM_STS bit (writing a “0”  
has no effect). If BM_RLD is set, setting this bit also raises an SCI.  
Reserved. This bit always returns “0”.  
2-7  
Note: all bits described as "reserved" in writeable registers must be written with the value 0 when the  
register is written.  
187  
CONFIGURATION  
The configuration of the FDC37C93xAPM is  
The BIOS uses these configuration ports to  
initialize the logical devices at POST. The  
INDEX and DATA ports are only valid when the  
FDC37C93xAPM is in Configuration Mode.  
very flexible and is based on the configuration  
architecture implemented in typical Plug-and-  
Play components. The FDC37C93xAPM is  
designed for motherboard applications in which  
the resources required by their components are  
known. With its flexible resource allocation  
architecture, the FDC37C93xAPM allows the  
BIOS to assign resources at POST.  
The SYSOPT pin is latched on the falling edge  
of the RESET_DRV or on VCC Power On Reset  
to determine the configuration register's base  
address. The SYSOPT pin is used to select the  
CONFIG PORT's I/O address at power-up.  
Once powered up the configuration port base  
address can be changed through configuration  
registers CR26 and CR27. The SYSOPT pin  
is a hardware configuration pin which is  
shared with the nRTS1 signal on pin 148.  
During reset this pin is a weak active low signal  
which sinks 30µA. Note: All I/O addresses are  
qualified with AEN.  
SYSTEM ELEMENTS  
Primary Configuration Address Decoder  
After a hard reset (RESET_DRV pin asserted) or  
VCC Power On Reset the FDC37C93xAPM is in  
the Run Mode with all logical devices disabled.  
The logical devices may be configured through  
two standard Configuration I/O Ports (INDEX  
and DATA) by placing the FDC37C93xAPM  
into Configuration Mode.  
The INDEX and DATA ports are effective only  
when the chip is in the Configuration State.  
Table 89 - Configuration Port I/O Address  
SYSOPT= 0  
PORT NAME  
(Pull-down resistor)  
Refer to Note 1  
0x03F0  
SYSOPT= 1  
(10K Pull-up resistor)  
0x0370  
TYPE  
CONFIG PORT (Note 2)  
INDEX PORT (Note 2)  
DATA PORT  
Write  
Write  
0x03F0  
0x0370  
INDEX PORT + 1  
Read/Write  
Note 1: If using TTL RS232 drivers use 1K pull-down. If using CMOS RS232 drivers use  
10K pull-down.  
Note 2: The configuration port base address can be relocated through CR26 and CR27.  
Entering the Configuration State  
Exiting the Configuration State  
The device enters the Configuration State when  
the following Config Key is successfully written  
to the CONFIG PORT.  
The device exits the Configuration State when  
the following Config Key is successfully written  
to the CONFIG PORT.  
Config Key = < 0x55 >  
Config Key = < 0xAA >  
188  
CONFIGURATION SEQUENCE  
Exit Configuration Mode  
To program the configuration registers, the  
following sequence must be followed:  
1. Enter Configuration Mode  
To exit the Configuration State the system  
writes 0xAA to the CONFIG PORT. The chip  
returns to the RUN State. Note: Only two states  
are defined (Run and Configuration). In the Run  
State the chip will always be ready to enter the  
Configuration State.  
2. Configure the Configuration Registers  
3. Exit Configuration Mode.  
Enter Configuration Mode  
Programming Example  
To  
place  
the  
chip  
into  
the  
Configuration State the Config Key is sent to  
the chip's CONFIG PORT. The config key  
consists of a single write of 0x55 data to the  
CONFIG PORT. Once the initiation key is  
received correctly the chip enters into the  
Configuration State (the auto Config ports are  
enabled).  
The following is an example of a configuration  
program in Intel 8086 assembly language.  
;--------------------------------------------------.  
; ENTER CONFIGURATION MODE  
;--------------------------------------------------'  
MOV DX,3F0H  
|
MOV AX,055H  
OUT DX,AL  
Configuration Mode  
;--------------------------------------------------.  
; CONFIGURE REGISTER CRE0,  
; LOGICAL DEVICE 8  
;--------------------------------------------------'  
MOV DX,3F0H  
MOV AL,07H  
OUT DX,AL ; Point to LD# Config Reg  
MOV DX,3F1H  
|
|
The system sets the logical device information  
and activates desired logical devices through  
the INDEX and DATA ports. In configuration  
mode, the INDEX PORT is located at the  
CONFIG PORT address and the DATA PORT is  
at INDEX PORT address + 1.  
MOV AL, 08H  
The desired configuration registers are accessed  
in two steps:  
OUT DX,AL ; Point to Logical Device 8  
;
MOV DX,3F0H  
a. Write the index of the Logical Device  
Number Configuration Register (i.e., 0x07) to  
the INDEX PORT and then write the number  
of the desired logical device to the DATA  
PORT  
b. Write the address of the desired  
configuration register within the logical  
device to the INDEX PORT and then write or  
read the configuration register through the  
DATA PORT.  
MOV AL,E0H  
OUT DX,AL ; Point to CRE0  
MOV DX,3F1H  
MOV AL,02H  
OUT DX,AL ; Update CRE0  
;-------------------------------------------------.  
; EXIT CONFIGURATION MODE  
;-------------------------------------------------'  
MOV DX,3F0H  
|
MOV AX,0AAH  
OUT DX,AL  
Note: if accessing the Global Configuration  
Registers, step (a) is not required.  
189  
Notes: 1. HARD RESET: RESET_DRV pin asserted  
2. SOFT RESET: Bit 0 of Configuration Control register set to one  
3. All host accesses are blocked for 500µs after Vcc POR (see Power-up Timing Diagram)  
Table 90 - Configuration Registers  
HARD RESET  
/ VCC POR  
SOFT  
RESET  
INDEX  
TYPE  
VTR POR  
CONFIGURATION REGISTER  
GLOBAL CONFIGURATION REGISTERS  
0x02  
0x03  
0x07  
0x20  
0x21  
0x22  
0x23  
0x24  
0x26  
W
0x00  
0x00  
n/a  
Config Control  
R/W  
R/W  
R
0x03  
0x00  
0x30  
0x01  
0x00  
0x00  
0x04  
Index Address  
0x00  
0x30  
0x01  
0x00  
n/a  
Logical Device Number  
Device ID - hard wired  
Device Rev - hard wired  
Power Control  
R
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Power Mgmt  
n/a  
OSC  
Sysopt=0: 0xF0  
Sysopt=1: 0x70  
Sysopt=0: 0x03  
Sysopt=1: 0x03  
n/a  
Configuration Port Address Byte 0  
0x27  
R/W  
n/a  
Configuration Port Address Byte 1  
0x28  
0x2D  
0x2E  
0x2F  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
n/a  
Clock Mask Register  
TEST 1  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
TEST 2  
0x00  
n/a  
TEST 3  
LOGICAL DEVICE 0 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (FDD)  
0x30  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
Activate  
0x60,  
0x61  
0x03,  
0xF0  
0x03,  
0xF0  
Primary Base I/O Address  
0x70  
0x74  
0xF0  
0xF1  
0xF2  
0xF4  
0xF5  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x06  
0x02  
0x0E  
0x00  
0xFF  
0x00  
0x00  
0x06  
0x02  
n/a  
Primary Interrupt Select  
DMA Channel Select  
FDD Mode Register  
FDD Option Register  
FDD Type Register  
FDD0  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
FDD1  
190  
Table 90 - Configuration Registers  
HARD RESET  
/ VCC POR  
SOFT  
RESET  
INDEX  
TYPE  
VTR POR  
CONFIGURATION REGISTER  
LOGICAL DEVICE 1 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (IDE1)  
0x30  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
Activate  
0x60,  
0x61  
0x01,  
0xF0  
0x01,  
0xF0  
Primary Base I/O Address  
0x62,  
0x63  
R/W  
0x03,  
0xF6  
0x03,  
0xF6  
Second Base I/O Address  
0x70  
0xF0  
0xF1  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x0E  
0x0C  
0x00  
0x0E  
0x0C  
0x00  
Primary Interrupt Select  
HDCS0 Address Decoder  
HDCS1 Address Decoder  
LOGICAL DEVICE 2 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (IDE2)  
0x30  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
Activate  
0x60,  
0x61  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x00,  
0x00  
Primary Base I/O Address  
0x62,  
0x63  
R/W  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x00,  
0x00  
Second Base I/O Address  
0x70  
0xF0  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
n/a  
Primary Interrupt Select  
IDE2 Mode Register  
LOGICAL DEVICE 3 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (Parallel Port)  
0x30  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
Activate  
0x60,  
0x61  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x00,  
0x00  
Primary Base I/O Address  
0x70  
0x74  
0xF0  
0xF1  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x04  
0x3C  
0x00  
0x00  
0x04  
n/a  
Primary Interrupt Select  
DMA Channel Select  
Parallel Port Mode Register  
Parallel Port Mode Register 2  
n/a  
LOGICAL DEVICE 4 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (Serial Port 1)  
0x30  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
Activate  
0x60,  
0x61  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x00,  
0x00  
Primary Base I/O Address  
0x70  
0xF0  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
n/a  
Primary Interrupt Select  
Serial Port 1 Mode Register  
191  
Table 90 - Configuration Registers  
HARD RESET  
/ VCC POR  
SOFT  
RESET  
INDEX  
TYPE  
VTR POR  
CONFIGURATION REGISTER  
LOGICAL DEVICE 5 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (Serial Port 2)  
0x30  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
Activate  
0x60,  
0x61  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x00,  
0x00  
Primary Base I/O Address  
0x70  
0xF0  
0xF1  
0xF2  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
0x02  
0x03  
0x00  
n/a  
Primary Interrupt Select  
Serial Port 2 Mode Register  
IR Options Register  
n/a  
n/a  
IR Half Duplex Timeout  
LOGICAL DEVICE 6 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (RTC)  
0x30  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
Activate  
0x62,  
0x63  
0x00,  
0x70  
0x00,  
0x70  
Secondary Base Address for RTC  
Bank 1 and Bank 2  
0x70  
0xF0  
0xF1  
0xF2  
0xF3  
0xF4  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
W
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
n/a  
0x00  
n/a  
Primary Interrupt Select  
Real Time Clock Mode Register  
Serial EEPROM Mode Register  
Serial EEPROM Pointer  
Write EEPROM Data  
n/a  
0x00  
n/a  
bits[6:0]  
R
0x03  
0x03  
Write Status  
bit[7]  
R/W  
0xF5  
0xF6  
R
R
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Read EEPROM Data  
Read Status  
LOGICAL DEVICE 7 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (Keyboard)  
0x30  
0x70  
0x72  
0xF0  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
n/a  
Activate  
Primary Interrupt Select  
Second Interrupt Select  
KRESET and GateA20 Select  
LOGICAL DEVICE 8 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (Aux I/O)  
0x30  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
Activate  
0x60,  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x00,  
Primary Base I/O Address  
192  
Table 90 - Configuration Registers  
HARD RESET  
/ VCC POR  
SOFT  
RESET  
0x00  
INDEX  
TYPE  
VTR POR  
CONFIGURATION REGISTER  
0x61  
0x62,  
0x63  
R/W  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x00,  
0x00  
Second Base I/O Address  
0xB0  
0xB1  
0xB2  
0xB3  
0xB4  
0xB5  
0xB6  
0xB7  
0xB8  
0xC0  
0xC1  
0xC2  
0xC3  
0xC4  
0xC5  
0xC6  
0xC7  
0xC8  
0xC9  
0xCB  
0xCC  
0xD0  
0xD1  
0xD2  
0xD3  
0xD4  
0xD5  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x80  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x01  
0x01  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x80  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
Soft Power Enable Register 1  
Soft Power Enable Register 2  
Soft Power Status Register 1  
Soft Power Status Register 2  
SMI Enable Register 1  
SMI Enable Register 2  
SMI Status Register 1  
SMI Status Register 2  
Delay 2 Time Set Register  
GP40  
GP41  
GP42  
GP43  
GP44  
GP45  
GP46  
GP47  
GP50  
GP51  
GP53  
GP54  
GP60  
GP61  
GP62  
GP63  
GP64  
GP65  
193  
Table 90 - Configuration Registers  
HARD RESET  
/ VCC POR  
SOFT  
RESET  
n/a  
INDEX  
0xD6  
TYPE  
R/W  
VTR POR  
CONFIGURATION REGISTER  
GP66  
0x01  
0xD7  
0xD8  
0xD9  
0xDA  
0xDB  
0xDC  
0xDD  
0xDE  
0xDF  
0xE0  
0xE1  
0xE2  
0xE3  
0xE4  
0xE5  
0xE6  
0xE7  
0xE8  
0xE9  
0xEA  
0xEB  
0xEC  
0xED  
0xEF  
0xF0  
0xF1  
0xF2  
0xF3  
0xF4  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/WNote1  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x01  
0x00  
0x00  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
GP67  
GP70  
GP71  
GP72  
GP73  
GP74  
GP75  
GP76  
GP77  
GP10  
GP11  
GP12  
GP13  
GP14  
GP15  
GP16  
GP17  
GP20  
GP21  
GP22  
GP23  
GP24  
GP25  
GP_INT2  
GP_INT1  
GPR_GPW_EN  
WDT_VAL  
WDT_CFG  
WDT_CTRL  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
194  
Table 90 - Configuration Registers  
HARD RESET  
/ VCC POR  
SOFT  
RESET  
n/a  
INDEX  
0xF6  
TYPE  
R/W  
VTR POR  
CONFIGURATION REGISTER  
GP1  
0x00  
0xF7  
0xF8  
0xF9  
0xFA  
0xFB  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
n/a  
GP2  
GP4  
GP5  
GP6  
GP7  
LOGICAL DEVICE 9 CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (ACCESS.bus)  
0x30  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
Activate  
0x60,  
0x61  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x00,  
0x00  
Primary Base I/O Address  
0x70  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00  
Primary Interrupt Select  
LOGICAL DEVICE A CONFIGURATION REGISTERS (ACPI)  
0x30  
0x60,  
R/W  
R/W  
0x00  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x00,  
0x00  
0x00  
Activate  
Primary Base I/O Address  
PM1_BLK  
0x61 (2)  
0x62,  
R/W  
R/W  
Secondary Base I/O Address  
MSC_BLK  
0x63 (2)  
0x70  
Primary Interrupt Select  
Note 1:  
This register contains some bits which are read or write only.  
Note 2 : Registers 60 and 62 are the high byte; 61 and 63 are the low byte. For example to set  
the primary base address to 1234h, write 12h into 60 and 34h into 61.  
195  
The INDEX PORT is used to select  
a
Chip - Level (Global) Control/Configuration  
Registers [0x00-0x2F]  
configuration register in the chip. The DATA  
PORT is then used to access the selected  
register. These registers are accessable only in  
the Configuration Mode.  
The chip-level (global) registers lie in the  
address range [0x00-0x2F]. The design MUST  
use all 8 bits of the ADDRESS Port for register  
selection. All unimplemented registers and bits  
ignore writes and return zero when read.  
Table 91 - Chip Level Registers  
ADDRESS DESCRIPTION  
REGISTER  
STATE  
Chip (Global) Control Registers  
0x00 -  
0x01  
Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return 0.  
Config Control  
0x02 W  
The hardware automatically clears this bit after the  
write, there is no need for software to clear the bits.  
Bit [0]=1: Soft Reset. Refer to the "Configuration  
Registers" table for the soft reset value for each  
register.  
C
Default = 0x00  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Index Address  
0x03 R/W Bit[7]  
= 1Enable GP1, GP2, WDT_CTRL, GP4, GP5,  
GP6, GP7, Soft Power and SMI Enable  
and Status Register access when not in  
configuration mode  
Default = 0x03  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
= 0Disable GP1, GP2, WDT_CTRL, GP4, GP5,  
GP6, GP7, Soft Power and SMI Enable  
and Status Register access when not in  
configuration mode (Default)  
Bit [6:2]  
Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return 0.  
Bits[1:0]  
Sets GP index register address, used when in Run  
mode (not in Configuration Mode).  
= 11 0xEA (Default)  
= 10 0xE4  
= 01 0xE2  
= 00 0xE0  
0x04 - 0x06  
Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return 0.  
196  
Table 91 - Chip Level Registers  
DESCRIPTION  
REGISTER  
ADDRESS  
STATE  
Logical Device #  
0x07 R/W A write to this register selects the current logical  
device. This allows access to the control and  
configuration registers for each logical device.  
Note: the Activate command operates only on the  
selected logical device.  
C
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Card Level  
Reserved  
0x08 - 0x1F  
Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return 0.  
Chip Level, SMSC Defined  
Device ID  
0x20 R  
A
read-only register which provides device  
C
C
C
identification. Bits[7:0] = 0x30 when read.  
Hard wired  
= 0x30  
Device Rev  
0x21 R  
A read-only register which provides device revision  
information. Bits[7:0] = 0x01 when read.  
Hard wired  
= 0x01  
Power Control  
0x22 R/W Bit[0] FDC Power  
Bit[1] IDE1 Enable  
Default = 0x00.  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv hardware  
signal.  
Bit[2] IDE2 Enable  
Bit[3] Parallel Port Power  
Bit[4] Serial Port 1 Power  
Bit[5] Serial Port 2 Power  
Bit[6] ACCESS.bus Power  
Bit[7] Reserved (read as 0)  
= 0  
= 1  
Power off or disabled  
Power on or enabled  
Power Mgmt  
0x23 R/W Bit[0] FDC  
Bit[1] IDE1  
C
Default = 0x00.  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv hardware  
signal  
Bit[2] IDE2  
Bit[3] Parallel Port  
Bit[4] Serial Port 1  
Bit[5] Serial Port 2  
Bit[6:7] Reserved (read as 0)  
= 0  
= 1  
Intelligent Pwr Mgmt off  
Intelligent Pwr Mgmt on  
197  
Table 91 - Chip Level Registers  
DESCRIPTION  
REGISTER  
OSC  
ADDRESS  
STATE  
0x24 R/W Bit[0] 24/48 MHz Clock Select (Pin 35)  
C
= 0  
= 1  
24 MHz (Default)  
48 MHz  
Default = 0x04, on  
VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv hardware  
signal.  
Bit [1] PLL Control  
= 0PLL is on (backward compatible)  
= 1PLL is off  
Bit[3:2] OSC  
= 01 Osc is on, BRG clock is on.  
= 10 Same as above (01) case.  
= 00 Osc is on, BRG Clock Enabled.  
= 11 Osc is off, BRG clock is disabled.  
Bit[5:4] Reserved, set to “0”  
Bit[6] 16 Bit Address Qualification  
= 012 Bit Address Qualification  
= 116 Bit Address Qualification  
(Refer to the 16-bit Address Qualification in  
the SMSC Defined Logical Device Configuration  
Register, Device 2 section.)  
Bit[7] IRQ8 Polarity  
= 0IRQ8 is active high  
= 1IRQ8 is active low  
Chip Level  
Vendor Defined  
0x25  
0x26  
Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return 0.  
Bit[7:1] Configuration Address Bits [7:1]  
Bit[0] = 0  
See Note 1  
Configuration  
Address Byte 0  
C
C
Default  
=0xF0 (Sysopt=0)  
=0x70 (Sysopt=1)  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Configuration  
Address Byte 1  
0x27  
0x28  
Bit[7:0] Configuration Address Bits [15:8]  
See Note 1  
Default = 0x03  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Clock Mask  
Register  
Mask clocks as defined below.  
0= Clock On, 1= Clock Masked (pin tri-states)  
198  
Table 91 - Chip Level Registers  
DESCRIPTION  
REGISTER  
ADDRESS  
STATE  
Bit[0] 14.318 MHz Clock Output 1 (Pin 37)  
Bit[1] 14.318 MHz Clock Output 2 (Pin 38)  
Bit[2] 14.318 MHz Clock Output 3 (Pin 39)  
Bit[3] 16 MHz Clock Output (Pin 36)  
Bit[4] High Speed Clock Out 24/48 MHz (Pin 35)  
Bit[7:5] Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return  
0.  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR and  
Hard Reset  
Chip Level  
0x29 -0x2C Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return 0.  
Vendor Defined  
TEST 1  
TEST 2  
TEST 3  
0x2D R/W Test Modes: Reserved for SMSC. Users should not  
write to this register; may produce undesired  
results.  
C
C
C
0x2E R/W Test Modes: Reserved for SMSC. Users should not  
write to this register; may produce undesired  
results.  
0x2F R/W Test Modes: Reserved for SMSC. Users should not  
write to this register; may produce undesired  
results.  
Default = 0x00, on  
VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv hardware  
signal  
Note 1: To allow the selection of the configuration address to a user defined location, these  
Configuration Address Bytes are used. There is no restriction on the address chosen, except that A0  
is 0, that is, the address must be on an even byte boundary. As soon as both bytes are changed, the  
configuration space is moved to the specified location with no delay (Write byte 0, then byte 1; writing  
CR27 changes the base address).  
The configuration address is only reset to its default address upon a Hard Reset or VCC POR. The  
default configuration address is either 3F0 or 370, as specified by the SYSOPT pin.  
This change affects SMSC Mode only.  
199  
logical device and is selected with the Logical  
Device # Register (0x07).  
Logical  
Registers [0x30-0xFF]  
Device  
Configuration/Control  
The INDEX PORT is used to select a specific  
logical device register. These registers are then  
accessed through the DATA PORT.  
Used to access the registers that are assigned  
to each logical unit. This chip supports nine  
logical units and has nine sets of logical device  
registers. The nine logical devices are Floppy,  
IDE1, IDE2, Parallel, Serial 1 and Serial 2, Real  
Time Clock, Keyboard Controller, and  
Auxiliary_I/O. A separate set (bank) of control  
and configuration registers exists for each  
The Logical Device registers are accessible only  
when the device is in the Configuration State.  
The logical register addresses are:  
Table 92 - Logical Device Registers  
LOGICAL DEVICE  
REGISTER  
ADDRESS  
DESCRIPTION  
STATE  
ActivateNote1  
(0x30)  
Bit[7:1] Reserved, set to “0”.  
Bit[0]  
C
Default = 0x00  
= 1 Activates the logical device currently  
selected through the Logical Device #  
register.  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
= 0  
Logical device currently selected is  
inactive.  
Logical Device Control  
Logical Device Control  
Mem Base Addr  
(0x31-0x37) Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return  
0.  
C
C
C
C
(0x38-0x3f) Vendor Defined - Reserved - Writes are  
ignored, reads return 0.  
(0x40-0x5F) Reserved - Writes are ignored, reads return  
0.  
I/O Base Addr.  
(0x60-0x6F) Registers 0x60 and 0x61 set the base  
address for the device. If more than one  
(see Device Base I/O  
Address Table)  
0x60,2,... = base address is required, the second base  
addr[15:8]  
address is set by registers 0x62 and 0x63.  
Refer to Table 91 for the number of base  
address registers used by each device.  
Default = 0x00  
0x61,3,... =  
addr[7:0]  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Unused registers will ignore writes and return  
“0” when read.  
200  
Table 92 - Logical Device Registers  
LOGICAL DEVICE  
REGISTER  
ADDRESS  
(0x70,072)  
DESCRIPTION  
STATE  
Interrupt Select  
0x70 is implemented for each logical device.  
Refer to Interrupt Configuration Register  
description. Only the keyboard controller  
uses Interrupt Select register 0x72. Unused  
register (0x72) will ignore writes and return  
zero when read. Interrupts default to edge  
high (ISA compatible).  
C
Defaults :  
0x70 = 0x00,  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
0x72 = 0x00,  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
(0x71,0x73) Reserved - not implemented. These register  
locations ignore writes and return zero when  
read.  
DMA Channel Select  
(0x74,0x75) Only 0x74 is implemented for FDC, serial  
C
port 2 and Parallel port.  
0x75 is not  
Default = 0x04  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
implemented and ignores writes and returns  
“0” when read. Refer to DMA Channel  
Configuration.  
32-Bit Memory Space  
Configuration  
(0x76-0xA8) Reserved - not implemented. These register  
locations ignore writes and return “0” when  
read.  
Logical Device  
Logical Device Config.  
Reserved  
(0xA9-0xDF) Reserved - not implemented. These register  
locations ignore writes and return “0” when  
read.  
C
C
C
(0xE0-0xFE) Reserved - Vendor Defined (see SMSC  
defined  
Logical  
Device  
Configuration  
Registers)  
0xFF  
Reserved  
Note 1:  
A logical device will be active and powered up according to the following equation:  
DEVICE ON (ACTIVE) = (Activate Bit SET or Pwr/Control Bit SET).  
The Logical device's Activate Bit and its Pwr/Control Bit are linked such that setting or clearing one  
sets or clears the other. If the I/O Base Addr of the logical device is not within the Base I/O range as  
shown in the Logical Device I/O map, then read or write is not valid and is ignored.  
201  
Table 93 - I/O Base Address Configuration Register Description  
BASE I/O  
LOGICAL  
DEVICE LOGICAL REGISTER  
RANGE  
(NOTE 1)  
FIXED  
BASE OFFSETS  
NUMBER DEVICE  
INDEX  
FDC  
(Note 4)  
0x00  
0x60,0x61  
[0x100:0x0FF8]  
ON 8 BYTE BOUNDARIES +1 : SRB  
+0 : SRA  
+2 : DOR  
+3 : TSR  
+4 : MSR/DSR  
+5 : FIFO  
+7 : DIR/CCR  
0x01  
IDE1  
0x60,0x61  
[0x100:0x0FF8]  
IDE TASK  
ON 8 BYTE BOUNDARIES  
+0 : Data Register (16 bit)  
+1 : ERRF/WPRE  
+2 : Sector Count  
+3 : Sector Number  
+4 : Cylinder Low  
+5 : Cylinder High  
+6 : Head,Drive  
(Note 4)  
+7 : Status/Command  
0x62,0x63  
0x60,0x61  
[0x100:0x0FFF]  
ON 1 BYTE BOUNDARIES  
IDE MISC AT  
+ 0 : Status/Fixed Disk  
0x02  
IDE2  
[0x100:0x0FF8]  
IDE TASK  
ON 8 BYTE BOUNDARIES  
+0 : Data Register (16 bit)  
+1 : ERRF/WPRE  
+2 : Sector Count  
+3 : Sector Number  
+4 : Cylinder Low  
+5 : Cylinder High  
+6 : Head,Drive  
(Note 4)  
+7 : Status/Command  
0x62,0x63  
[0x100:0x0FFF]  
IDE MISC AT  
ON 1 BYTE BOUNDARIES  
+ 0 : Status/Fixed Disk  
202  
Table 93 - I/O Base Address Configuration Register Description  
BASE I/O  
LOGICAL  
DEVICE LOGICAL REGISTER  
RANGE  
(NOTE 1)  
FIXED  
BASE OFFSETS  
NUMBER DEVICE  
INDEX  
0x03  
Parallel  
Port  
0x60,0x61  
[0x100:0x0FFC]  
ON 4 BYTE BOUNDARIES +1 : Status  
+0 : Data|ecpAfifo  
(EPP not supported)  
or  
[0x100:0x0FF8]  
+2 : Control  
+3 : EPP Address  
+4 : EPP Data 0  
ON 8 BYTE BOUNDARIES +5 : EPP Data 1  
(all modes supported, +6 : EPP Data 2  
EPP is only available when +7 : EPP Data 3  
the base address is on an 8- +400h : cfifo|ecpDfifo|tfifo  
byte boundary)  
|cnfgA  
+401h : cnfgB  
+402h : ecr  
0x04  
0x05  
0x06  
Serial Port 0x60,0x61  
1
[0x100:0x0FF8]  
ON 8 BYTE BOUNDARIES +1 : IER|MSB div  
+0 : RB/TB|LSB div  
+2 : IIR/FCR  
+3 : LCR  
+4 : MSR  
+5 : LSR  
+6 : MSR  
+7 : SCR  
Serial Port 0x60,0x61  
2
[0x100:0x0FF8]  
ON 8 BYTE BOUNDARIES +1 : IER|MSB div  
+0 : RB/TB|LSB div  
+2 : IIR/FCR  
+3 : LCR  
+4 : MSR  
+5 : LSR  
+6 : MSR  
+7 : SCR  
RTC  
n/a  
0x62,0x63  
n/a  
Not Relocatable  
Fixed Base Address: 70,71 +1: Data Register  
[0x100:0xFFE] +0: Index Register  
ON 2 BYTE BOUNDARIES +1: Data Register  
Not Relocatable +0 : Data Register  
Fixed Base Address: 60,64 +4 : Command/Status Reg.  
+0: Index Register  
0x07  
0x08  
KYBD  
Aux. I/O  
0x60,0x61  
0x62,0x63  
[0x00:0xFFF]  
ON 1 BYTE BOUNDARIES  
+0 : GPR  
[0x00:0xFFF]  
+0 : GPW  
ON 1 BYTE BOUNDARIES  
203  
Table 93 - I/O Base Address Configuration Register Description  
BASE I/O  
LOGICAL  
DEVICE LOGICAL REGISTER  
RANGE  
(NOTE 1)  
FIXED  
BASE OFFSETS  
NUMBER DEVICE  
INDEX  
Access.  
Bus  
0x09  
0x60,0x61  
[0x00:0x0FFC]  
ON 4 BYTE BOUNDARIES +1 : Own Address Reg  
+2 : Data Reg  
+0 : Control/Status Reg  
+3 : Clock Register  
+0: PM1_STS1  
+1: PM1_STS2  
+2: PM1_EN1  
+3: PM1_EN2  
+4: PM1_CNTRL1  
+5: PM1_CNTRL2  
+6: Reserved  
0x0A  
ACPI  
0x60,0x61  
[0x0000:0xFFFF]  
ON 16 BYTE BOUNDARIES  
+7: Reserved  
+8: PM1_TMR1  
+9: PM1_TMR2  
+10: PM 1_TMR3  
+11: PM 1_TMR4  
+0: SCI_STS1  
+1: SCI_STS2  
+2: SCI_EN1  
0x62,0x63  
[0x0000:0xFFFF]  
ON 8 BYTE BOUNDRIES  
+3: SCI_EN2  
+4: MSC_STS  
+5: Reserved  
+6: MSC_EN  
+7: MSC_CNTRL  
Note 1:  
Note 2:  
This chip uses ISA address bits [A11:A0] to decode the base address of each of its  
logical devices.  
The IDE/FDC split register, normally found at either 0x3F7 or 0x377 is now an FDC  
support only register. The IDE logical device will now support only a status register  
(typically found at 0x3F6 or 0x376). The IDE Decoder operates as follows:  
nHDCS0# = IDE TASK BASE + [7:0]  
nHDCS1# = IDE MISC AT BASE + 0 (typically located at 0x3F6 or 0x376)  
204  
Table 94 - Interrupt Select Configuration Register Description  
NAME  
Interrupt  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
0x70 (R/W)  
Bit[3:0] selects which interrupt level is used for Interrupt  
C
Request Level  
Select 0  
0.  
0x00=no interrupt selected.  
0x01=IRQ1  
0x02=Reserved  
0x03=IRQ3  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
·
·
·
0x0D=Reserved/IRQ13 (Note 1)  
0x0E=IRQ14  
0x0F=IRQ15  
All interrupts are edge high (except ECP/EPP)  
Note: An Interrupt is activated by setting the Interrupt Request Level Select 0 register to a non-zero  
value AND :  
for the FDC logical device by setting DMAEN, bit D3 of the Digital Output Register.  
for the PP logical device by setting IRQE, bit D4 of the Control Port and in addition  
for the PP logical device in ECP mode by clearing serviceIntr, bit D2 of the ecr.  
for the Serial Port logical device by setting any combination of bits D0-D3 in the IER and by  
setting the OUT2 bit in the UART's Modem Control (MCR) Register.  
for the RTC by (refer to the RTC section of this spec.)  
for the KYBD by (refer to the KYBD controller section of this spec.)  
Note: IRQ pins must tri-state if not used/selected by any Logical Device. Refer to Note A.  
Note: IRQ 13 is only valid for SCI, as selected through Logical Device A.  
Table 95 - DMA Channel Select Configuration Register Description  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
DMA Channel  
Select  
0x74 (R/W)  
Bit[2:0] select the DMA Channel.  
0x00=DMA0  
C
0x01=DMA1  
0x02=DMA2  
0x03=DMA3  
0x04-0x07= No DMA active  
Default = 0x04  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Note 1:  
A DMA channel is activated by setting the DMA Channel Select register to [0x00-0x03]  
AND :  
for the FDC logical device by setting DMAEN, bit D3 of the Digital Output Register.  
for the PP logical device in ECP mode by setting dmaEn, bit D3 of the ecr.  
DMAREQ pins must tri-state if not used/selected by any Logical Device.  
Note 2:  
205  
Note A: Logical Device IRQ and DMA Operation  
1. IRQ and DMA Enable and Disable: Any time the IRQ or DACK for a logical block is disabled by  
a register bit in that logical block, the IRQ and/or DACK must be disabled. This is in addition to  
the IRQ and DACK disabled by the Configuration Registers (active bit or address not valid).  
a. FDC: For the following cases, the IRQ and DACK used by the FDC are disabled (high  
impedance). Will not respond to the DREQ  
·
·
Digital Output Register (Base+2) bit D3 (DMAEN) set to "0".  
The FDC is in power down (disabled).  
b. IDE1 and IDE2: No additional conditions.  
c. Serial Port 1 and 2:  
·
Modem Control Register (MCR) Bit D2 (OUT2) - When OUT2 is a logic "0", the  
serial port interrupt is forced to a high impedance state - disabled.  
d. Parallel Port:  
·
SPP and EPP modes: Control Port (Base+2) bit D4 (IRQE) set to "0", IRQ  
is  
disabled (high impedance).  
·
ECP Mode:  
(1) (DMA) dmaEn from ecr register. See table.  
(2) IRQ - See table.  
MODE  
(FROM ECR REGISTER)  
IRQ PIN  
PDREQ PIN  
CONTROLLED BY CONTROLLED BY  
000  
001  
010  
011  
100  
101  
110  
111  
PRINTER  
SPP  
IRQE  
IRQE  
(on)  
dmaEn  
dmaEn  
dmaEn  
dmaEn  
dmaEn  
dmaEn  
dmaEn  
dmaEn  
FIFO  
ECP  
(on)  
EPP  
IRQE  
IRQE  
(on)  
RES  
TEST  
CONFIG  
IRQE  
e. Game Port and ADDR: no IRQ or DACK used.  
f. Real Time Clock and Keyboard Controller: Refer to the RTC and KBD section of this  
spec.  
206  
Configuration Registers reset to their default  
values only on hard resets generated by VCC or  
VTR POR (as shown) or the RESET_DRV  
signal. These registers are not affected by soft  
resets.  
SMSC Defined Logical Device Configuration  
Registers  
The  
SMSC  
Specific  
Logical  
Device  
Table 96 - Floppy Disk Controller, Logical Device 0 [Logical Device Number = 0x00]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
FDD Mode Register  
0xF0 R/W Bit[0] Floppy Mode  
C
= 0 Normal Floppy Mode (default)  
= 1 Enhanced Floppy Mode 2 (OS2)  
Bit[1] FDC DMA Mode  
Default = 0x0E  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
= 0  
= 1  
Burst Mode is enabled  
Non-Burst Mode (default)  
Bit[3:2] Interface Mode  
= 11 AT Mode (default)  
= 10 (Reserved)  
= 01 PS/2  
= 00 Model 30  
Bit[4] Swap Drives 0,1 Mode  
= 0  
= 1  
No swap (default)  
Drive and Motor sel 0 and 1 are swapped.  
Bit[7:5] Reserved, set to zero.  
FDD Option  
Register  
0xF1 R/W Bit[1:0] Reserved, set to zero  
Bit[3:2] Density Select  
C
= 00 Normal (default)  
= 01 Normal (reserved for users)  
= 10 1 (forced to logic "1")  
= 11 0 (forced to logic "0")  
Bit[4] Media ID 0 Polarity  
= 0: Don’t invert (default)  
= 1: Invert  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Bit[5] Media ID 1 Polarity  
= 0: Don’t invert (default)  
= 1: Invert  
Bits[7:6] Boot Floppy  
= 00 FDD 0 (default)  
= 01 FDD 1  
= 10 Reserved (neither drive A or B is a boot  
drive).  
= 11 Reserved (neither drive A or B is a boot  
drive).  
207  
Table 96 - Floppy Disk Controller, Logical Device 0 [Logical Device Number = 0x00]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
FDD Type Register  
0xF2 R/W Bit[1:0] Floppy Drive A Type  
Bit[3:2] Floppy Drive B Type  
C
Default = 0xFF  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Bit[5:4] Reserved (could be used to store Floppy  
Drive C type)  
Bit[7:6] Reserved (could be used to store Floppy  
Drive D type)  
Note: The FDC37C93xAPM supports two floppy  
drives  
0xF3 R  
Reserved, Read as 0 (read only)  
C
C
FDD0  
0xF4 R/W Bit[1:0] Drive Type Select: DT1, DT0  
Bit[2] Read as 0 (read only)  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Bit[4:3] Data Rate Table Select: DRT1, DRT0  
Bit[5] Read as 0 (read only)  
Bit[6] Precompensation Disable PTS  
=0 Use Precompensation  
=1 No Precompensation  
Bit[7] Read as 0 (read only)  
FDD1  
0xF5 R/W Refer to definition and default for 0xF4  
C
208  
Table 97 - IDE Drive 1, Logical Device 1 [Logical Device Number = 0x01]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
HDCS0 Address  
Decoder  
0xF0 R/W  
Bit[7:5] Reserved  
Bit[4:2] Mask Bits  
4 3 2 Description  
Default = 0x0C  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv or  
0 0 0 mask no bits (1 byte)  
0 0 1 mask lowest bit (2 bytes)  
0 1 0 mask lowest 2 bits (4 bytes)  
0 1 1 mask lowest 3 bits (8 bytes)  
1 0 0 mask lowest 4 bits (16 bytes)  
1 0 1 mask lowest 5 bits (32 bytes)  
1 1 0 reserved (do not program)  
1 1 1 reserved ( do not program)  
Software Reset  
Bit[1:0] Qualify for HDCS0 Option Select  
1 0 Description  
0 0 = decoded with AEN  
0 1 = decoded with AEN and nIOR  
1 0 = decoded with AEN and nIOW  
1 1 = decoded with AEN and (nIOR or nIOW)  
HDCS1 Address  
Decoder  
0xF1 R/W  
Bit[7:5] Reserved  
Bit[4:2] Mask Bits  
4 3 2 Description  
0 0 0 mask no bits (1 byte)  
Default = 0x00  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv or  
0 0 1 mask lowest bit (2 bytes)  
0 1 0 mask lowest 2 bits (4 bytes)  
0 1 1 mask lowest 3 bits (8 bytes)  
1 0 0 mask lowest 4 bits (16 bytes)  
1 0 1 mask lowest 5 bits (32 bytes)  
1 1 0 reserved (do not program)  
1 1 1 reserved ( do not program)  
Software Reset  
Bit[1:0] Qualify for HDCS1 Option Select  
1 0 Description  
0 0 = decoded with AEN  
0 1 = decoded with AEN and nIOR  
1 0 = decoded with AEN and nIOW  
1 1 = decoded with AEN and (nIOR or nIOW)  
Note: IDE1 HI and LO byte pass through external buffers controlled by IDE1_OE.  
209  
Table 98 - IDE Drive 2, Logical Device 2 [Logical Device Number = 0x02]  
NAME REG INDEX DEFINITION  
0xF0 R/W Bit[0] : IDE2 Configuration Options  
= 0 : IDE2 HI and LO bytes pass through external  
STATE  
IDE2  
Mode Register  
C
buffers controlled by IDE2_OE.  
= 1 : IDE2_OE not used. IDE2 HI and LO byte  
passes through external buffer controlled by  
IDE1_OE.  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Bit[7:1] : Reserved, set to “0”  
When IDE2 is not active (IDE2 active bit = L2 - CR30 - bit 0), nHDCS2, nHDCS3 and IDE2_IRQ are in  
high impedance; 16_ADR = CR24.6  
Table 99 - 16 Bit Address Qualification  
IDE2 ACTIVE BIT = 1  
16BIT_ADR = X  
IDE2 ACTIVE BIT = 0  
16BIT_ADR = 0  
IDE2 ACTIVE BIT = 0  
16BIT_ADR = 1  
nHDCS2 (pin 27)  
nHDCS3 (pin 28)  
IDE2_IRQ (pin 29)  
nCS (pin 53)  
Output  
Output  
Hi-Z  
Hi-Z  
Input (SA13)  
Input (SA14)  
Input (SA15)  
Input (SA12)  
Input (IRQ)  
Input (SA12)  
Hi-Z  
Input (SA12)  
210  
Table 100 - Parallel Port, Logical Device 3 [Logical Device Number = 0x03]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
PP Mode Register  
0xF0 R/W Bit[2:0] Parallel Port Mode  
= 100 Printer Mode (default)  
C
Default = 0x3C  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
= 000 Standard and Bi-Directional (SPP) Mode  
= 001 EPP-1.9 and SPP Mode  
= 101 EPP-1.7 and SPP Mode  
= 010 ECP Mode  
= 011 ECP and EPP-1.9 Mode  
= 111 ECP and EPP-1.7 Mode  
Bit[6:3] ECP FIFO Threshold  
0111b (default)  
Bit[7] PP Interupt Type  
Not valid when the parallel port is in the Printer  
Mode (100) or the Standard & Bi-directional Mode  
(000).  
= 1Pulsed Low, released to high-Z.  
= 0IRQ follows nACK when parallel port in EPP  
Mode or [Printer,SPP, EPP] under ECP.  
IRQ level type when the parallel port is in ECP,  
TEST, or Centronics FIFO Mode.  
PP Mode Register 2  
Bit[1:0] PPFDC - muxed PP/FDC control  
= 00 Normal Parallel Port Mode  
= 01 PPFD1: Drive 0 is on the FDC pins  
Drive 1 is on the parallel port pins  
Drive 2 is on the FDC pins  
0xF1 R/W  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Drive 3 is on the FDC pins  
= 10 PPFD2: Drive 0 is on the parallel port pins  
Drive 1 is on the Parallel port pins  
Drive 2 is on the FDC pins  
Drive 3 is on the FDC pins  
Bit[7:2] Reserved. Set to “0”  
211  
Table 101 - Serial Port 1, Logical Device 4 [Logical Device Number = 0x04]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
Serial Port 1  
Mode Register  
Bit[0] MIDI Mode  
0xF0 R/W  
C
= 0MIDI support disabled (default)  
= 1MIDI support enabled  
Bit[1] High Speed  
= 0High Speed Disabled(default)  
= 1High Speed Enabled  
Bit[6:2] Reserved, set to zero  
Bit[7]: Share IRQ  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
=0 UARTS use different IRQs  
=1 UARTS share a common IRQ  
See Note below  
Note: To properly share an IRQ:  
1. Configure UART1 (or UART2) to use the desired IRQ pin.  
2. Configure UART2 (or UART1) to use No IRQ selected.  
3. Set the share IRQ bit.  
If both UARTs are configured to use different IRQ pins and the share IRQ bit is set, then both of the  
UART IRQ pins will assert when either UART generates an interrupt.  
Table 102 - Serial Port 2, Logical Device 5 [Logical Device Number = 0x05]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
Serial Port 2  
Mode Register  
0xF0 R/W Bit[0] MIDI Mode  
C
= 0MIDI support disabled (default)  
= 1MIDI support enabled  
Bit[1] High Speed  
= 0High Speed disabled(default)  
= 1High Speed enabled  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Bit[7:2] Reserved, set to “0”  
212  
Table 102 - Serial Port 2, Logical Device 5 [Logical Device Number = 0x05]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
IR Option Register  
0xF1 R/W Bit[0] Receive Polarity  
C
= 0  
= 1  
Active High (Default)  
Active Low  
Default = 0x02  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Bit[1] Transmit Polarity  
= 0 Active High  
= 1 Active Low (Default)  
Bit[2] Duplex Select  
= 0  
Full Duplex (Default)  
= 1Half Duplex  
Bit[5:3] IR Mode  
= 000 Standard (Default)  
= 001 IrDA  
= 010 ASK-IR  
= 011 Reserved  
= 1xx Reserved  
Bit[6] IR Location Mux  
= 0  
= 1  
Use Serial port TX2 and RX2 (Default)  
Use alternate IRRX (pin 98) and IRTX (pin  
99)  
Bit[7] Reserved, write 0.  
IR Half Duplex  
Timeout  
0xF2  
Bit [7:0]  
These bits set the half duplex time-out for the IR port.  
This value is 0 to 10msec in 100msec increments.  
0= blank during transmit/receive  
Default = 0x03  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
1= blank during transmit/receive + 100msec  
213  
Table 103 - RTC, Logical Device 6 [Logical Device Number = 0x06]  
REG INDEX DEFINITION  
NAME  
STATE  
RTC Mode Register  
0xF0 R/W Bit[0] = 1 Lock CMOS RAM 80-9Fh  
Bit[1] = 1 Lock CMOS RAM A0-BFh  
Bit[2] = 1 Lock CMOS RAM C0-DFh  
Bit[3] = 1 Lock CMOS RAM E0-FFh  
Bit[6:4] Bank Selection if Bit[7]=1 (Note 1)  
=000 Bank 1 at Secondary Base Address (Default)  
(Note 2)  
C
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
=001 Bank 0 at 70h and Bank 1 at Secondary Base  
Address (Note 3)  
=010 Reserved (Note 2)  
=011 Bank 0 at 70h  
=100 Reserved (Note 2)  
=101 Bank 0 at 70h  
=110 Bank 2 at Secondary Base Address (Note 2)  
=111 Bank 0 at 70h and Bank 2 at Secondary Base  
Address (Note 3)  
Bit[7] Bank Selection (Note 1)  
= 0Select Bank 0 at 70h  
= 1Select Bank(s) based on Bits[6:4]  
Once set, bit[3:0] cannot be cleared by a write;  
bit[3:0] are cleared only on VCC Power On Reset or  
upon a Hard Reset.  
Serial EEPROM  
Mode Register  
0xF1 R/W Bit[0] = 1 : Lock EEPROM 00-1Fh  
Bit[1] = 1 : Lock EEPROM 20-3Fh  
Bit[2] = 1 : Lock EEPROM 40-5Fh  
Bit[3] = 1 : Lock EEPROM 60-7Fh  
Bit[4] EEPROM Type  
C
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
= 0256 bit,1 Kbps (93C06,93C46)  
= 12 Kbps, 4 Kbps (93C56,93C66)  
Bit[7:5] Reserved, set to zero  
Once set, bit[3:0] can not be cleared by a write;  
bit[3:0] are cleared only on VCC Power On Reset or  
upon a Hard Reset.  
Serial EEPROM  
Pointer  
0xF2 R/W Use this register to set the Serial EEPROM's pointer.  
The value in this register always reflects the current  
EEPROM pointer address. The Serial Device Pointer  
increments after each pair of reads from the  
Resource Data register or after each pair of writes to  
the Program Resource Data register.  
C
Default = 0x00, on  
VCC POR,Reset_Drv  
or Software Reset.  
214  
Table 103 - RTC, Logical Device 6 [Logical Device Number = 0x06]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
Write EEPROM  
Data  
0xF3 W  
This register is used to program the serial device  
C
from the host.  
This device supports serial  
EEPROMS in x16 configurations. Two bytes must  
be written to this register in order to generate an  
EEPROM write cycle. The LSB leads the MSB. The  
first write to this register resets bit 0 of the Write  
Status register. The second write resets bit 1 of the  
Write Status register and generates a write cycle to  
the serial EEPROM. The Write Status register must  
be polled before performing a pair of writes to this  
register.  
Write Status  
0xF4  
Bit [1:0]  
C
= 1,1 Indicates that the Write EEPROM Data  
register is ready to accept a pair of bytes.  
Read Only = 1,0 Bit 0 is cleared on the first write of the Write  
EEPROM Data register. This status  
Default = 0x03, on  
VCC POR,  
Reset_Drv  
Bit[6:0]  
or Software Reset  
Bit[7] R/W  
indicates that the serial device controller has  
received one byte (LSB) and is waiting for  
the second byte (MSB).  
= 0,0 Bit 1 is cleared on the second write of the  
Write EEPROM Data register indicating that  
two bytes have been accepted and that the  
serial device interface is busy writing the  
word to the EEPROM.  
Bit [6:2] Reserved, set to “0”  
Bit [7]  
= 0 Enables a prefetch of serial EEPROM when  
the Serial EEPROM Pointer Register is  
written. This will typically be used when the  
host CPU wishes random read access from  
the serial EEPROM.  
= 1 Disables a prefetch of serial EEPROM when  
the Serial EEPROM Pointer Register is  
written. This bit is typically set when the  
host CPU wishes to perform random word  
or block writes to the serial EEPROM.  
215  
Table 103 - RTC, Logical Device 6 [Logical Device Number = 0x06]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
Read EEPROM  
Data  
0xF5 R  
This register allows the host to read data from the  
serial EEPROM. Data is not valid in this register  
until bit 0 of the Read Status Register is set. Since  
the EEPROM is a 16-bit device, this register presents  
the LSB followed by the MSB for each pair of register  
reads. Immediately after the MSB is read, bit 0 of  
the Read Status Register will be cleared, then the  
Serial EEPROM Pointer Register will be auto-  
incremented, then the next word of EEPROM data  
will be fetched, followed by the Read Status Register,  
bit 0 being set.  
C
Read Status  
0xF6 R  
Bit 0 = 1 indicates that data in the Read EEPROM  
Data register is valid. This bit is cleared when  
EEPROM Data is read until the next byte is valid.  
Reading the Read EEPROM Data register when bit-0  
is clear will have no detremental effects; the data will  
simply be invalid.  
C
Note 1:  
The RTC modifications allow for backwards compatibility. If Bit[7] of the RTC Mode  
Register is set to 0, Bank 0 is selected at 70h. If Bit[7] is set to 1, the default values for Bit[6:4] and  
the Secondary Base Address for RTC Bank 1 and 2 (CR62 and CR63) are such that Bank 1 is  
selected at 70h.  
For added capability, Banks 1 and 2 can be selected and relocated to another address. Bank 1 can be  
selected either individually or with Bank 0 by setting Bit[7] of the RTC Mode Register and setting  
Bit[6:4] appropriately. For example, with Bit[7] = 1, setting Bit[6:4] to 000 selects Bank 1; setting  
Bit[6:4] to 001 selects Bank 0 and Bank 1. Similarly, Bank 2 can be selected either individually or with  
Bank 0. For example, with Bit[7] = 1, setting Bit[6:4] to 110 selects Bank 2; setting Bit[6:4] to 111  
selects Bank 0 and Bank 2.  
These banks are relocatable through Configuration Registers 62 and 63 in Logical Device 6, the  
Secondary Base Address for RTC Bank 1 and Bank 2. This 16-bit address register only applies to  
Banks 1 and 2 and will only be used for address decode if Bit[7] in the RTC Mode Register is set to 1.  
As an example, setting CR62 to 04 and CR63 to 70 moves Banks 1 and 2 to address 470h. Bank 0 is  
always located at 70h.  
The Secondary Base Address must be at an even address. The Data Register is at the Secondary  
Base Address + 1.  
Note 2:  
Note 3:  
Bank 0 is “off”  
The secondary base address must be set to a value other than 70h prior to selecting this  
option.  
216  
Table 104 - KEYBOARD, Logical Device 7 [Logical Device Number = 0x07]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
0xF0  
DEFINITION  
KRESET and GateA20 Select  
STATE  
KRST_GA20  
R/W  
Bit[7] Polarity Select for P12  
= 0 P12 active low (default)  
= 1 P12 active high  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Bit[6:3] Reserved  
Bit[2] Port 92 Select  
= 0 Port 92 Disabled  
= 1 Port 92 Enabled  
Bit[1] GATEA20 Select  
= 0 Software Control  
= 1 Hardware Speed-up  
Bit[0] KRESET Select  
= 0 Software Control  
= 1 Hardware Speed-up  
0xF1 -  
0xFF  
Reserved - read as “0”  
217  
Table 105 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG  
INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
Soft Power Enable  
Register 1  
0xB0 R/W  
The following bits are the enables for the wake-up  
function of the nPowerOn bit. When enabled, these  
bits allow their corresponding function to turn on  
power to the system.  
C
Default = 0x00  
on VTR POR  
1 = ENABLED  
0 = DISABLED  
Bit[0] SP_RI1: UART 1 Ring Indicator Pin  
Bit[1] SP_RI2: UART 2 Ring Indicator Pin  
Bit[2] SP_KCLK: Keyboard Clock pin  
Bit[3] SP_MCLK: Mouse Clock pin  
Bit[4] SP_GPINT1: Group Interrupt 1  
Bit[5] SP_GPINT2: Group Interrupt 2  
Bit[6] SP_IRRX2: IRRX2 input pin  
Bit[7] SP_RTC ALARM: RTC Alarm  
The following bits are the enables for the wake-up  
function of the nPowerOn bit. When enabled, these  
bits allow their corresponding function to turn on  
power to the system.  
Soft Power Enable  
Register 2  
0xB1 R/W  
C
Default = 0x80  
on VTR POR  
1 = ENABLED  
0 = DISABLED  
Bit[0] SP_RXD1: UART 1 Receive Data Pin  
Bit[1] SP_RXD2: UART 2 Receive Data Pin  
Bit[3:2] Reserved  
Bit[4] AL2_EN: Alarm 2 Enable. Defaults to 0.  
Bit[5] Reserved  
Bit[6] PG_EN: Power Good Enable. Defaults to 0.  
=0 Disabled (nPowerOn pin not used for power  
good)  
=1 Enabled (nPowerOn pin used as power good)  
Bit[7] OFF_EN: After power up, this bit defaults to 1,  
i.e., enabled. This bit allows the software to  
enable or disable the button control of power  
off.  
218  
Table 105 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG  
INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
Soft Power Status  
Register 1  
0xB2 R/W  
The following bits are the status for the wake-up  
function of the nPowerOn bit. These indicate which of  
the enabled wakeup functions caused the power up.  
C
Default = 0x00  
on VTR POR  
1 = Occured  
0 = Did not occur since last cleared  
The following signals are latched to detect and hold  
the soft power event (Type 1)  
Bit[0] RI1: UART 1 Ring Indicator; high to low  
transition on the pin, cleared by a read of this  
register  
Bit[1] RI2: UART 2 Ring Indicator; high to low  
transition on the pin, cleared by a read of this  
register  
Bit[2] KCLK: Keyboard clock; high to low transition  
on the pin, cleared by a read of this register  
Bit[3] MCLK: Mouse clock; high to low transition on  
the pin, cleared by a read of this register  
Bit[6] IRRX2: IRRX2 input; high to low transition on  
the pin, cleared by a read of this register  
Bit[7] RTC ALARM: RTC Alarm; status of the RTC  
Alarm internal signal. Cleared by a read of the  
status register.  
The following signals are not latched to detect and  
hold the soft power event (Type 2)  
Bit[4] GPINT1: Group Interrupt 1; status of the  
GPINT1 internal signal. Cleared at the source.  
Bit[5] GPINT2: Group Interrupt 2; status of the  
GPINT2 internal signal. Cleared at the source.  
219  
Table 105 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG  
INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
Soft Power Status  
Register 2  
0xB3 R/W  
The following bits are the status for the wake-up  
function of the nPowerOn bit. These indicate which  
of the enabled wakeup functions caused the power  
up.  
C
Default = 0x00  
on VTR POR  
1 = Occured  
0 = Did not occur since last cleared  
The following signals are latched to detect and hold  
the soft power event (Type 1)  
Bit[0] RXD1: UART 1 Receive Data; high to low  
transition on the pin, cleared by a read of this  
register  
Bit[1] RXD2: UART 2 Receive Data; high to low  
transition on the pin, cleared by a read of this  
register  
Bit[4] AL2: RTC Alarm 2 status; Cleared by a read  
of this register.  
Bit[5] Reserved  
The following signal is latched to detect and hold the  
soft power event (Type 3) but the output of the latch  
does not feed into the power down circuitry:  
Bit[2] Button: Button pressed, Cleared by a read of  
this register  
Bit[3] Reserved  
Bits[7:6] Reserved  
SMI Enable  
Register 1  
0xB4 R/W  
This register is used to enable the different interrupt  
sources onto the group nSMI output.  
C
1=Enable  
0=Disable  
Default = 0x00  
on VTR POR  
Bit[0] EN_IDE1  
Bit[1] EN_PINT  
Bit[2] EN_U2INT  
Bit[3] EN_U1INT  
Bit[4] EN_FINT  
Bit[5] EN_GPINT2  
Bit[6] EN_GPINT1  
Bit[7] EN_WDT  
220  
Table 105 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG  
INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
SMI Enable  
Register 2  
0xB5 R/W  
This register is used to enable the different interrupt  
sources onto the group nSMI output, and the group  
nSMI output onto the nSMI GPI/O pin.  
C
Default = 0x00  
on VTR POR  
Unless otherwise noted,  
1=Enable  
0=Disable  
Bit[0] EN_MINT  
Bit[1] EN_KINT  
Bit[2] EN_IRINT  
Bit[3] EN_BINT  
Bit[4] EN_P12: Enable 8042 P1.2 to route internally  
to nSMI. 0=Do not route to nSMI, 1=Enable  
routing to nSMI.  
Bit[5] EN_ABINT: Access bus interrupt.  
Bit[6] RTC_EN: This bit is used to enable the  
setting of the RTC_STS bit to generate an SMI. The  
RTC_STS bit is set anytime the RTC generates an  
alarm 2.  
Bit[7] EN_SMI: Enable the group nSMI output onto  
the nSMI GPI/O pin. 0=SMI pin floats, 1=Enable  
group nSMI output onto nSMI GPI/O pin.  
This register is used to read the status of the SMI  
inputs.  
SMI Status  
Register 1  
0xB6 R/W  
C
Default = 0x00  
on VTR POR  
The following bits must be cleared at their source.  
Bit[0] IDE1 (IDEInterrupt)  
Bit[1] PINT (Parallel Port Interrupt)  
Bit[2] U2INT (UART 2 Interrupt)  
Bit[3] U1INT (UART 1 Interrupt)  
Bit[4] FINT (Floppy Disk Controller Interrupt)  
Bit[5] GPINT2 (Group Interrupt 2)  
Bit[6] GPINT1 (Group Interrupt 1)  
Bit[7] WDT (Watch Dog Timer)  
221  
Table 105 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG  
INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
SMI Status  
Register 2  
0xB7 R/W  
This register is used to read the status of the SMI  
inputs.  
C
Bit[0] MINT: Mouse Interrupt. Cleared at source.  
Bit[1] KINT: Keyboard Interrupt. Cleared at source.  
Bit[2] IRINT: This bit is set by a transition on the IR  
pin (RDX2 or GP12 as selected in CR L5-F1-B6 i.e.,  
after the MUX). Cleared by a read of this register.  
Bit[3] BINT: This bit is set when the DELAY counter  
is started. Cleared by a read of this register.  
Bit[4] P12: 8042 P1.2. Cleared at source  
Bit[5] ABINT: Access Bus Interrupt. Cleared at  
source.  
Default = 0x00  
on VTR POR  
Bit[6] RTC_STS: This bit is set when the RTC  
generates an alarm 2. Additionally if the RTC_EN bit  
is set then the setting of the RTC_STS bit will  
generate an SMI. Cleared by writing a 1 to this  
location. Writing a 0 has no effect.  
Bit[7] Reserved  
Delay 2 Time Set  
Register  
0xB8 R/W  
This register is used to set Delay 2 (for Soft Power  
Management) to a value from 500 msec to 32 sec.  
The default value is 500msec.  
C
Default = 0x00  
on VTR POR  
Bit[5:0] The value of these bits correspond to the  
delay time as follows:  
000000= 500msec min to 510msec max  
000001= 1sec min to 1.01sec max  
000010= 1.5sec min to 1.51sec max  
000011= 2sec min to 2.01sec max  
...  
111111 = 32sec min to 32.01sec max  
Bit[7:6] Reserved  
222  
Table 105 (cont’d) - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
GP40  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
General Purpose I/O bit 4.0  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 MEDIA_ID1  
=01 GPI/O  
STATE  
0xC0  
C
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=10 IR Mode  
=11 IRR3  
GP41  
0xC1  
0xC2  
General Purpose I/O bit 4.1  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 MEDIA_ID0  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Reserved  
=11 Reserved  
General Purpose I/O bit 4.2  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 nIDE1_OE  
C
C
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
GP42  
Default= 0x00  
on VTR POR  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Either Edge Triggered Interrupt Input 1  
Enable  
=11 Reserved  
GP43  
0xC3  
0xC4  
0xC5  
General Purpose I/O bit 4.3  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 nHDCS0  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Reserved  
C
C
C
Default= 0x00  
on VTR POR  
=11 Reserved  
GP44  
General Purpose I/O bit 4.4  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 nHDCS1  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Reserved  
Default= 0x00  
on VTR POR  
=11 Reserved  
GP45  
General Purpose I/O bit 4.5  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 IDE1_IRQ  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=01 GPI  
=10 Reserved  
=11 Reserved  
223  
Table 105 (cont’d) - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
GP46  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
General Purpose I/O bit 4.6  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 nIOROP  
STATE  
0xC6  
C
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Power LED Output  
=11 WDT  
GP47  
0xC7  
0xC8  
0xC9  
0xCB  
0xCC  
General Purpose I/O bit 4.7  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 nIOWOP  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 nSMI  
C
C
C
C
C
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=11 Reserved  
GP50  
General Purpose I/O bit 5.0  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 Button_In  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Reserved  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=11 Reserved  
GP51  
General Purpose I/O bit 5.1  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 nPowerOn  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Reserved  
Default= 0x80  
on VTR POR  
=11 Reserved  
GP53  
General Purpose I/O bit 5.3  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 nROMCS  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Reserved  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=11 Reserved  
GP54  
General Purpose I/O bit 5.4  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 nROMOE  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 IR Mode  
=11 IRR3  
0xCD-0xCF  
0xD0  
Reserved  
C
C
GP60  
General Purpose I/O bit 6.0  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 RD0  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Power Led Output  
=11 Reserved  
224  
Table 105 (cont’d) - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
GP61  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
General Purpose I/O bit 6.1  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 RD1  
STATE  
0xD1  
C
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 WDT  
=11 Reserved  
GP62  
0xD2  
0xD3  
0xD4  
0xD5  
0xD6  
0xD7  
General Purpose I/O bit 6.2  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 RD2  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 8042 - P12  
=11 Reserved  
General Purpose I/O bit 6.3  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 RD3  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 8042 - P13  
=11 Reserved  
General Purpose I/O bit 6.4  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 RD4  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 8042 - P14  
=11 Reserved  
General Purpose I/O bit 6.5  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 RD5  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 8042 - P15  
=11 Reserved  
C
C
C
C
C
C
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
GP63  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
GP64  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
GP65  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
GP66  
General Purpose I/O bit 6.6  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 RD6  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 8042 - P16  
=11 Reserved  
General Purpose I/O bit 6.7  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 RD7  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
GP67  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 8042 - P17  
=11 Reserved  
225  
Table 105 (cont’d) - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
GP70  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
General Purpose I/O bit 7.0  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 nRI2  
STATE  
0xD8  
C
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Reserved  
=11 Reserved  
GP71  
0xD9  
0xDA  
0xDB  
0xDC  
0xDD  
0xDE  
General Purpose I/O bit 7.1  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 nDCD2  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Reserved  
C
C
C
C
C
C
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=11 Reserved  
GP72  
General Purpose I/O bit 7.2  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 RXD2  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Reserved  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=11 Reserved  
GP73  
General Purpose I/O bit 7.3  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 TXD2  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Reserved  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=11 Reserved  
GP74  
General Purpose I/O bit 7.4  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 nDSR2  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Reserved  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=11 Reserved  
GP75  
General Purpose I/O bit 7.5  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 nRTS2  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Reserved  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=11 Reserved  
GP76  
General Purpose I/O bit 7.6  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 nCTS2  
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Reserved  
=11 Reserved  
226  
Table 105 (cont’d) - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
GP77  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
General Purpose I/O bit 7.7  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 nDTR2  
STATE  
0xDF  
C
Default= 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=01 GPI/O  
=10 Reserved  
=11 Reserved  
227  
Definition for GP Registers  
Bit[0] In/Out: =1 Input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity: =1 Invert, =0 No Invert  
Bit[2] Int En 1:  
=1 Enable Combined IRQ 1  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ 1  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 Original Function  
=01 Alternate Function 1  
=10 Alternate Function 2 (or Reserved)  
=11 Alternate Function 3 (or Reserved)  
Bit[5] Reserved  
Bit[6] Int En 2  
=1 Enable Combined IRQ 2  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ 2  
Bit[7] Open Collector: =1 Open Collector, =0 Push Pull  
Therefore, unless otherwise required, only Bit[4:3] are defined in the following table.  
Table 106 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
General Purpose I/0 bit 1.0  
STATE  
GP10  
0xE0  
C
Bit[0] In/Out =1 Input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity =1 Invert, =0 No Invert  
Bit[2] Int En  
Default = 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=1 Enable Combined IRQ  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ  
Bit[3] Alt Func  
(If configured as input, the input signal is steered to  
the selected IRQ)  
=1 Select alternate function  
=0 Select basic I/O function  
Bit[7:4] Alt Fuct IRQ mapping  
1111 = IRQ15  
.........  
0011 = IRQ3  
0010 = Invalid  
0001 = IRQ1  
0000 = Disable  
228  
Table 106 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
General Purpose I/0 bit 1.1  
STATE  
GP11  
0xE1  
C
Bit[0] In/Out: =1 input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity: =1 invert, =0 No invert  
Bit[2] Int En  
Default = 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=1 Enable Combined IRQ  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ  
Bit[3-7] These bits are used for selection of the pin  
function as follows:  
Bit  
7 6 5 4 3 Function Output Type IRQ Mapping  
0 x x 0 0 GPIO  
1 x x 0 0 GPIO  
0 x x 1 0 IRQ13  
Push Pull  
Open Collector N/A  
Push Pull  
N/A  
N/A  
1 x x 1 0 IRQ13 Open Collector  
N/A  
1 1 1 1 1 IRQIN  
1 1 1 0 1 IRQIN  
1 1 0 1 1 IRQIN  
.....  
Push Pull  
Push Pull  
Push Pull  
IRQ15  
IRQ14  
Reserved  
0 0 1 1 1 IRQIN  
0 0 1 0 1 IRQIN  
0 0 0 1 1 IRQIN  
0 0 0 0 1 IRQIN  
Push Pull  
Push Pull  
Push Pull  
Push Pull  
IRQ3  
Reserved  
IRQ1  
Disable  
GP12  
0xE2  
General Purpose I/0 bit 1.2  
Bit[0] In/Out =1 Input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity =1 Invert, =0 No Invert  
Bit[2] Int En  
C
Default = 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=1 Enable Combined IRQ  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ  
Bit[3] Alt Func WDT output or IRRX input.  
=1 Select alternate function  
=0 Select basic I/O function  
(IRRX - if bit-6 of the IR Options Register is set)  
Bit[7:4] Reserved = 0000  
229  
Table 106 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
General Purpose I/0 bit 1.3  
STATE  
GP13  
0xE3  
C
Bit[0] In/Out =1 Input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity =1 Invert, =0 No Invert  
Bit[2] Int En  
Default = 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=1 Enable Combined IRQ  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ  
Bit[3] Alt Func Power LED or IRTX output  
=1 Select alternate function  
=0 Select basic I/O function  
(IRTX - if bit-6 of the IR Options Register is set)  
Bit[7:4] Reserved = 0000  
GP14  
0xE4  
General Purpose I/0 bit 1.4  
C
Bit[0] In/Out =1 Input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity =1 Invert, =0 No Invert  
Bit[2] Int En  
Default = 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=1 Enable Combined IRQ  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ  
Bit[3] Alt Func: General Purpose Address Decode  
(Active Low) Decodes two address bytes  
=1 Select alternate function  
=0 Select basic I/O function  
Bit[7:4] Reserved = 0000  
GP15  
0xE5  
General Purpose I/0 bit 1.5  
Bit[0] In/Out =1 Input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity =1 Invert, =0 No Invert  
Bit[2] Int En  
C
Default = 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=1 Enable Combined IRQ  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ  
Bit[3] Alt Func: Gen. Purpose Write Strobe (Active  
Low)  
=1 Select alternate function  
=0 Select basic I/O function  
Bit[7:4] Reserved = 0000  
230  
Table 106 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
General Purpose I/0 bit 1.6  
STATE  
GP16  
0xE6  
C
Bit[0] In/Out =1 Input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity =1 Invert, =0 No Invert  
Bit[2] Int En  
Default = 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=1 Enable Combined IRQ  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ  
Bit[4:3] Alt Func: Joystick (Active Low)  
=01 Joystick RD Strobe function  
=10 Joystick CS function  
=00 Select basic I/O function  
Bit[7:5] Reserved = 000  
GP17  
0xE7  
General Purpose I/0 bit 1.7  
Bit[0] In/Out =1 Input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity =1 Invert, =0 No Invert  
Bit[2] Int En  
C
Default = 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=1 Enable Combined IRQ  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ  
Bit[3] Alt Function: Joystick Write Strobe (Active  
Low)  
=1 Select alternate function  
=0 Select basic I/O function  
Bit[7:4] Reserved = 0000  
GP20  
0xE8  
General Purpose I/0 bit 2.0  
C
Bit[0] In/Out =1 Input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity =1 Invert, =0 No Invert  
Bit[2] Int En =1 Enable Combined IRQ  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ  
Default = 0x01  
on VTR POR  
Bit[3] Alt Func: IDE2 buffer enable (Active Low)  
=1 Select alternate function  
=0 Select basic I/O function  
Bit[4] Alt function: 8042 P20, Typically used to  
generate a "Keyboard Reset" used by systems in  
order to switch from "protected mode" back to "real  
mode"  
=1 Select alternate function  
=0 Select basic I/O function  
Bit[7:5] Reserved = 000  
Note: Bit[3] and Bit[4] should not both be set at the  
same time  
231  
Table 106 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
General Purpose I/0 bit 2.1  
STATE  
GP21  
0xE9  
C
Bit[0] In/Out =1 Input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity =1 Invert, =0 No Invert  
Bit[2] Int En  
Default = 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=1 Enable Combined IRQ  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ  
Bit[4:3] Alt Func:  
=00 Select basic I/O function  
=01 Serial EEPROM Data In  
=10 AB_DATA  
Bit[6:5] Reserved = 0000  
Bit[7] Open Collector:  
=1 Open Collector,  
=0 Push Pull  
GP22  
General Purpose I/0 bit 2.2  
Bit[0] In/Out =1 Input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity =1 Invert, =0 No Invert  
Bit[2] Int En  
0xEA  
C
Default = 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=1 Enable Combined IRQ  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ  
Bit[4:3] Alt Func:  
=01 Serial EEPROM Data Out  
=00 Select basic I/O function  
=10 AB_CLK  
Bit[6:5] Reserved = 0000  
Bit[7] Open Collector:  
=1 Open Collector,  
=0 Push Pull  
GP23  
0xEB  
General Purpose I/0 bit 2.3  
Bit[0] In/Out =1 Input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity =1 Invert, =0 No Invert  
Bit[2] Int En  
C
Default = 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=1 Enable Combined IRQ  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 GPIO  
=01 Serial EEPROM Clock  
=10 Either Edge Triggered Interrupt Input 2 Enable  
=11 Reserved  
Bit[7:5] Reserved = 0000  
232  
Table 106 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
General Purpose I/0 bit 2.4  
STATE  
GP24  
0xEC  
C
Bit[0] In/Out =1 Input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity =1 Invert, =0 No Invert  
Bit[2] Int En  
Default = 0x01  
on VTR POR  
=1 Enable Combined IRQ  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ  
Bit[4:3] Function Select  
=00 GPIO  
=01 Serial EEPROM Enable  
=10 Either Edge Triggered Interrupt Input 3 Enable  
=11 Reserved  
Bit[7:5] Reserved = 000  
GP25  
0xED  
General Purpose I/0 bit 2.5  
C
Bit[0] In/Out =1 Input, =0 Output  
Bit[1] Polarity =1 Invert, =0 No Invert  
Bit[2] Int En =1 Enable Combined IRQ  
=0 Disable Combined IRQ  
Default = 0x01  
on VTR POR  
Bit[3] Alt Func: GATEA20  
=1 Select alternate function  
=0 Select basic I/O function  
Bit[7:4] : Reserved = 0000  
0xEE  
0xEF  
Reserved  
C
GP_INT2  
General Purpose I/O Combined Interrupt 2  
Bit[2:0] Reserved, = 000  
Default = 0x00  
on VTR POR  
Bit[3] GP IRQ Filter Select  
0 =  
1 =  
Debounce Filter Bypassed  
Debounce Filter Enabled  
Bit[7:4] Combined IRQ mapping  
1111 = IRQ15  
.........  
0011 = IRQ3  
0010 = Invalid  
0001 = IRQ1  
0000 = Disable  
233  
Table 106 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
GP_INT1  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
0xF0  
General Purpose I/O Combined Interrupt 1  
Bit[2:0] Reserved, = 000  
C
Default = 0x00  
on VTR POR  
Bit[3] GP IRQ Filter Select  
0 =  
1 =  
Debounce Filter Bypassed  
Debounce Filter Enabled  
Bit[7:4] Combined IRQ mapping  
1111 = IRQ15  
.........  
0011 = IRQ3  
0010 = Invalid  
0001 = IRQ1  
0000 = Disable  
GPA_GPW_EN  
0xF1  
General Purpose Read/Write Enable  
Bit[0] =1 enable GP Address Decoder  
=0 disable GPA Address Decoder.  
Bit[1] =1 enable GPW, =0 disable GPW  
Bit[6:2] Reserved, = 00000  
C
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Bit[7] WDT Time-out Value Units Select  
= 0 Minutes (default)  
= 1 Seconds  
Note: If the logical device's activate bit is not set then  
bits 0 and 1 have no effect.  
WDT_VAL  
0xF2  
Watch-dog Timer Timeout Value  
Binary coded, units = minutes (default) or seconds,  
selectable via Bit[7] of Reg 0xF1, Logical Device 8.  
0x00 Timeout disabled  
0x01 Timeout = 1 minute (second)  
.........  
C
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
0xFF Timeout = 255 minutes (seconds)  
234  
Table 106 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
WDT_CFG  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
0xF3  
Watchdog Timer Configuration  
Bit[0] Joy-stick Enable  
C
Default = 0x00  
on Vcc POR or  
Reset_Drv  
=1 WDT is reset upon an I/O read or write of the  
Game Port  
=0 WDT is not affected by I/O reads or writes to the  
Game Port.  
Bit[1] Keyboard Enable  
=1 WDT is reset upon a keyboard interrupt.  
=0 WDT is not affected by keyboard interrupts.  
Bit[2] Mouse Enable  
=1 WDT is reset upon a mouse interrupt  
=0 WDT is not affected by mouse interrupts.  
Bit[3] PWRLED Timeout enable  
=1 Enables the Power LED to toggle at a 1Hz rate  
with 50 percent duty cycle while the Watch-  
dog Status bit is set.  
=0 Disables the Power LED toggle during Watch-dog  
timeout status.  
Bit[7:4] WDT Interrupt Mapping  
1111 = IRQ15  
.........  
0011 = IRQ3  
0010 = Invalid  
0001 = IRQ1  
0000 = Disable  
WDT_CTRL  
0xF4  
Watchdog Timer Control  
C
Bit[0] Watch-dog Status Bit, R/W  
=1 WD timeout occured  
Default = 0x00  
=0 WD timer counting  
Bit[1] Power LED Toggle Enable, R/W  
=1 Toggle Power LED at 1Hz rate with 50 percent  
duty cycle. (1/2 sec. on, 1/2 sec. off)  
=0 Disable Power LED Toggle  
Cleared by VTR  
POR  
Bit[2] Force Timeout, W  
=1 Forces WD timeout event; this bit is self-clearing  
Bit[3] P20 Force Timeout Enable, R/W  
= 1Allows rising edge of P20, from the keyboard  
controller, to force the WD timeout event. A  
WD timeout event may still be forced by  
setting the Force Timeout Bit, bit 2.  
= 0P20 activity does not generate the WD timeout  
event.  
235  
Table 106 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
The P20 signal will remain high for a minimum of  
1us and can remain high indefinitely. Therefore,  
when P20 forced timeouts are enabled, a self-  
clearing edge-detect circuit is used to generate a  
signal which is ORed with the signal generated by  
the Force Timeout Bit.  
Bit[4] Reserved. Set to 0  
Bit[5] Stop_Cnt: This is used to terminate Delay 2  
(Note 1) without generating a power own.  
This is used if the software determines that  
the power down should be aborted. When  
read, this bit indicates the following:  
Stop_Cnt = 0; Counter running Stop_Cnt =  
1; Counter Stopped. Note: The write is self  
clearing.  
Bit[6] Restart_Cnt: This is used to restart Delay 2  
(Note 1) from the button input to the  
generation of the power down.  
When  
restarted, the count will start over and delay  
the power down for the time that Delay 2 is  
set for (Default=500msec). The software  
can continue to do this indefinately with out  
allowing a powerdown. This bit is self  
clearing. 1=Restart; Automatically cleared.  
Bit[7] SPOFF: This is used to force a software power  
down. This bit is self clearing.  
Note 1: This delay is programmable via the Delay 2  
Time Set Register at Logical Device 8, 0xB8.  
GP1  
0xF6  
0xF7  
0xF8  
Refer to Table 49 for Bit Definitions.  
Refer to Table 49 for Bit Definitions.  
Refer to Table 49 for Bit Definitions.  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
GP2  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
GP4  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
236  
Table 106 - Auxilliary I/O, Logical Device 8 [Logical Device Number = 0x08]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
STATE  
GP5  
0xF9  
Refer to Table 49 for Bit Definitions.  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
GP6  
0xFA  
0xFB  
Refer to Table 49 for Bit Definitions.  
Refer to Table 49 for Bit Definitions.  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
GP7  
Default = 0x00  
on VCC POR or  
Reset_Drv  
Note: Registers GP1-2, WDT_CTRL, GP4-7, Soft Power and SMI Enable and Status Registers are  
also available at index 01-0F when not in configuration mode. See Table 49.  
Table 107 - Access Bus, Logical Device 9 [Logical Device Number = 0x09]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
Reserved - read as “0”  
STATE  
STATE  
0xF0 -  
0xFF  
Table 108 - ACPI, Logical Device A [Logical Device Number=0x0A]  
NAME  
REG INDEX  
DEFINITION  
Reserved - read as “0”  
0xF0 -  
0xFF  
237  
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION  
MAXIMUM GUARANTEED RATINGS*  
Operating Temperature Range......................................................................................... 0oC to +70oC  
Storage Temperature Range..........................................................................................-55o to +150oC  
Lead Temperature Range (soldering, 10 seconds) ....................................................................+325oC  
Positive Voltage on any pin, with respect to Ground................................................................Vcc+0.3V  
Negative Voltage on any pin, with respect to Ground.................................................................... -0.3V  
Maximum Vcc................................................................................................................................. +7V  
*Stresses above those listed above could cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress  
rating only and functional operation of the device at any other condition above those indicated in the  
operation sections of this specification is not implied.  
Note: When powering this device from laboratory or system power supplies, it is important that the  
Absolute Maximum Ratings not be exceeded or device failure can result. Some power supplies exhibit  
voltage spikes on their outputs when the AC power is switched on or off. In addition, voltage  
transients on the AC power line may appear on the DC output. If this possibility exists, it is suggested  
that a clamp circuit be used.  
DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS (TA = 0°C - 70°C, Vcc = +5 V ± 10%)  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
COMMENTS  
I Type Input Buffer  
VILI  
VIHI  
0.8  
V
V
TTL Levels  
Low Input Level  
2.0  
High Input Level  
IS Type Input Buffer  
VILIS  
VIHIS  
VHYS  
0.8  
0.4  
V
V
Schmitt Trigger  
Schmitt Trigger  
Low Input Level  
High Input Level  
2.2  
250  
mV  
Schmitt Trigger Hysteresis  
ICLK Input Buffer  
VILCK  
VIHCK  
V
V
Low Input Level  
2.2  
High Input Level  
ICLK2 Input Buffer  
500  
mV  
V P - P  
Input Level  
238  
PARAMETER  
Input Leakage  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
COMMENTS  
(All I and IS buffers)  
IIL  
-10  
+10  
+10  
VIN = 0  
Low Input Leakage  
mA  
IIH  
-10  
2.4  
VIN = VCC  
High Input Leakage  
VBAT  
mA  
3.0  
4.0  
2.0  
V
mA  
nA  
IBAT  
Standby Current  
Input Leakage  
1.0  
100  
VCC=VSS=0  
VCC=5V, VBAT=3V  
O4 Type Buffer  
Low Output Level  
High Output Level  
Output Leakage  
VOL  
VOH  
IOL  
0.4  
V
V
IOL = 4 mA  
IOH = -2 mA  
2.4  
-10  
+10  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
mA  
O8SR Type Buffer  
Low Output Level  
High Output Level  
Output Leakage  
Rise Time  
VOL  
VOH  
IOL  
0.4  
V
V
IOL = 8 mA  
IOH = -8 mA  
2.4  
-10  
5
+10  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
mA  
ns  
ns  
TRT  
TFL  
5
Fall Time  
O24 Type Buffer  
VOL  
VOH  
IOL  
0.4  
V
V
IOL = 24 mA  
IOH = -12 mA  
Low Output Level  
High Output Level  
Output Leakage  
2.4  
-10  
+10  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
mA  
239  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
COMMENTS  
O16SR Type Buffer  
VOL  
VOH  
IOL  
0.4  
V
V
IOL = 16 mA  
Low Output Level  
High Output Level  
Output Leakage  
Rise Time  
2.4  
-10  
5
IOH = -16 mA  
+10  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
mA  
ns  
ns  
TRT  
TFL  
5
Fall Time  
OD16P Type Buffer  
VOL  
0.4  
V
IOL = 16 mA  
IOH = 90 mA  
(Note 2)  
Low Output Level  
Output Leakage  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
IOL  
-10  
+10  
mA  
OD24 Type Buffer  
Low Output Level  
Output Leakage  
VOL  
IOL  
0.4  
V
IOL = 24 mA  
+10  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
mA  
OD48 Type Buffer  
Low Output Level  
Output Leakage  
VOL  
IOL  
0.4  
V
IOL = 48 mA  
+10  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
mA  
OCLK2 Type Buffer  
Low Output Level  
High Output Level  
Output Leakage  
VOL  
VOH  
IOL  
0.4  
V
V
IOL = 2 mA  
IOH = -2 mA  
3.5  
-10  
+10  
VIN = 0 to VCC  
(Note 1)  
mA  
ChiProtect  
IIL  
± 10  
VCC = 0V  
mA  
(SLCT, PE, BUSY, nACK,  
nERROR)  
VIN = 6V Max  
240  
PARAMETER  
Backdrive  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
COMMENTS  
VCC = 0V  
IIL  
± 10  
mA  
(nSTROBE, nAUTOFD, nINIT,  
nSLCTIN)  
VIN = 6V Max  
Backdrive  
(PD0-PD7)  
IIL  
± 10  
90  
VCC = 0V  
VIN = 6V Max  
mA  
Suppy Current Active  
ICCI  
4.5  
70  
mA  
All outputs open.  
Note 1:  
Note 2:  
All output leakages are measured with the current pins in high impedance. Output leakage  
is measured with the low driving output off, either for a high level output or a high  
impedance state.  
KBCLK, KBDATA, MCLK, MDATA contain 90mA min pull-ups.  
CAPACITANCE TA = 25°C; fc = 1 MHz; VCC = 5V  
LIMITS  
TYP  
PARAMETER  
SYMBOL  
MIN  
MAX  
UNIT  
TEST CONDITION  
Clock Input Capacitance  
CIN  
20  
pF  
All pins except pin  
under test tied to AC  
ground  
Input Capacitance  
Output Capacitance  
CIN  
10  
20  
pF  
pF  
COUT  
241  
POWER SUPPLY OPERATIONAL MODES  
Standard Operational Modes  
Table 109 - Standard Operational Modes For The Power Supplies.  
MODE  
VBAT  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
VTR  
0
5V @ 2mA Max  
5V @ 2mA Max  
VCC  
0
0
RTC Only (1)  
Standby (2) (3)  
Full Power (2)  
5V  
Note 1: RTC power supplied by Vbat  
Note 2: RTC power supplied by VTR  
Note 3: In standby mode, the following are operational: RTC, RTC Alarm 2, power control (wakeup)  
logic (button input and power on) and soft power management logic.  
When VCC goes away, certain registers will be powered by VTR. Similarly, when VTR goes away,  
certain registers will be powered by Vbat. These registers are discussed in the Soft Power  
Management and RTC Section.  
Power Supply Non-Standard Modes  
Table 110 - Non-Standard Operational Modes For The Power Supplies.  
NON-STANDARD MODE  
VBAT  
0
0
0
3.3V  
VTR  
5V @ 2mA Max  
5V @ 2mA Max  
VCC  
0
5V  
5V  
5V  
NS1  
NS2  
NS3  
NS4  
0
0
242  
TIMING DIAGRAMS  
For the Timing Diagrams shown, the following capacitive loads are used.  
CAPACITANCE  
NAME  
SD[0:7]  
IOCHRDY  
IRQ[1,3:12,14,15]  
DRQ[0:3]  
HCLK  
TOTAL (pF)  
240  
240  
120  
120  
50  
16CLK  
50  
CLK01  
50  
CLK02  
50  
CLK03  
50  
nWGATE  
nWDATA  
nHDSEL  
nDIR  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
240  
nSTEP  
nDS[1:0]  
nMTR[1:0]  
DRVDEN[1:0]  
TXD1  
nRTS1  
nDTR1  
TXD2  
nRTS2  
nDTR2  
nIDE1_OE  
nHDCS0  
nHDCS1  
nIOROP  
nIOWOP  
nHDCS2  
nHDCS3  
PD[0:7]  
nSLCTIN  
nINIT  
nALF  
nSTB  
KDAT  
KCLK  
243  
CAPACITANCE  
NAME  
MDAT  
TOTAL (pF)  
240  
MCLK  
240  
nPowerOn  
Button_In  
GP1[0:7], GP2[0:5]  
RD[0:7]  
100  
100  
100  
100  
244  
B u tto n _ In  
tF  
tR  
FIGURE 15A - BUTTON INPUT TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
Button_In Rise/Fall Time  
MIN  
TYP MAX  
UNITS  
tR, tF  
0.5  
ms  
B u tto n _ In  
t1  
R e le a s e  
n P o w e r O n  
t2  
B la n k in g P e rio d  
t3  
V c c  
FIGURE 15B - BUTTON OVERRIDE TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
MIN  
TYP MAX  
UNITS  
t1  
t2  
Button_In Hold Time For Override Event  
4
s
s
Button _In Low To nPowerOn Tristate and Vcc Low and  
Start of Blanking Period  
4
4
t3  
Blanking Period After Release of Button_In  
s
245  
t3  
SAx  
t4  
SD<7:0>  
t1  
t2  
t5  
nIOW  
FIGURE 16 - IOW TIMING FOR PORT 92  
IOW TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
MIN  
40  
0
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t5  
SAx Valid to nIOW Asserted  
SDATA Valid to nIOW Asserted  
nIOW Asserted to SAx Invalid  
ns  
10  
0
ns  
nIOW Deasserted to DATA Invalid  
nIOW Deasserted to nIOW or nIOR Asserted  
ns  
100  
ns  
246  
t 1  
t 2  
V c c  
t 3  
A l l H o s t  
A c c e s s e s  
FIGURE 17 - POWER-UP TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
Vcc Slew from 4.5V to 0V  
MIN  
300  
100  
125  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
ms  
t1  
t2  
t3  
Vcc Slew from 0V to 4.5V  
ms  
All Host Accesses After Powerup (Note 1)  
500  
ms  
Note 1: Internal write-protection period after Vcc passes 4.5 volts on power-up  
247  
t10  
AEN  
t3  
SA[x], nCS  
t2  
t1  
t4  
t6  
nIOW  
SD[x]  
t11  
t5  
DATA VALID  
GP I/O  
FINTR  
t7  
t8  
PINTR  
IBF  
t9  
FIGURE 18 - ISA WRITE  
DESCRIPTION  
NAME  
t1  
MIN  
10  
TYP  
MAX UNITS  
SA[x], nCS and AEN Valid to nIOW Asserted  
nIOW Asserted to nIOW Deasserted  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t2  
80  
t3  
nIOW Asserted to SA[x], nCS Invalid  
SD[x] Valid to nIOW Deasserted  
10  
t4  
45  
t5  
SD[x] Hold from nIOW Deasserted  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t6  
nIOW Deasserted to nIOW Asserted  
25  
10  
t7  
nIOW Deasserted to FINTR Deasserted (Note 2)  
nIOW Deasserted to PINTER Deasserted (Note 3)  
IBF (Internal Signal) Asserted from nIOW Deasserted  
nIOW Deasserted to AEN Invalid  
55  
260  
40  
t8  
t9  
t10  
t11  
nIOW Deasserted to GPI/O Out Valid  
100  
Note 1: If ACCESS.bus is used at 12 MHz, use 100 ns.  
Note 2: FINTR refers to the IRQ used by the floppy disk.  
Note 3: PINTR refers to the IRQ used by the parallel port  
248  
t13  
AEN  
t3  
SA[x], nCS  
t1  
t7  
t2  
t6  
nIOR  
SD[x]  
t4  
t5  
DATA VALID  
PD[x], nERROR,  
PE, SLCT, ACK, BUSY  
t10  
FINTER  
t9  
PINTER  
PCOBF  
t11  
t12  
AUXOBF1  
nIOR/nIOW  
t8  
FIGURE 19 - ISA READ  
SEE TIMING PARAMETERS ON NEXT PAGE  
249  
ISA READ TIMING  
DESCRIPTION  
NAME  
t1  
MIN  
10  
TYP MAX UNITS  
SA[x], nCS and AEN valid to nIOR asserted  
nIOR Asserted to nIOR Deasserted  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t2  
50  
t3  
nIORAsserted to SA[x], nCS Invalid  
nIOR Asserted to Data Valid  
10  
t4  
50  
25  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t5  
Data Hold/float from nIOR Deasserted  
nIOR Deasserted  
10  
25  
t6  
t8  
nIOR Aserted after nIOW Deasserted  
nIOR/nIOR, nIOW/nIOW Transfers from/to ECP FIFO  
Parallel Port Setup to nIOR Asserted  
nIOR Asserted to PINTER Deasserted  
nIOR Deasserted to FINTER Deasserted  
nIOR Deasserted to PCOBF Deasserted (Notes 4,6)  
nIOR Deasserted to AUXOBF1 Deasserted (Notes 5,6)  
nIOW Deasserted to AEN Invalid  
80  
t8  
150  
t7  
20  
55  
t9  
t10  
t11  
t12  
t13  
260  
80  
80  
10  
Note 1: If ACCESS.bus is used at a clock rate below 24 MHz, use 100 ns.  
Note 2: FINTR refers to the IRQ used by the floppy disk.  
Note 3: PINTR refers to the IRQ used by the parallel port.  
Note 4: PCOBF is used for the Keyboard IRQ.  
Note 5: AUXOBF1 is used for the Mouse IRQ.  
Note 6: Applies only if deassertion is performed in hardware.  
250  
t2  
t1  
PCOBF  
AUXOBF1  
nWRT  
t3  
IBF  
nRD  
FIGURE 20 - INTERNAL 8042 CPU TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
MIN  
TYP MAX UNITS  
t1  
t2  
t3  
nWRT Deasserted to AUXOBF1 Asserted (Notes 1,2)  
nWRT Deasserted to PCOBF Asserted (Notes 1,3)  
nRD Dasserted to IBF Deasserted (Note 1)  
40  
40  
40  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Note 1: IBF, nWRT and nRD are internal signals.  
Note 2: PCOBF is used for the Keyboard IRQ.  
Note 3: AUXOBF1 is used for the Mouse IRQ.  
251  
t1  
t2  
t2  
X1K  
FIGURE 21A - INPUT CLOCK TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
Clock Cycle Time for 14.318 MHZ  
Clock High Time/Low Time for 14.318 MHz  
Clock Cycle Time for 32 KHz  
MIN  
TYP  
70  
MAX  
UNITS  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t1  
t2  
35  
ns  
31.25  
16.53  
ms  
Clock High Time/Low Time for 32 KHz  
Clock Rise Time/Fall Time (not shown)  
ms  
5
ns  
t4  
RESET  
FIGURE 21B - RESET TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
RESET Width (Note 1)  
MIN  
TYP MAX  
UNITS  
t4  
1.5  
ms  
Note 1: The RESET width is dependent upon the processor clock. The RESET must be active while  
the clock is running and stable.  
252  
IDEx_IRQ  
t1  
t2  
IRQx  
FIGURE 22 - IRQ TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
IDE_IRQ Low-High Edge to IRQ Low-High  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
t1  
30  
ns  
Edge Propagation Delay. Edge High Type  
Interrupt Selected.  
t2  
IDE_IRQ High-Low Edge to IRQ High-Low  
Edge Propagation Delay. Edge High Type  
Interrupt Selected.  
30  
ns  
Note:  
IDE IRQ input and pass-through IRQ timing  
Definition:  
IDE_ IRQ is the Interrupt request input from an IDE Hard Drive which is defined as a  
low to high edge type interrupt held high until the interrupt is serviced.  
253  
nIOR  
t2  
t3  
t2  
t3  
nIOROP  
nIOW  
nIOW O P  
FIGURE 23 - nIOROP, nIOWOP TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
nIOR in to nIOROP Output  
nIOW in to nIOWOP Output  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
25  
UNITS  
ns  
t2  
t3  
25  
ns  
254  
nROMCS  
nROMOE  
t2  
t7  
t5  
Note 2  
t1  
t3  
t2  
t8  
t6  
t3  
RD[x]  
SD[x]  
t4  
Note 1  
FIGURE 24 - ROM INTERFACE TIMING  
Note 1: RD[x] driven by FDC37C93x, SD[x] driven by system  
Note 2: RD[x] driven by ROM, SD[x] driven by FDC37C93xAPM  
NAME  
t1  
DESCRIPTION  
SD[x] Valid to RD[x] Valid  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
25  
UNITS  
ns  
t2  
nROMCS Active to RD[X] Driven  
nROMCS Inactive to RD[X] Float  
RD[x] Valid to SD[x] Valid  
25  
ns  
t3  
25  
ns  
t4  
25  
ns  
t5  
nROMCS Active to SD[X] Driven  
nROMCS Inactive to SD[X] Float  
nROMOE Active to RD[x] Float  
nROMOE Inactive to RD[x] Driven  
25  
ns  
t6  
25  
ns  
t7  
25  
ns  
t8  
25  
ns  
Note 1: Outputs have a 50 pf load.  
255  
t15  
AEN  
t16  
t3  
t2  
FDRQ,  
PDRQ  
t1  
t4  
nDACK  
t12  
t14  
t11  
t6  
t5  
t8  
nIOR  
or  
nIOW  
t10  
t9  
t7  
DATA  
(DO-D7)  
DATA VALID  
t13  
TC  
FIGURE 25A - DMA TIMING (SINGLE TRANSFER MODE)  
NAME  
t1  
DESCRIPTION  
nDACK Delay Time from FDRQ High  
DRQ Reset Delay from nIOR or nIOW  
FDRQ Reset Delay from nDACK Low  
nDACK Width  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
ns  
0
t2  
100  
100  
ns  
t3  
ns  
t4  
150  
0
ns  
t5  
nIOR Delay from FDRQ High  
nIOW Delay from FDRQ High  
Data Access Time from nIOR Low  
Data Set Up Time to nIOW High  
Data to Float Delay from nIOR High  
Data Hold Time from nIOW High  
nDACK Set Up to nIOW/nIOR Low  
nDACK Hold after nIOW/nIOR High  
TC Pulse Width  
ns  
t6  
0
ns  
t7  
100  
60  
ns  
t8  
40  
10  
10  
5
ns  
t9  
ns  
t10  
t11  
t12  
t13  
t14  
t15  
t16  
ns  
ns  
10  
60  
40  
10  
ns  
ns  
AEN Set Up to nIOR/nIOW  
ns  
AEN Hold from nDACK  
ns  
TC Active to PDRQ Inactive  
100  
ns  
256  
t15  
AEN  
t16  
t2  
t3  
FDRQ,  
PDRQ  
t1  
t4  
nDACK  
t12  
t14  
t11  
t6  
t5  
t8  
nIOR  
or  
nIOW  
t10  
t9  
t7  
DATA  
(DO-D7)  
DATA VALID  
DATA VALID  
t13  
TC  
FIGURE 25B - DMA TIMING (BURST TRANSFER MODE)  
NAME  
t1  
DESCRIPTION  
nDACK Delay Time from FDRQ High  
DRQ Reset Delay from nIOR or nIOW  
FDRQ Reset Delay from nDACK Low  
nDACK Width  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
ns  
0
t2  
100  
100  
ns  
t3  
ns  
t4  
150  
0
ns  
t5  
nIOR Delay from FDRQ High  
nIOW Delay from FDRQ High  
Data Access Time from nIOR Low  
Data Set Up Time to nIOW High  
Data to Float Delay from nIOR High  
Data Hold Time from nIOW High  
nDACK Set Up to nIOW/nIOR Low  
nDACK Hold after nIOW/nIOR High  
TC Pulse Width  
ns  
t6  
0
ns  
t7  
100  
60  
ns  
t8  
40  
10  
10  
5
ns  
t9  
ns  
t10  
t11  
t12  
t13  
t14  
t15  
t16  
ns  
ns  
10  
60  
40  
10  
ns  
ns  
AEN Set Up to nIOR/nIOW  
ns  
AEN Hold from nDACK  
ns  
TC Active to PDRQ Inactive  
100  
ns  
257  
t3  
nDIR  
t4  
t1  
t2  
nSTEP  
t5  
nDS0-3  
nINDEX  
t6  
t7  
t8  
nRDATA  
nWDATA  
nIOW  
t9  
t9  
nDS0-1,  
MTR0-1  
FIGURE 26 - DISK DRIVE TIMING (AT MODE ONLY)  
NAME  
t1  
DESCRIPTION  
nDIR Set Up to STEP Low  
MIN  
TYP  
4
MAX  
UNITS  
X*  
t2  
nSTEP Active Time Low  
24  
96  
132  
20  
2
X*  
t3  
nDIR Hold Time after nSTEP  
nSTEP Cycle Time  
X*  
t4  
X*  
t5  
nDS0-1 Hold Time from nSTEP Low  
nINDEX Pulse Width  
X*  
t6  
X*  
t7  
nRDATA Active Time Low  
nWDATA Write Data Width Low  
nDS0-1, MTRO-1 from End of nIOW  
40  
.5  
ns  
t8  
Y*  
t9  
25  
ns  
*X specifies one MCLK period and Y specifies one WCLK period.  
MCLK = 16 x Data Rate (at 500 kbps MCLK = 8 MHz)  
WCLK = 2 x Data Rate (at 500 kbps WCLK = 1 MHz)  
258  
nIOW  
t1  
nRTSx,  
nDTRx  
t5  
IRQx  
nCTSx,  
nDSRx,  
nDCDx  
t6  
t2  
t4  
IRQx  
nIOW  
t3  
IRQx  
nIOR  
nRIx  
FIGURE 27 - SERIAL PORT TIMING  
NAME  
t1  
DESCRIPTION  
nRTSx, nDTRx Delay from nIOW  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX UNITS  
200  
100  
120  
125  
100  
100  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t2  
IRQx Active Delay from nCTSx, nDSRx, nDCDx  
IRQx Inactive Delay from nIOR (Leading Edge)  
IRQx Inactive Delay from nIOW (Trailing Edge)  
IRQx Inactive Delay from nIOW  
t3  
t4  
t5  
10  
t6  
IRQx Active Delay from nRIx  
259  
nAEN  
A0-A9  
t3  
t2  
t1  
nIDEENLO,  
nIDEENHI,  
nHDCSx,  
nGAMECS  
FIGURE 28 - IDE INTERFACE TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
t1  
nIDEENLO, nIDEENHI, nGAMECS, nHDCSx Delay  
from nAEN  
40  
ns  
t2  
t3  
nIDEENLO, nIDEENHI, nGAMECS, nHDCSx Delay  
from A0 - A9  
40  
40  
ns  
ns  
nIDEENLO Delay from nIDEENHI, AEN  
260  
PD0- PD7  
nIOW  
t6  
t1  
nINIT, nSTROBE.  
nAUTOFD, SLCTIN  
nACK  
t2  
nPINTR  
(SPP)  
t4  
t3  
PINTR  
(ECP or EPP Enabled)  
nFAULT (ECP)  
nERROR  
(ECP)  
t5  
t2  
t3  
PINTR  
FIGURE 29 - PARALLEL PORT TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
t1  
PD0-7, nINIT, nSTROBE, nAUTOFD Delay from  
nIOW  
100  
ns  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t5  
t6  
PINTR Delay from nACK, nFAULT  
PINTR Active Low in ECP and EPP Modes  
PINTR Delay from nACK  
60  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
200  
300  
105  
105  
100  
nERROR Active to PINTR Active  
PD0 - PD7 Delay from IOW Active  
Note:  
PINTR refers to the IRQ used by the parallel port.  
261  
t18  
t9  
A0-A10  
SD<7:0>  
t17  
t8  
t12  
t19  
nIOW  
t10  
t11  
IOCHRDY  
t13  
t22  
t20  
t2  
t5  
nWRITE  
PD<7:0>  
t1  
t16  
t3  
t14  
t4  
nDATAST  
nADDRSTB  
t15  
t6  
t7  
nWAIT  
PDIR  
t21  
FIGURE 30A - EPP 1.9 DATA OR ADDRESS WRITE CYCLE  
SEE TIMING PARAMETERS ON NEXT PAGE  
262  
FIGURE 30B - EPP 1.9 DATA OR ADDRESS WRITE CYCLE TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
nIOW Asserted to PDATA Valid  
MIN  
0
TYP  
MAX  
50  
UNITS  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t3  
t4  
nWAIT Asserted to nWRITE Change (Note 1)  
nWRITE to Command Asserted  
60  
5
185  
35  
ns  
ns  
nWAIT Deasserted to Command Deasserted  
(Note 1)  
60  
190  
ns  
t5  
t6  
nWAIT Asserted to PDATA Invalid (Note 1)  
Time Out  
0
10  
0
ns  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
12  
t7  
Command Deasserted to nWAIT Asserted  
SDATA Valid to nIOW Asserted  
nIOW Deasserted to DATA Invalid  
nIOW Asserted to IOCHRDY Asserted  
t8  
10  
0
t9  
t10  
t11  
0
24  
nWAIT Deasserted to IOCHRDY Deasserted  
(Note 1)  
60  
160  
t12  
t13  
t14  
t15  
t16  
t17  
t18  
t19  
t20  
t21  
t22  
IOCHRDY Deasserted to nIOW Deasserted  
nIOW Asserted to nWRITE Asserted  
nWAIT Asserted to Command Asserted (Note 1)  
Command Asserted to nWAIT Deasserted  
PDATA Valid to Command Asserted  
Ax Valid to nIOW Asserted  
10  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
70  
210  
10  
60  
0
10  
40  
10  
40  
60  
0
nIOW Asserted to Ax Invalid  
nIOW Deasserted to nIOW or nIOR Asserted  
nWAIT Asserted to nWRITE Asserted (Note 1)  
nWAIT Asserted to PDIR Low  
185  
PDIR Low to nWRITE Asserted  
0
Note 1: nWAIT must be filtered to compensate for ringing on the parallel bus cable. WAIT is  
considered to have settled after it does not transition for a minimum of 50 nsec.  
263  
t20  
t12  
A0-A10  
IOR  
t19  
t11  
t22  
t13  
SD<7:0>  
t18  
t10  
t8  
IOCHRDY  
t24  
t23  
t27  
t17  
PDIR  
nWRITE  
t9  
t21  
PData bus driven  
by peripheral  
t2  
t25  
t5  
t4  
t16  
PD<7:0>  
t28  
t26  
t1  
t14  
t3  
DATASTB  
ADDRSTB  
t15  
t7  
t6  
nWAIT  
FIGURE 31A - EPP 1.9 DATA OR ADDRESS READ CYCLE  
SEE TIMING PARAMETERS ON NEXT PAGE  
264  
FIGURE 31B - EPP 1.9 DATA OR ADDRESS READ CYCLE TIMING PARAMETERS  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
PDATA Hi-Z to Command Asserted  
MIN  
0
TYP  
MAX  
30  
UNITS  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t3  
nIOR Asserted to PDATA Hi-Z  
0
50  
ns  
nWAIT Deasserted to Command Deasserted  
(Note 1)  
60  
180  
ns  
t4  
t5  
Command Deasserted to PDATA Hi-Z  
Command Asserted to PDATA Valid  
PDATA Hi-Z to nWAIT Deasserted  
PDATA Valid to nWAIT Deasserted  
nIOR Asserted to IOCHRDY Asserted  
nWRITE Deasserted to nIOR Asserted (Note 2)  
0
0
ns  
ns  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t6  
0
t7  
0
t8  
0
24  
t9  
0
t10  
nWAIT Deasserted to IOCHRDY Deasserted  
(Note 1)  
60  
160  
t11  
t12  
t13  
t14  
t15  
t16  
t17  
t18  
t19  
t20  
t21  
t22  
t23  
t24  
t25  
t26  
t27  
t28  
IOCHRDY Deasserted to nIOR Deasserted  
nIOR Deasserted to SDATA Hi-Z (Hold Time)  
PDATA Valid to SDATA Valid  
0
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
40  
75  
0
nWAIT Asserted to Command Asserted  
Time Out  
0
195  
12  
10  
60  
60  
0
nWAIT Deasserted to PDATA Driven (Note 1)  
nWAIT Deasserted to nWRITE Modified (Notes 1,2)  
SDATA Valid to IOCHRDY Deasserted (Note 3)  
Ax Valid to nIOR Asserted  
190  
190  
85  
40  
10  
0
nIOR Deasserted to Ax Invalid  
10  
nWAIT Asserted to nWRITE Deasserted  
nIOR Deasserted to nIOW or nIOR Asserted  
nWAIT Asserted to PDIR Set (Note 1)  
PDATA Hi-Z to PDIR Set  
185  
40  
60  
0
185  
nWAIT Asserted to PDATA Hi-Z (Note 1)  
PDIR Set to Command  
60  
0
180  
20  
nWAIT Deasserted to PDIR Low (Note 1)  
nWRITE Deasserted to Command  
60  
1
180  
Note 1: nWAIT is considered to have settled after it does not transition for a minimum of 50 ns.  
Note 2: When not executing a write cycle, EPP nWRITE is inactive high.  
Note 3: 85 is true only if t7 = 0.  
265  
t18  
t9  
A0-A10  
SD<7:0>  
nIOW  
t17  
t8  
t6  
t19  
t12  
t10  
t20  
t11  
IOCHRDY  
nWRITE  
t2  
t5  
t13  
t1  
PD<7:0>  
t16  
t3  
t4  
nDATAST  
nADDRSTB  
t21  
nWAIT  
PDIR  
FIGURE 32A - EPP 1.7 DATA OR ADDRESS WRITE CYCLE  
SEE TIMING PARAMETERS ON NEXT PAGE  
266  
FIGURE 32B - EPP 1.7 DATA OR ADDRESS WRITE CYCLE PARAMETERS  
NAME  
t1  
DESCRIPTION  
nIOW Asserted to PDATA Valid  
MIN  
0
TYP  
MAX  
50  
UNITS  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ms  
ns  
ns  
ns  
t2  
Command Deasserted to nWRITE Change  
nWRITE to Command  
0
40  
t3  
5
35  
t4  
nIOW Deasserted to Command Deasserted (Note 2)  
Command Deasserted to PDATA Invalid  
Time Out  
50  
t5  
50  
10  
10  
0
t6  
12  
t8  
SDATA Valid to nIOW Asserted  
t9  
nIOW Deasserted to DATA Invalid  
nIOW Asserted to IOCHRDY Asserted  
nWAIT Deasserted to IOCHRDY Deasserted  
IOCHRDY Deasserted to nIOW Deasserted  
nIOW Asserted to nWRITE Asserted  
PDATA Valid to Command Asserted  
Ax Valid to nIOW Asserted  
t10  
t11  
t12  
t13  
t16  
t17  
t18  
t19  
t20  
t21  
0
24  
40  
10  
0
50  
35  
10  
40  
10  
100  
nIOW Deasserted to Ax Invalid  
nIOW Deasserted to nIOW or nIOR Asserted  
nWAIT Asserted to IOCHRDY Deasserted  
Command Deasserted to nWAIT Deasserted  
45  
0
Note 1: nWRITE is controlled by clearing the PDIR bit to "0" in the control register before performing  
an EPP Write.  
Note 2: The number is only valid if nWAIT is active when IOW goes active.  
267  
t20  
A0-A10  
nIOR  
t15  
t11  
t22  
t19  
t13  
t12  
SD<7:0>  
t8  
t10  
t3  
IOCHRDY  
nWRITE  
t5  
t4  
PD<7:0>  
t23  
t2  
nDATASTB  
nADDRSTB  
t21  
nWAIT  
PDIR  
FIGURE 33A - EPP 1.7 DATA OR ADDRESS READ CYCLE  
SEE TIMING PARAMETERS ON NEXT PAGE  
268  
FIGURE 33B - EPP 1.7 DATA OR ADDRESS READ CYCLE PARAMETERS  
NAME  
t2  
DESCRIPTION  
nIOR Deasserted to Command Deasserted  
nWAIT Asserted to IOCHRDY Deasserted  
Command Deasserted to PDATA Hi-Z  
Command Asserted to PDATA Valid  
nIOR Asserted to IOCHRDY Asserted  
nWAIT Deasserted to IOCHRDY Deasserted  
IOCHRDY Deasserted to nIOR Deasserted  
nIOR Deasserted to SDATA High-Z (Hold Time)  
PDATA Valid to SDATA Valid  
MIN  
TYP  
MAX  
50  
UNITS  
ns  
t3  
0
0
0
40  
ns  
t4  
ns  
t5  
ns  
t8  
24  
50  
ns  
t10  
t11  
t12  
t13  
t15  
t19  
t20  
t21  
t22  
t23  
ns  
0
0
ns  
40  
40  
12  
ns  
ns  
Time Out  
10  
40  
10  
0
ms  
Ax Valid to nIOR Asserted  
ns  
nIOR Deasserted to Ax Invalid  
ns  
Command Deasserted to nWAIT Deasserted  
nIOR Deasserted to nIOW or nIOR Asserted  
nIOR Asserted to Command Asserted  
ns  
40  
ns  
55  
ns  
Note:  
WRITE is controlled by setting the PDIR bit to "1" in the control register before performing an  
EPP Read.  
269  
ECP PARALLEL PORT TIMING  
The host then sets HostClk (nStrobe) high. The  
Parallel Port FIFO (Mode 101)  
peripheral then accepts the data and sets  
PeriphAck (Busy) low, completing the transfer.  
This sequence is shown in Figure 35.  
The standard parallel port is run at or near the  
peak 500 Kbps allowed in the forward direction  
using DMA.  
examine nACK and begins the next transfer  
based on Busy. Refer to Figure 34.  
The state machine does not  
The timing is designed to provide three cable  
round-trip times for data setup if Data is driven  
simultaneously with HostClk (nStrobe).  
ECP Parallel Port Timing  
Reverse-Idle Phase  
The timing is designed to allow operation at  
approximately 2.0 Mbps over a 15ft cable. If a  
shorter cable is used then the bandwidth will  
increase.  
The peripheral has no data to send and keeps  
PeriphClk high. The host is idle and keeps  
HostAck low.  
Reverse Data Transfer Phase  
Forward-Idle  
The interface transfers data and commands  
from the peripheral to the host using an inter-  
locked HostAck and PeriphClk.  
When the host has no data to send it keeps  
HostClk (nStrobe) high and the peripheral will  
leave PeriphClk (Busy) low.  
The Reverse Data Transfer Phase may be  
entered from the Reverse-Idle Phase. After the  
previous byte has beed accepted the host sets  
HostAck (nALF) low. The peripheral then sets  
PeriphClk (nACK) low when it has data to send.  
The data must be stable for the specified setup  
time prior to the falling edge of PeriphClk. When  
the host is ready to accept a byte it sets  
HostAck (nALF) high to acknowledge the  
handshake. The peripheral then sets PeriphClk  
(nACK) high. After the host has accepted the  
data it sets HostAck (nALF) low, completing the  
transfer. This sequence is shown in Figure 36.  
Forward Data Transfer Phase  
The interface transfers data and commands  
from the host to the peripheral using an inter-  
locked PeriphAck and HostClk. The peripheral  
may indicate its desire to send data to the host  
by asserting nPeriphRequest.  
The Forward Data Transfer Phase may be  
entered from the Forward-Idle Phase. While in  
the Forward Phase the peripheral may  
asynchronously assert the nPeriphRequest  
(nFault) to request that the channel be reversed.  
When the peripheral is not busy it sets  
PeriphAck (Busy) low. The host then sets  
HostClk (nStrobe) low when it is prepared to  
send data. The data must be stable for the  
specified setup time prior to the falling edge of  
HostClk. The peripheral then sets PeriphAck  
(Busy) high to acknowledge the handshake.  
Output Drivers  
To facilitate higher performance data transfer,  
the use of balanced CMOS active drivers for  
critical signals (Data, HostAck, HostClk,  
PeriphAck, PeriphClk) are used ECP Mode.  
Because the use of active drivers can present  
compatibility problems in Compatible Mode (the  
control signals, by tradition, are specified as  
270  
open-collector), the drivers are dynamically  
changed from open-collector to totem-pole. The  
Capabilities Port Protocol and ISA Interface  
Standard, Rev. 1.14, July 14, 1993, available  
from Microsoft. The dynamic driver change  
must be implemented properly to prevent  
glitching the outputs.  
timing for the  
specified in  
dynamic  
driver change is  
then  
IEEE 1284 Extended  
t6  
t3  
PDATA  
t1  
t2  
t5  
nSTROBE  
t4  
BUSY  
FIGURE 34 - PARALLEL PORT FIFO TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
MIN  
600  
600  
450  
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t5  
t6  
DATA Valid to nSTROBE Active  
nSTROBE Active Pulse Width  
ns  
DATA Hold from nSTROBE Inactive (Note 1)  
nSTROBE Active to BUSY Active  
BUSY Inactive to nSTROBE Active  
BUSY Inactive to PDATA Invalid (Note 1)  
ns  
500  
ns  
680  
80  
ns  
ns  
Note 1: The data is held until BUSY goes inactive or for time t3, whichever is longer. This only  
applies if another data transfer is pending. If no other data transfer is pending, the data is  
held indefinitely.  
271  
t3  
t4  
nAUTOFD  
PDATA<7:0>  
t2  
t1  
t7  
t8  
nSTROBE  
BUSY  
t6  
t5  
t6  
FIGURE 35 - ECP PARALLEL PORT FORWARD TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
MIN  
0
TYP  
MAX  
60  
UNITS  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t3  
nAUTOFD Valid to nSTROBE Asserted  
PDATA Valid to nSTROBE Asserted  
0
60  
ns  
BUSY Deasserted to nAUTOFD Changed  
(Notes 1,2)  
80  
180  
ns  
t4  
t5  
t6  
t7  
t8  
BUSY Deasserted to PDATA Changed (Notes 1,2)  
nSTROBE Deasserted to Busy Asserted  
80  
0
180  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
nSTROBE Deasserted to Busy Deasserted  
0
BUSY Deasserted to nSTROBE Asserted (Notes 1,2)  
BUSY Asserted to nSTROBE Deasserted (Note 2)  
80  
80  
200  
180  
Note 1: Maximum value only applies if there is data in the FIFO waiting to be written out.  
Note 2: BUSY is not considered asserted or deasserted until it is stable for a minimum of 75 to 130  
ns.  
272  
t2  
PDATA<7:0>  
t1  
t5  
t6  
nACK  
t4  
t3  
t4  
nAUTOFD  
FIGURE 36 - ECP PARALLEL PORT REVERSE TIMING  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
MIN  
0
TYP  
MAX  
UNITS  
ns  
t1  
t2  
t3  
PDATA Valid to nACK Asserted  
nAUTOFD Deasserted to PDATA Changed  
0
ns  
nACK Asserted to nAUTOFD Deasserted  
(Notes 1,2)  
80  
200  
200  
ns  
t4  
t5  
t6  
nACK Deasserted to nAUTOFD Asserted (Note 2)  
nAUTOFD Asserted to nACK Asserted  
80  
0
ns  
ns  
ns  
nAUTOFD Deasserted to nACK Deasserted  
0
Note 1: Maximum value only applies if there is room in the FIFO and terminal count has not been  
received. ECP can stall by keeping nAUTOFD low.  
Note 2: nACK is not considered asserted or deasserted until it is stable for a minimum of 75 to 130  
ns.  
273  
AB_DATA  
tLOW  
tBUF  
tHD;STA  
tR  
tF  
AB_CLK  
tHD;STA  
tSU;STO  
tHD;DAT  
tHIGH  
tSU;DAT  
tSU;STA  
FIGURE 37 - ACCESS.BUS TIMING  
SYMBOL  
PARAMETER  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
SCL Clock Frequency  
Bus Free Time  
100  
KHz  
f
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
SCL  
4.7  
4.7  
4.0  
4.7  
4.0  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
BUF  
START Condition Setup Time  
START Condition Hold Time  
SCL LOW Time  
SU;STA  
HD;STA  
LOW  
SCL HIGH Time  
HIGH  
R
SCL and SDA Rise Time  
SCL and SDA Fall Time  
Data Set-Up Time  
1.0  
0.3  
F
250  
0
SU;DAT  
HD;DAT  
SU;STO  
Data Hold Time  
STOP Condition Setup Time  
4.0  
274  
DATA  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
t2  
t1  
t2  
t1  
IRRX  
nIRRX  
Parameter  
min  
typ  
max  
units  
t1 Pulse Width at 115kbaud  
t1 Pulse Width at 57.6kbaud  
t1 Pulse Width at 38.4kbaud  
t1 Pulse Width at 19.2kbaud  
t1 Pulse Width at 9.6kbaud  
t1 Pulse Width at 4.8kbaud  
t1 Pulse Width at 2.4kbaud  
t2 Bit Time at 115kbaud  
t2 Bit Time at 57.6kbaud  
t2 Bit Time at 38.4kbaud  
t2 Bit Time at 19.2kbaud  
t2 Bit Time at 9.6kbaud  
1.4  
1.4  
1.4  
1.4  
1.4  
1.4  
1.4  
1.6  
3.22  
4.8  
2.71  
3.69  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
5.53  
9.7  
11.07  
22.13  
44.27  
88.55  
19.5  
39  
78  
8.68  
17.4  
26  
52  
104  
208  
416  
t2 Bit Time at 4.8kbaud  
t2 Bit Time at 2.4kbaud  
Note1: Receive Pulse Detection Criteria: A received pulse is considered detected if the  
received pulse is a minimum of 1.41µs.  
Note 2: IRRX: L5, CRF1 Bit 0: 1 = RCV active low  
nIRRX: L5, CRF1 Bit 0: 0 = RCV active high (default)  
Note 3: This polarity assumes that the GPIO has not been programmed for inverted.  
FIGURE 38 - IrDA RECEIVE TIMING  
275  
DATA  
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
t2  
t1  
t1  
t2  
IRTX  
n IRTX  
Parameter  
min  
typ  
max  
units  
t1  
t1  
t1  
t1  
t1  
t1  
t1  
t2  
t2  
t2  
t2  
t2  
t2  
t2  
Pulse W idth at 115kbaud  
Pulse W idth at 57.6kbaud  
Pulse W idth at 38.4kbaud  
Pulse W idth at 19.2kbaud  
Pulse W idth at 9.6kbaud  
Pulse W idth at 4.8kbaud  
Pulse W idth at 2.4kbaud  
Bit Time at 115kbaud  
Bit Time at 57.6kbaud  
Bit Time at 38.4kbaud  
Bit Time at 19.2kbaud  
Bit Time at 9.6kbaud  
1.41  
1.41  
1.41  
1.41  
1.41  
1.41  
1.41  
1.6  
3.22  
4.8  
2.71  
3.69  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
5.53  
9.7  
11.07  
22.13  
44.27  
88.55  
19.5  
39  
78  
8.68  
17.4  
26  
52  
104  
208  
416  
Bit Time at 4.8kbaud  
Bit Time at 2.4kbaud  
Notes:  
1. IrDA @ 115k is HPSIR compatible. IrDA @ 2400 will allow compatibility with HP95LX  
and 48SX.  
2. IRTX: L5, CRF1 Bit 1: 1 = XMIT active low (default)  
nIRTX: L5, CRF1 Bit 1: 0 = XMIT active high  
3. This polarity assumes that the GPIO has not been programmed for inverted.  
FIGURE 39 - IrDA TRANSMIT TIMING  
276  
DATA  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
t1  
t2  
IRRX  
n IRRX  
t3 t4  
MIRRX  
t5 t6  
nMIRRX  
Parameter  
min  
typ  
max  
units  
t1  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t5  
t6  
Modulated Output Bit Time  
Off Bit Time  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
Modulated Output "On"  
Modulated Output "Off"  
Modulated Output "On"  
Modulated Output "Off"  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1
1
1
1
1.2  
1.2  
1.2  
1.2  
Note 1: IRRX: L5, CRF1 Bit 0: 1 = RCV active low  
nIRRX: L5, CRF1 Bit 0: 0 = RCV active high (default)  
MIRRX, nMIRRX are the modulated outputs  
Note 2: This polarity assumes that the GPIO has not been programmed for inverted.  
FIGURE 40 - AMPLITUDE SHIFT KEYED IR RECEIVE TIMING  
277  
DATA  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
t1  
t2  
IRTX  
nIRTX  
t3 t4  
MIRTX  
t5 t6  
nMIRTX  
Parameter  
min  
typ  
max  
units  
t1  
t2  
t3  
t4  
t5  
t6  
Modulated Output Bit Time  
Off Bit Time  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
µs  
Modulated Output "On"  
Modulated Output "Off"  
Modulated Output "On"  
Modulated Output "Off"  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1
1
1
1
1.2  
1.2  
1.2  
1.2  
Note 1: IRTX: L5, CRF1 Bit 1: 1 = XMIT active low  
nIRTX: L5, CRF1 Bit 1: 0 = XMIT active  
MIRTX, nMIRTX are the modulated  
Note 2: This polarity assumes that the GPIO has not been programmed for inverted.  
FIGURE 41 - AMPLITUDE SHIFT KEYED IR TRANSMIT TIMING  
278  
D
3
D1  
DETAIL "A"  
R1  
120  
81  
R2  
121  
80  
0
L
5
L1  
E
E1  
W
2
7
D1/4  
e
E1/4  
160  
41  
1
40  
A
A2  
4
T / T  
D
E
H
0.10  
0
1
A1  
SEE DETAIL "A"  
-C-  
Notes:  
MIN  
NOM  
MAX  
4.07  
0.5  
A
1)  
2)  
Coplanarity is 0.100 mm maximum  
A1  
0.05  
3.10  
Tolerance on the position of the leads is 0.120  
mm maximum  
A2  
D
3.67  
30.95 31.20  
31.45  
3)  
Package body dimensions D1 and E1 do not  
include the mold protrusion. Maximum mold  
protrusion is 0.25 mm  
D1  
E3  
27.90 28.00 28.10  
30.95 31.20 31.45  
27.90 28.00 28.10  
E1  
H
4)  
5)  
Dimensions TD and TE are important for testing  
by robotic handler  
0.10  
0.65  
0.200  
0.95  
L
0.80  
1.60  
Dimensions for foot length L w hen measured at  
the centerline of the leads are given at the table  
L1  
Dimension for foot length L w hen measured at  
the gauge plane 0.25 mm above the seating  
plane is 0.78 - 1.03 mm  
e
0.65BSC  
0
0
7
W
R1  
R2  
0.20  
0.40  
6)  
7)  
Controlling dimension: millimeter  
0.20  
Details of pin 1 identifier are optional but must  
be located w ithin the zone indicated  
0.30  
T
T
30.45  
30.45  
D
E
FIGURE 42 - 160 PIN QFP PACKAGE OUTLINES  
279  
1999© STANDARD MICROSYSTEMS  
CORP.  
Circuit diagrams utilizing SMSC products are included as a means of illustrating  
typical applications; consequently complete information sufficient for construction  
purposes is not necessarily given. The information has been carefully checked and  
is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for  
inaccuracies. Furthermore, such information does not convey to the purchaser of the  
semiconductor devices described any licenses under the patent rights of SMSC or  
others. SMSC reserves the right to make changes at any time in order to improve  
design and supply the best product possible. SMSC products are not designed,  
intended, authorized or warranted for use in any life support or other application  
where product failure could cause or contribute to personal injury or severe property  
damage. Any and all such uses without prior written approval of an Officer of SMSC  
and further testing and/or modification will be fully at the risk of the customer.  
FDC37C93xAPM Rev. 11/02/99  

相关型号:

FDC37C93XFR

IC,PERIPHERAL (MULTIFUNCTION) CONTROLLER,CMOS,QFP,160PIN
MICROCHIP

FDC37C93XFR

Multifunction Peripheral, CMOS, PQFP160, QFP-160
SMSC

FDC37C93XPM

Multifunction Peripheral, CMOS, PQFP16, QFP-160
SMSC

FDC37C957FR

ULTRA I/O CONTROLLER FOR PORTABLE APPLICATIONS
SMSC

FDC37C957FR-TQFP

Micro Peripheral IC, CMOS, PQFP208
SMSC

FDC37CXFR

Plug and Play Compatible Ultra I/O Controller with Fast IR
SMSC

FDC37M600

ENHANCED SUPER I/O CONTROLLER WITH INFRARED SUPPORT
SMSC

FDC37M601

ENHANCED SUPER I/O CONTROLLER WITH INFRARED SUPPORT
SMSC

FDC37M602

ENHANCED SUPER I/O CONTROLLER WITH INFRARED SUPPORT
SMSC

FDC37M603

ENHANCED SUPER I/O CONTROLLER WITH INFRARED SUPPORT
SMSC

FDC37M604

ENHANCED SUPER I/O CONTROLLER WITH INFRARED SUPPORT
SMSC

FDC37M605

ENHANCED SUPER I/O CONTROLLER WITH INFRARED SUPPORT
SMSC